Home

Multi-Tech Systems E1 User's Manual

1. Command Port Connection Hub Network Connection Telephony Connection Figure 3 5 Cabling for MVP2410 3010 2 Connect the MultiVOIP to the PC the computer that will hold the MultiVOIP software using the RJ 45 to DB9 female cable provided with your unit Plug the RJ 45 end of the cable into the Command port of the MultiVOIP and connect the other end the DB9 connector to the PC serial port you are using typically COM1 or COM2 See Figure 3 5 3 Connect a network cable to the Ethernet connector on the back of the MultiVOIP Connect the other end of the cable to your network 36 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling 4 If you intend to configure the MultiVOIP remotely using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI connect an RJ 11 phone cable between the Command Modem connector at the rear of the MultiVOIP and a receptacle served by a telco POTS line See Figure 3 6 The Command Modem is built into the MultiVOIP unit To configure the MultiVOIP remotely using its Windows GUI you must call into the MultiVOIP s Command Modem Once a connection is made the configuration process is identical to local configuration with the Windows GUI GE OMMAND ETHERNET COMMAND D Bebe s N Grounding Screw m By E Ti
2. 132 Custom Tone Pair Settings Definitions Field Name Values Description Cadence 1 integer time On off pattern of tone durations value in used to denote phone ringing milli seconds phone busy dial tone 0 zero value for indicates continuous tone dial tone survivability and re order indicates Cadence 1 is duration of first continuous tone period of tone being on in the cadence of the telephony signal which could be ring tone busy tone unobtainable tone or dial tone Cadence 2 duration in Cadence 2 is duration of first milliseconds off period in signaling cadence Cadence 3 duration in Cadence 3 is duration of second milliseconds on period in signaling cadence Cadence 4 duration in Cadence 4 is duration of second milliseconds off period in the signaling cadence after which the 4 part cadence pattern of the telephony signal repeats MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 14 Set SMTP Parameters Log Reports by Email The SMTP Parameters screen is applicable when the VOIP administrator has chosen to receive log reports by email this is done by selecting the SMTP checkbox in the Others screen and selecting Enable SMTP in the SMTP Parameters screen The SMTP Parameters screen can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing SMTP Parameters Pulldown Icon Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channe
3. 63 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 4B Fixing a Cabling Problem If the MultiVOIP cannot be located by the computer two error messages will appear saying Multi VOIP Not Found and Phone Database Not Read Multi OIP Multi olIP PDD x Multi OIP Not Found Phone Database not Read In this case the MultiVOIP is simply disconnected from the network For instructions on MultiVOIP cable connections see the Cabling section of Chapter 3 5 Configuration Parameter Groups Getting Familiar Learning About Access The first part of configuration concerns IP parameters Voice FAX parameters Telephony Interface parameters SNMP parameters Regional parameters SMTP parameters Supplementary Services parameters Logs and System Information In the MultiVOIP software these seven types of parameters are grouped together under Configuration and each has its own dialog box for entering values Generally you can reach the dialog box for these parameter groups in one of four ways pulldown menu toolbar icon keyboard shortcut or sidebar 64 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 6 Set Ethernet IP Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu toolbar icon keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Ethernet IP Parameters Pulldown Icon gt Multi oIP Multi OIP v6 08 CE 06 08 d amp Multi oIP Multi OIP Configuration Configuration
4. eee 286 Blue Alarm oseese 284 Excessive Zeroes usses 286 Loss of Frame Alignment 284 Loss of MultiFrame Alignment 285 Receive Slip ceeeeeeseeeeeees 286 374 MultiVOIP User Guide Receive Timeslot 16 Alarm Indication Signal 0 285 Receive Timeslot 16 Loss of MultiFrame Alignment 286 Receive Timeslot 16 Loss of Signal sngereoetoterddae ra eaten raters 285 Red Alam oeie irises 284 Status Freeze Signalling Active 285 Transmit Data Overflow 285 Transmit Data Underrun 286 Transmit Line Open 0 286 Transmit Line Short 285 Transmit Slip 286 Transmit Slip Negative 286 Transmit Slip Positive 285 Yellow Alarm eeceeeeeeseceeees 285 E1 telephony parameters 56 Echo Cancellation field 0 82 echo removing sseeseeessseessrsreeesee 82 Edit selected Inbound Phonebook Entry icon Errefrau naren 216 A N RA E T 173 Edit selected Outbound Phonebook Entry icon Bl E E bees 216 PA visio shied ahhGid Bate iced 173 email account for voip unit 134 email address for voip 57 133 email log reports eee eeeeeeeees 133 email logs illustration 0 139 EMC Safety R amp TTE Directive Compliance n se 348 Enable Call Fwdg Bl E eapsiehedinviele beled 229 linen ericdihbagd Bae wit 186 Enable STUN field 157 Enable Accounting RADIUS
5. cccee eee 97 Enable Caller ID 00 96 Enable ISDN PRI 95 103 Frame Format cccccccsssseees 92 Generation Time ccce cece 97 Line Build Out eee 97 Line Coding seese 98 Long Haul Mode e eee 92 Operator siisii iiis 96 PCM Law cccccecccceceesseessesseeeees 98 Pulse Shape Level 97 TI EIASDN Wwe ccceeee cece 92 Terminal Network 95 103 Tone Detection Enable 95 Yellow Alarm Format 98 T1 Parameters screen ccccce 91 T1 Statistics field definitions 282 283 T1 Statistics fields Bipolar Violation cee 283 Frame Search Restart Flag 282 Line Loopback Activation Signal SUR Matin ae Sins 282 Loss of MultiFrame Alignment 282 Pulse Density Violation 282 Receive Slip oi ce eeeeeeeseeeeeeee 283 Transmit Data Underrun 282 Transmit Line Open 282 Transmit Slip ossee 282 Transmit Slip Negative 282 Yellow Alarm oo eee 282 T1 telephony parameters 55 T1 E1 connector pinout 354 TI EI ISDN field Bile E E Acute 100 Tis seine tec a acinnad 92 T1 EI1 ISDN Parameters screen BCCESSING riranki isie 89 TI E1 ISDN parameters setting 89 table top voip models 06 31 TCP UDP compared Elasin otasini e aout 223 IP Statistics context 273 391 Index Tal ET 180 TDM Routing Option Ethern
6. ccsceceeeees 160 RAS Port H 323 Call Signaling field ESE AE EA eisk voviests ees bent 110 RAS TTL Value Gatekeeper RAS fields 432 enced eceintiens 111 Receive Slip E1 Stats field 286 Receive Slip T1 Stats field 283 Receive Timeslot 16 Alarm Indication Signal E1 stats field 285 Receive Timeslot 16 Loss of MultiFrame Alignment E1 stats Helde aeara eee a oast 286 Receive Timeslot 16 Loss of Signal El stats field eeeeereees 285 Received RTCP Packets IP Stats Received with Errors RTCP Packets IP Stats field eee eeeeeeeeee 275 Received with Errors RTP Packets IP Stats feldo 275 Received with Errors TCP Packets IP Stats field cece 274 Received with Errors Total Packets IP Stats field eee eeeeeeeeee 274 Received with Errors UDP Packets IP Stats feldi rarene 274 Recipient Address email logs field EA Oi Aiton Fv E Bite Aiea et 135 recovering voice packets 82 Red Alarm E1 stats field 284 Index Red Alarm T1 stats field 281 Regional Parameter definitions 126 127 128 129 Regional Parameter fields Cadence ienee 128 Country Region tone schemes 126 Custom toneS ccececeeceeees 128 Frequency lerroren 127 Frequency 2 0 0 eeeeeeeneeeseeeeeee 127 Gat oirn eie nakee cases 127 Gain A reee ee ei aves 127 Pulse Generation Ratio 128 type Of tone ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 1
7. EXAMPLE Digital amp Analog VOIPs Site D in Same System Area Code 615 An 1 Other extensions R x3101 x3199 1 1 r ama Site E n e yee ats weet ND SSE Aer C UT Enan Area Code 701 I Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP I Server Client Phonebook I MVP200 l I OKO FXS Unit cH 200 a EJ 421 200 2 9 7 201 t Client Site F 7 Lincoln NE Po Area Code 402 N s 200 2 9 5 Site B Rochester MN Area Code 507 Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Server Client Phonebook MVP c 100 200 2 9 8 1 Host l Holds phonebook for both H Series 1 analog VOIPs I S lt 507 717 5662 Site C Suburban Rochester 195 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Series I analog VOIP phone book resides in the Host VOIP unit at Site B It applies to both of the Series I analog VOIP units Each of the Series II analog MultiVOIPs the MVP210 and the MVP410 requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks The MVP2410 digital MultiVOIP requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks as well 196 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration These seven phone books are shown below Phone Book for Series Analog VOIP Host Unit Site B VOIP Dir IP Address Channel Comments OR Destination Pattern 102 200 2 9 8 2 Site B FXS channel 101 200 2 9 8 1 Site B FXO channel 421 2
8. Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H Interface Ctrl Alt N SNMP Parameters Ctrl M BS Cont iguration Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Voice Fax Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H Interface System Information Ctrl aAlt Call Signaling Ctrl alt C gt Radius NAT Traversal Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Voice Fax Ctrl Alt I Interface Call Signaling SNMP Regional SMTP Radius Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information 65 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In each field enter the values that fit your particular network SVoice F 3 Excellent Effort 7 O Best Effort 7 Multi olP 216 133 69 77 66 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The Ethernet IP Parameters fields are described in the tables and text passages below Note that both DiffServ parameters Call Control PHB and VoIP Media PHB must be set to zero if you enable Packet Prioritization 802 1p Nonzero DiffServ values negate the prioritization scheme Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Ethernet Parameters Packet Y N Select to activate Prioritization prioritization under 802 1p 802 1p protocol described below Frame Type Type II SNAP Must be set to match networ
9. ceee 124 Call Control PHB field 70 Call Control Priority Ethernet IP parameters field eee 68 Call Control Status field sh eke eee estes ee 263 Call Control Status call progress Tel deh cite A ct tl ae 263 Call Direction SMTP logs field 137 Call Duration field eee 88 Call Forward Parameters inbound phonebook 1 OF eee Rain eee ec Tena anes 229 Tesch Meet Ne ee a 187 Call Forwarded To logs statistics field 270 Call Holdren an araa 145 BA E E E 23 Tenra aE 15 Call Hold Enable eee 148 Call Mode RADIUS Attributes field EE A E TE E 161 Call Mode SMTP logs field 136 Call Name Identification 145 BT E E easiest aaah 23 TD sce Bees dese eee 15 Call Name Identification Calling Party sosise 150 Call Name Identification Alerting Party cesses 151 Call Name Identification Alerting Party teers 152 Call Name Identification Alerting Party cece 153 Call On Hold Call Progress Details statistics fields a east aaa ees 262 Call on Hold call progress field 262 Call Progress Statistics 256 369 Index Call Progress Details statistics field definitions 258 259 260 261 262 263 Call Progress Details statistics screen field Call On Hold s es 262 Call Waiting seese 262 Caller IDs atai 262 Call Progress Details statistics screen fields Channel cc ceceesse
10. 163 Description caller 0 163 Disconnect Reason 66 162 From Gateway Number 163 From IP Address 0 cc000 163 Outbound Digits sent 162 Packets LOSt cccccceceesesseeeeee 162 Prefix Matched ccceee 162 Server Details cccccccsseeeees 162 To Gateway Numbet 163 To IP Address ccceeeeeeeeeeee 163 Custom Fields RADIUS Attributes Call Mode ooo ceccecsseceeseeeseeeee 161 Channel Numbet 6 161 Duration 0 cccccceesseceeeeeeeees 161 Packets Received 0006 161 Packets Sent ccccccccsssseeeeeee 161 SelectAll wisi ccna eis 161 Start Date Time 0 161 Custom Fields SMTP log email Bytes Received 0 cece 137 Bytes Sent eee eeeeseeeee 137 Call Direction ccceeeeeeeeee 137 Call Mode ooo ceeccecsseceeseeeseeeee 136 Call Stats na 137 Call Type vicsiainnsinaniscaes 137 Channel Numbet 0 136 Coders scien Aackadsuaccncas 137 Options icc kadai 138 Options i nuk suiii 138 Description callee 0 138 Description caller 6 138 Disconnect Reason 6 138 DTMF Capability 137 Duration ccccccceesseceeeseeeeees 136 From Gateway Number 138 372 MultiVOIP User Guide From IP Address eeseceeeee 138 Outbound Digits Received 137 Outbound dig
11. 86 Dynamic Jitter fields 87 El Parameter definitions 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 Index Answer Delay Enable 102 Answer Delay Timet 102 FXS Current Detect Timer 103 E1 Parameter definitions FXS Supervision Tone Detection ccccccecee 103 E1 Parameter fields CAS Protocol cceeeeees 101 FXS Options No Response TIMET onerosi es enia 101 No Response Timer FXS Options s 101 Answer Tones cccceeseeeeees 103 Available Tones List 103 Caller ID Enable 0 105 Calling Number Prefix 104 Calling Number Prefix Caller ID Sangh eet raat nits AN 105 Calling Number Suffix 104 Calling Number Suffix Caller ID aL EE ete E SEE 105 Clocking denora 105 COUMILY osise iisisti ittatok 104 CRC Check eriein nie 101 Detect Flash Hook 06 105 Detection Time c cceeeees 105 Enable Caller ID 104 Frame Format ccccsseeees 101 Generation Time c ce 105 Line Build Out c eee 105 Line Coding eeeeeeeeeeeeee 106 Long Haul Mode ee 101 Operator seien 104 PCM Law ciccscscavssccsstteesticaiecesens 106 Pulse Shape Level 105 Tone Detection Enable 103 Yellow Alarm Format 106 El Parameters screen 08 99 E1 Statistics field definitions 284 285 286 E1 Statistics fields Bipolar Variation
12. 155 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Accessing NAT Traversal Parameters Pulldown Icon Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrlt Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H TIjE1 ISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl Alt Call Signaling Alt c RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt SFt v Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt Sft Voice Fax VH Call Signaling TIs E1s ISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces Descriptions for NAT Traversal screen fields are presented in the table below 156 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration NAT Traversal Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Enable Y N Enables STUN client functionality in STUN the MultiVOIP STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs Network Address Translation is a protocol that allows a server to assist client gateways behind a NAT firewall or router with their packet routing Name IP n n n n IP address of the STUN server Server 0 255 Port Server numeric The data port TDM time slot at NAT STUN default which STUN info will be transmitted 3478 and received Keep Alive 60 3600 The interval at which the STUN client Timers in sends indic
13. Shortcut Icon Sidebar Ctrl 2 none E Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management T1 E1 Statistics Registered Gatew Servers 276 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance r Link Management m Monitor Link IP Address to Ping Ob Oe 0 Pings per Test ja Ping Size in Bytes 22 Response Timeout 1000 Time Interval between Tests jo min ms Start Now Clear m Link Status IP Address Pings Sent Pings Recei Round Trip Delay Min Ma Last Error 277 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Link Management screen Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Monitor Link fields IP Address to a b c d This is the IP address of the target Ping 0 255 endpoint to be pinged Pings per Test 1 999 This field determines how many pings will be generated by the Start Now command Response 500 5000 The duration after which a ping Timeout milliseconds will be considered to have failed Ping Size in Bytes 32 128 bytes This field determines how long or large the ping will be Timer Interval 0 or 30 6000 This field determines how long of between Pings minutes a wait there is between one ping and the next Start Now Initiates pinging command button Clear Erases ping parameters in command Monitor Link field group and button res
14. ccccccessceessecesseesseees 15 MVP2410 cccsscssccsessesesscesseers 16 MVP3010 ccecccecesceesseeeseeeeneees 24 Tlie e alec 16 LED definitions analog T1 NK os sscdteieitetieeiiis iced 16 LED definitions digital E1 TINK rrd aa r 24 LED definitions E1 BOOte si aiiians aechaveindaide 24 El ENA E EE E EAA 24 FDX ie aa aletes 24 Ci ra ide betes 24 E EEE A 24 LS EEE AOA E Ba aces 24 ONT erin se Bestest Aten 24 Powel ees oA Aas 24 PR eee oaee STE DTS 24 LED definitions T1 Bo tis a 16 IDX sis aah oT aoe EA 16 Gat sce oN aea T 16 Oh een E T 16 ESEE E EEEE 16 OND nsee a ES 16 POWOP aenant Rae eA 16 Index PRE oi rinier an 16 LED indicators BD E E E E E 23 A i DETE E E A E a 15 LED indicators active BV KORTE E EE PER 23 TA eE sent e R Rp 15 lifting precaution about eee 31 limitations notice regulatory Canadian cceeceeceeeeeseeeteeeee 350 limited warranty eee 344 Line Build Out field Ed EERE ES 105 TD AEA T 97 Line Coding field Bid EREE TS 106 Tele teea euE 98 Line Loopback Activation Signal T1 stats field oo eeeeesceeseesseeeeees 282 Line Loopback Deactivation Signal T1 stats field eee 281 Link Management Statistics fields Clear command button 278 IP Address column 00 279 IP Address to Ping eee 278 Last EOL renion erara 279 No of Pings Received 279 No of Pings Sento eee 279 Ping Size in By
15. Loading MultiVOIP Software onto the PC The software loading procedure does not present every screen or option in the loading process It is assumed that someone with a thorough knowledge of Windows and the software loading process is performing the installation The MultiVOIP software and User Guide are contained on the MultiVOIP product CD Because the CD is auto detectable it will start up automatically when you insert it into your CD ROM drive When you have finished loading your MultiVOIP software you can view and print the User Guide by clicking on the View Manuals icon 1 Be sure that your MultiVOIP has been properly cabled and that the power is turned on 39 Technical Configuration T1 E1 MultiVOIP User Guide 2 Insert the MultiVOIP CD into your CD ROM drive The CD should start automatically It may take 10 to 20 seconds for the Multi Tech CD installation window to display Welcome to the Multi Tech Systems Inc Digital MultiVOIPs Models MVP 2410 amp MVP gt version X 04 or earlier otes for ftp Upgrade Multi Techi Systems If the Multi Tech Installation CD window does not display automatically click My Computer then right click the CD ROM drive icon click Open and then click the Autorun icon 3 When the Multi Tech Installation CD dialog box appears click the Install Software icon 40 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling 4 A welcome screen appears Mu
16. cesses 37 Boot Version System Info eee 166 254 booting time Bids sspsottscthssiesthestittuss ees coltinhdd 24 A N S EA RETES 16 box contents VELIEYING inan nn 32 BRI connector pinout 356 BRI interface types ST and ssssescesseieseessevcnttisthases 357 built in modem setup in Regional Parameters SCICON oiean n rnia 59 125 busy amp no response E1 forwarding dual conditions 229 busy amp no response T1 forwarding dual conditions 187 busy tone CUStOM eee 131 DUSY CONES oo eee ee eee eee ete eee 130 Bytes Received call progress field sel iblehs r EE e E ce atest aide 259 Bytes Received RADIUS Attributes field ow 162 Bytes Received SMTP logs field 137 Bytes received statistics logs field inolerd AEE ERT T 268 Bytes Sent call progress field 259 Bytes Sent RADIUS Attributes field E Abo io E atts 162 Bytes Sent SMTP logs field 137 Bytes sent statistics logs field 268 cable length maximum span Bl E E E E ET 100 H o E EE E Antti 92 cabling problem fixing 64 cabling procedure MV P24 10 siasii 36 MultiVOIP User Guide MV P3010 is sie seen eras 36 Cadence 1 custom field 132 Cadence 2 custom field 132 Cadence 3 custom field 132 Cadence 4 custom field 132 Cadence field c ee 128 129 cadences custom TVET pn ie 132 cadences signaling
17. Frame Type TYPE I z Priority Call Control VolP Media Others 3 Excellent Effort 7 6 Voice h O Best Effort hd VLAN ID p E Save Setup E Connection Help IP Parameters Gateway Name MultivolP J Enable DHCP Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB 34 VolP Meda PHB 46 IPMask 25 25 25 0 OHP Sever Gateway vie DNS I Enable DNS F Enable SRV IP Address 1 81 The web GUI cannot perform logging in the same direct mode done in the Windows GUI However when the web GUI is used logging can be done by email SMTP The web GUI gives easy access to Console Messages Whereas with the Windows GUI console messages must be viewed using a communications program like HyperTerminal with the Web GUL it s easy just click on STATISTICS CONSOLE MESSAGES and a pop up window appears MultiVOIP 2410 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Call Progress IP Statistics Link Management T1iE1 Statistics Registered Gateway Servers Console Messages Change Password Save amp Reboot Logout Help fe Applet console started The graphic layout of the web GUI is also somewhat larger scale than that of the Windows GUI For that reason it s helpful to use as large of 336 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance a video monitor as possible in order to see all of a screen s contents with minimal scroll
18. Mail Now I Select All Fields T Channel Number M Duration I Packets Sent I Bytes Sent I Packets Lost T I Start DateTime I Call Mode I Packets Received I Bytes Received T Coder I Prefix Matched M Outbound Digits I Call Status R Email reports can be sentout periodically or when a certain numberof phone calls have been logged From Details I GatewayName M IPAddress r To Details I GatewayName N IPAddress I Description I Description I Options I Options Call Logs Sl No Start Date amp Time Duration Status 01 17 2002 amp 09 43 24 00 01 47 01 17 2002 amp 10 30 33 00 26 46 01 17 2002 amp 11 05 22 00 09 47 01 17 2002 amp 11 16 02 00 01 25 01 17 2002 amp 11 21 02 00 00 33 01 17 2002 amp 11 51 26 00 00 00 Call Mode Success Voice The requested technical details will then appear in the log report that is automatically emailed to the VoIP administrator Success Voice Success Voice Success Voice Success Voice Unsuccess Voice Call Logs From IP Addr To IP Addr OutBound Digits Prefix Matched 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 4470 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 4470 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 4470 202 054 039 100 204 026 122 105 763717 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 4470 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 4470 139 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 15 Set Log Reporting Me
19. Telco POTS Line Figure 3 6 MVP 2410 3010 Voip Connections for GND amp Remote Config Modem 5 Ensure that the unit is properly connected to earth ground by verifying that it is reliably grounded when mounted within a rack This can be accomplished by connecting a grounding wire between the chassis grounding screw see Figure 3 6 and a metallic object that will provide an electrical ground 6 Turn on power to the MultiVOIP by setting the power switch on the right side panel to the ON position Wait for the Boot LED on the MultiVOIP to go off before proceeding This may take a couple of minutes Proceed to Chapter 4 Software Installation 37 Technical Configuration T1 E1 MultiVOIP User Guide Chapter 4 Software Installation 38 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling Introduction Configuring software for your MultiVOIP entails three tasks 1 loading the software onto the PC this is Software Installation and is discussed in this chapter 2 setting values for telephony and IP parameters that will fit your system this is Technical Configuration and it is discussed in Chapter 5 and 3 establishing phonebooks that contain the various dialing patterns for VOIP calls made to different locations this is Phonebook Configuration and it is discussed in Chapter 6 for North American T1 telephony standards and in Chapter 7 for European E1 telephony standards
20. back panel screws 3 Figure C 3 Removing screws from back panel 4 Slide the main circuit board out of the chassis far enough to unplug the power connector crs m power connector Figure C 4 Accessing power connector 5 Unplug the power connector from the main circuit board 6 Slide the main circuit board completely out of the chassis and place on a non conductive static safe tabletop surface 7 Remove mounting hardware 2 screws 2 nuts and 4 standoffs from its package 362 MultiVOIP User Guide 8 Channel Analog Expansion Card 8 On the phone jack side of the circuit card three screws attach the circuit card to the back panel Two of these screws are adjacent to the four phone jack pairs Remove these two screws Screw locations 2 at phone jack edge of board Figure C 5 Screws to be removed and replaced with standoffs phone jack edge of board top view 9 Replace these two screws with standoffs 10 There are two copper plated holes at the LED edge of the circuit card Place a nut beneath each hole lockwasher side should be in contact with board and attach a standoff to each location Standoff locations 2 at LED edge of board top view Standoff nut attachment rear bottom view Figure C 6 Standoffs at LED edge of board top view 363 8 Channel Analog Expansion Card MultiVOIP User Guide 11 Locate the male 60 pin vertical con
21. calls to remote PSTN 211 foreign calls national rates 213 voip site to voip Site 210 voip system example digital amp analog with phonebook details voip system example digital only with phonebook details Bl sess chai EET 231 TI seat eau aia tee 189 voip E1 basic functions Of 18 voip T1 basic functions Of 10 voltage operating El models 0 cee eeeeeeeeeeeneeceeees 26 Warnings Safety oseese 31 WALTANLY es etere ar a 344 web browser GUI and logs 141 web browser GUI enabling 74 web browser interface browser version requirement 334 338 General yansa anses 334 Java requirement eee 334 394 MultiVOIP User Guide prerequisite local assigning of IP ddre SSi dises 335 video useability eee 334 web GUI JAVA andsite ises 337 remote control configuration and CEE E EEE EEEE 337 Web GUI and pop ups 334 web GUI vs local Windows GUI COMPAFISON o s ssesseseseeeeereeeereeeee e 335 web GUI logging and 336 Web GUI Windows GUI compared Bl A ee aitiersteaaiaties 20 A N ESEA RATT 12 weight El model ss ssiri iirst 26 TI modelss ssccsossestvctiscseveotsteetsses 25 weight loading T CK cose sasesveeisdetssssoctevsoeseneessss 34 weight of unit lifting precaution 0 0 eee 31 personnel requirement 31 Well Known Ports eee 359 well known port number SMTP span Mae aen ties 135 wel
22. lee pean cas fra Fxs_loop cas fra r2_ituFtp cas lel r2_itu cas lel Fxo_loopFtp cas eI e amp m_winkFtp cas lel e amp m_wink cas lel Fxo_loop cas lel Fxo_groundFtp cas c fxo_ground cas a r2_ituaniFtp cas a r2_philipaniFtp cas E r2_philipFtp cas r2_mexicoaniFtp cas a r2_mexicoFtp cas a r2_koreaaniFtp cas r2_koreaFtp cas a r2_israelaniFtp cas E r2_israelFtp cas a r2_chinaaniFtp cas E r2_chinaFtp cas E r2_brazilaniFtp cas E r2_brazilFtp cas E r2_argentinaFtp cas iE em_wink_dialtoneFtp cas E em_immediateFtp cas e clear_channelFtp cas E em_winkFtp cas em_wink cas e em_immediate cas E em_wink_dialtone cas E r2_itu_aniFtp cas r r2_ituani cas E r2_itu_ani cas El clear_channel cas E r2_chinaani cas E em_wink_with_dialtoneFtp cas El em_wink_with_dialtone cas E r2_china cas E r2_argentina cas E r2_philipani cas E r2_philip cas E r2_argentinaani cas E r2_mexicoani cas E r2_mexico cas E r2_koreaani cas E r2_korea cas E r2_israelani cas E r2_israel cas El r2_brazilani cas El r2_brazil cas Fiename Fas OSS Files of type cas Files cas Cancel 4 Select the CAS protocol needed for your system Click Open 5 The chosen CAS protocol file will be loaded from the PC to the MultiVOIP unit Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen while the download occurs When the download is complete the MultiVOIP will complete its rebooting process 6 T
23. 109 Signaling Port ee eeeeeeeeee 109 Use Fast Start eee 109 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Gatekeeper IP Address 110 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields RAS Port Gatekeeper 110 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Gatekeeper Name 110 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Gateway Name eee 110 Primary GK Gatekeeper 110 H323 COdEDy ccs uci schesiess eesvertatesieny amp 1 H 323 fields Outbound Phonebook EBL E E keds 222 Pires er decisietid Silesian 179 H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers GK Name ou eee cece 291 IP Address eee iarna 291 P ta noiai e neea si 291 Priority s2chavectativaeascisc 291 Statt Serisi eusie 291 Types aeniea 291 H 323 Multiplexing field 112 H 323 Port Number outbound phonebook field Bl Aran Cee Rotem ean 222 Index H 323 version 4 features H 323 Version 4 Parameters 113 H 450 features incompatible with SIP R EEEE 144 B E E E cts 18 TTA seach EE E 10 H 450 functionality LOSS FOP rene oe eed 270 H 450 standard BD E E E settee 23 g e KOE E inde coatekeceete et 15 Hardware ID System Info 167 Hold Sequence 145 148 hold caller on musical jingle fof 08 147 TANA ae suesseesottisteadusessessasetnistictechs 359 icon variable version 41 icons phonebook Bd R R E ES 216 DD EE EEA R RT 173 identifying current firmware version e aee ra raaa ae Eoen a EEA kE 304 IFM Vers
24. 141 Logs screen field definitions 142 Logs screen parameters Enable Console Messages 142 Filters dise n eeraa 142 GUD ne boss ot ih sett 142 IP Address SysLog Server 142 Online Statistics Updation Interval Suivi inset alee 142 Port SysLog Server 142 SMTP onn Seas 142 SNMP 3 chutes Scien ees 142 SysLog Server Enable 142 Turn Off Logs o s 142 logs Screen ACCESSING eee 140 long distance call savings Tin gids eed 171 long distance call savings Blackie tenia 209 Long Haul Mode field Bd E Slee Moke aides bois 100 A hi E OEE T 92 Loss of Frame Alignment E1 stats field ireo a eek 284 Loss of Frame Alignment T1 stats field oip 281 Loss of MultiFrame Alignment E1 Stats field oo ceeeeeseeseesteeeeees 285 Loss of MultiFrame Alignment T1 Stats field oo cee eeceeeseesteeeeeee 282 lost packets consecutive 88 lost password eee eee 316 320 381 Index Mac Address System Info eee 167 254 mail criteria SMTP records 135 Mail Server IP Address SMTP field soup demeseuscusseds E eepasteact Bes oS 135 Mail Type SMTP logs field 135 mains frequency El models ccccccesseeeeesseeeeeee 26 management E1 models TOCA cx gesidecc cated eopisics Consens ee tens 19 remote SNMP cceesseeeeee 19 remote web browser GU 19 management of voips remote 121 Max bandwidth code
25. Mutio Voice Fax over IP Networks User Guide for Voice IP Gateways Digital Models T1 E1 ISDN PRI MVP 2410 3010 Multi lech Systems User Guide 000384A Digital MultiVOIP Units Models MVP2410 MVP3010 Upgrade Units MVP24 48 and MVP30 60 This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without prior expressed written permission from Multi Tech Systems Inc All rights reserved Copyright 2005 by Multi Tech Systems Inc Multi Tech Systems Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Furthermore Multi Tech Systems Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation of Multi Tech Systems Inc to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes Record of Revisions Revision Description A Doc re organization Follows S000249K 09 26 05 Describes 4 08 software release Patents This Product is covered by one or more of the following U S Patent Numbers 6151333 5757801 5682386 5 301 274 5 309 562 5 355 365 5 355 653 5 452 289 5 453 986 Other Patents Pending Trademark Trademark of Multi Tech Systems Inc is the Multi Tech logo Windows and NetMeeting are registered trademarks of Microsoft Multi Tech Systems Inc 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds
26. Network then the port number used is that specified in the SIP Working roti Request URI Universal Resource Identifier SIP URL sip userphone Looking similar to an email hostserver where aserphone is the telephone number and hostserver is the domain name or an address on the network address a SIP URL identifies a user s address In SIP communications each caller or callee is identified by a SIP url sip user_name host_name The format of a sip url is very similar to an email address except that the sip prefix is used 180 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Def ns cont d Field Name Values Description SPP Fields Use Registrar Values Y N Description Select this checkbox to use registrar when voip system is operating in the Registrar Client SPP mode In this mode one voip the registrar as set in Phonebook Configuration screen has a static IP address and all other voips clients point to the registar s IP address as functionally their own However if your voip system overall is operating in Registrar Client mode but you want to make an exception and use Direct mode for the destination pattern of this particular Add Edit Phonebook entry leave this checkbox unselected Leave this checkbox unselected if your overall voip system is operating in the Direct SP
27. 184 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration 4 The Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen appears Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Accept AnyNumber Remove Prefix Add Prefix Channel Number Hunting X Description m Call Forward r Forward Condition I Unconditional I Busy I No Response Forward Destination H323 call Phone or IP address SIP call Phone or IP address or IP address port or Phone IP address port or SIP URL or Ph IP address SPP call Phone or IP address port or Phone IP address port Ring Count jo m Registration Options H323 Register as T E164 I Tech Prefix SPP M H3231D Tl Register With SPP Registrar SIP I Register With SIP Proxy 185 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Enter Inbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP The fields of the Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen are described in the table below Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Values Y N Number Description When checked Any Number appears as the value in the Remove Prefix field The Any Number feature of the Inbound Phone Book does not work when an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used If Any Nu
28. Add Entry Edit Entry Inbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Statistics 174 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration 1 Select Outbound Phone Book List Entries Fields in the Details section will differ depending on the protocol H 323 SIP or SPP of the selected list entry to which the details pertain ce amp Area 200 022 209 007 Click Add 175 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 2 The Add Edit Outbound PhoneBook screen appears Add Edit Outbound Phone Book m Phone Number Details I Accept AnyNumber Destination Pattern Total Digits jo Cancel Remove Prefix Add Prefix Help Advanced IP Address Description m Protocol Type ISIP H 323 JV Use GateKeeper Gateway H 323 ID Gateway Prefix H 323 Port Number fi 720 SIP T Use Proxy Transport Protocol l TCP C UDP SIP Port Number 5060 SPUR oss SPP Use Registrar Port Number fi 0000 Alternate Phone Number I Remote Device is Multi olP 110 120 200 400 800 Enter Outbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP unit Note that the Advanced button gives access to the Alternate IP Routing feature if needed Alternate IP Routing can be implemented in a secondary screen as described after the primary screen field definitions below 176 MultiVO
29. H 323 number Register with Y N Check this field to have traffic Gatekeeper on current voip gateway controlled by a gatekeeper Allow Y N When selected incoming calls Incoming Calls are accepted only if those calls Through come through the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Only 109 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Defns cont d Field Name Values Description GateKeeper RAS Parameters Primary GK p3 This is the preferred gatekeeper Gatekeeper for controlling the traffic of the current voip Alternate GK A first and a second alternate Gatekeepers gatekeeper can be specified for land 2 use by the current voip for situations where the Primary GK is busy or otherwise unavailable Gatekeeper n n n n IP address of the GateKeeper IP Address forn 0 255 RAS Port 1719 Well known port number for GateKeepers Must match port number of GateKeeper 1719 Gatekeeper alpha Optional The name of the Name numeric GateKeeper with which this string MultiVOIP is trying to register A primary gatekeeper and two alternate units are listed 110 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Defns cont d GateKeeper RAS Parameters Field Name Values Description RAS TTL in seconds The H 323 Gatekeeper Time Value to Live value As soon as a MultiVOIP gateway registers with a gatekeeper allowing the gateke
30. IP Address Port Online Statistics Updation Interval 5 Sec The SysLog Server resides in the MultiVOIP unit itself To implement this functionality you will need a SysLog client program sometimes referred to as a daemon SysLog client programs both paid and freeware can be obtained from Kiwi Enterprises among other firms See www kiwisyslog com SysLog client programs essentially give you a means of structuring console messages for convenience and ease of use MultiTech Systems does not endorse any particular SysLog client program SysLog client programs by any qualified provider should suffice for use with MultiVOIP units Kiwi s brief description of their SysLog program indicates the typical scope of such programs Kiwi Syslog Daemon is a freeware Syslog Daemon for the Windows platform It receives logs displays and forwards Syslog messages from hosts such as routers switches Unix hosts and any other syslog enabled device There are many customizable options available 22 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview Supplementary Telephony Services The H 450 standard an addition to H 323 brings to voip telephony more of the premium features found in PSTN and PBX telephony MultiVOIP units offer five of these H 450 features Call Transfer Call Hold Call Waiting Call Name Identification not the same as Caller ID and Call Forwarding The first four features are found in the Supplementary Servic
31. MVP3010 Country Code MVP2410 Regional Parameters MVP3010 Email address for voip all SMTP Parameters optional Reminder Be sure fo Save Setup after entering configuration values 58 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Local Configuration Procedure Summary After the MultiVOIP configuration software has been installed in the Command PC which is connected to the MultiVOIP unit several steps must be taken to configure the MultiVOIP to function in its specific setting Although the summary below includes all of these steps some are optional 1 Check Power and Cabling 2 Start MultiVOIP Configuration Program 3 Confirm Connection 4 Solve Common Connection Problems A Fixing a COM Port Problem B Fixing a Cabling Problem 5 Familiarize yourself with configuration parameter screens and how to access them 6 Set Ethernet IP Parameters 7 Set up web browser GUI optional 8 Set Voice Fax Parameters 9 Set T1 E1 Parameters 10 Set ISDN Parameters if applicable 11 Set Call Signaling parameters The choice of H 323 SIP or SPP is made in the Outbound Phonebook but details are configured in the Call Signaling Parameters screen 12 Set SNMP Parameters applicable if MultiVoipManager remote management software is used 13 Set Regional Parameters Phone Signaling Tones amp Cadences and setup for built in Remote Configuration Command Modem 13 Set Custom Tones and
32. Outbound PhoneBook screen Accessing Registered Gateway Details Pulldown Shortcut Statistics Ctrl Alt W Call Progress Ctrl Alt 4 Logs Ctrl O IP Statistics Ctrl P T1 E1 Statistics Ctrl 1 Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt W Link Management Ctrl 2 Alternate Servers Ctrl alt 4 gt Sidebar E Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management T1JE1 Statistics Registered Gateway Details Servers 287 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide r Registered Endpoints Description IP Address Port Register Duration _ Status No of Entries ff Details Count of Registered Numbers jo List of Registered Numbers X 288 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Registered Gateway Details Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings Description alphanumeric This is a descriptor for a particular voip gateway unit This descriptor should generally identify the physical location of the unit e g city building etc and perhaps even its location in an equipment rack IP Address n n n n The RAS address for the gateway for n 0 255 Port Port by which the gateway exchanges H 225 RAS messages with the gatekeeper Register The time remaining in seconds before the Duration TimeToLive timer expires If the gateway fails to re
33. PGK1 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Registered Predef 0 Not Registere H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings IP Address n n n n The IP address of the gatekeeper for n 0 255 Port TDMA time slot used for communication between MultiVOIP unit and the gatekeeper that serves it GK Name alpha numeric Identifier for gatekeeper string Type Primary This field describes the type of gateway as Predefined which the MultiVOIP is defined with respect to the gatekeeper Priority Priority refers to Status registered not The current status of the gateway either registered registered or unregistered 291 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide SIP Proxies IP Address Pot Type 65 126 90 112 5060 Primary Registered 65 126 90 110 5060 Alternate 1 Not Registered SIP Proxies Statistics Servers Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings IP Address n n n n The IP address of the SIP proxy by which for n 0 255 the MultiVOIP is governed Port TDMA time slot used for communication between MultiVOIP unit and the SIP Proxy that governs it Type Primary This field describes the type of gateway as Alternate which the MultiVOIP is defined with respect to the gatekeeper Status registered The curren
34. Remov Add IP Comment Pattern e Prefix Address Prefix 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Birmingham 901189 901189 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to any Note 3 PSTN phone in Reading area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP Reading UK 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Carlisle 90182 Calls to Tavistock local PSTN Site F could be arranged by operator or possibly by auto attendant 90182 9 200 2 9 5 Calls to extensions of key 263 phone system at Tavistock 740 office 90182 9 200 2 9 5 263 741 90182 9 200 2 9 5 263 742 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Reading Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 241 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Inbound PhoneBook of the MVP3010 is shown below Inbound Phone Book for MVP3010 Digital VOIP Site D Remove Add Channel Comments Prefix Prefix Number 0207 9 7 0 Allows phone users at remote voip sites Note 4 to call local numbers those within the Note 5 Site D area code 0207 Inner London over the VOIP network 0208 9 8 0 Allows phone users at remote voip sites Note 4 to call local numbers those in Outer Note 5 London over the VOIP network 0207 3 0 Allows phone users at remote voip sites 39883 to call exte
35. The Caller Id field gives the remote voip administrator a plain language identifier of the party that is originating the call occurring on a specific channel This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is originating the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Calling Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field When channel 2 of the Omaha voip is used to make a call to any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Calling Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip 150 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Alerting If the home voip unit is receiving the Party call and Alerting Party is selected Allowed then the identifier from the Caller Id Name Type field will tell the originating remote CNI voip unit that the call is ringing This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is receiving the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the hom
36. Til EE E E EEE 14 SysLog Server Enable field 142 SysLog Server function as added feature eee eee 340 capabilities Of 342 enabling eriet oeei ri oases 341 location Of v ir isisisi 340 SysLog Server IP Address field 142 SysLog Server enabling 141 System Information screen for op amp maint 253 System Information screen accessing AEA ETT 165 System Information update interval Aani YE esendesstivvesveensstesteseeas 165 for op amp maint 255 T1 model descriptions cee 9 T1 Parameter definitions 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 Answer Delay Enable 94 Answer Delay Timer 04 94 FXS Current Detect Timer 95 T1 Parameter definitions FXS Supervision Tone Detection ccccceeeeeees 95 T1 Parameter fields CAS Protocol eeeeeeeeeeees 93 FXS Options No Response THM GPs esena ans 93 No Response Timer FXS Options saisin 93 Answer Tones cceceesseeeeseees 95 Available Tones List 0 95 Caller ID Enable 0c08 97 Calling Number Prefix 96 Calling Number Prefix Caller ID Sys Rd eet ar denne 97 Calling Number Suffix 96 MultiVOIP User Guide Calling Number Suffix Caller ID SENN Slee cl Seat cht Meet EA E 97 ClOCKIN 8 45 ese iare 97 COUNILY si2sc8s a ede tate ees 96 CRC Cheke nserita 92 Detect Flash Hook 0 0 97 Detection Time
37. Y m System Information m Yersion Information Boot Version 1 04 Firmware Version 6 07 C7 Configuration Version 6 07 00 01 Phone Book Version 4 04 IFM Version ge MAC Address 000800501820 Uptime 00 00 00 18 Hardware ID MY P410 32M Rev B F998 Exit 253 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide System Information Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Boot nn nn Indicates the version of the code that Version alpha is used at the startup booting of the numeric voip The boot code version is independent of the software version Firmware nn nn nn Indicates the version of the Version alpha MultiVOIP firmware numeric Configur nn nn Indicates the version of the ation nn nn Multi VOIP configuration software Version alpha numeric Phone Book nn nn Indicates the version of the Version alpha MultiVOIP phone book being used numeric IFM Version nn Indicates version of the IFM module alpha the device that performs the numeric transformation between telephony signals and IP signals Mac numeric Denotes the number assigned as the Address voip unit s unique Ethernet address Up Time days Indicates how long the voip has been hours running since its last booting mm ss Hardware alpha Indicates version of the MultiVOIP ID numeric circuit board assembly being used 254 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation a
38. abbreviated dialing inter office Bl vss stisshaveteecstavek a E 210 Theyre naras innia 172 Accept Any Number inbound A EE teh EE 228 Dl viasadinavaadsaavinaickianse 186 Accept Any Number outbound field Bl via sndetatvadiustivin EEA 220 TD ss ceoogts E E 177 access to netWork eee eee 123 access to remote PSTN BLD E EE tightness tehieeas 17 TD EE E E EE EEE 9 accessing Statistics Logs screen PEE E EEEE EE 264 accessing Call Progress Statistics SCLCED onire pe iaip anari 256 accessing configuration parameter PrOUPS e raia a Eas 64 accessing Ethernet IP Parameters SCLEOM sass spe roiie esi p esiosast 65 accessing IP Statistics screen 271 accessing Logs Statistics screen E A ioe asenacnsds 264 accessing logs screen eee 140 accessing Regional Parameters 124 accessing Registered Gateway Details Statistics screen cceeeeeeee 289 accessing Registered Gateway Details screen 004 287 289 accessing RTP Parameters screen 294 accessing SMTP parameters 133 accessing SNMP parameters 121 accessing Supplementary Services SCLECM eb a Sohne 144 accessing System Information screen a rea e e Ea Ea ieee sass 165 366 MultiVOIP User Guide accessing T1 E1 ISDN Parameters SCTCEN Soccg ave eet ee ae 89 accessing Voice FAX Parameters SCTEEM 4 ssc a ieetee E EET 75 Accounting Port RADIUS screen fields ninan itan net 160 Add Inbound Phonebook Entry icons Bl E EE E
39. appears as the value in the Destination Pattern field The Any Number feature works differently depending on whether or not an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the IP Address in the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Destination Patterns When external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the external routing device used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol The IP Address of the external routing device must be set in the Phone Book Configuration screen 220 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Destination prefixes Defines the beginning of Pattern area codes dialing sequences for calls exchanges that will be connected to line another VOIP in the system numbers Numbers beginning with extensions these sequences are diverted from the PTSN and carried on Internet or other IP network Total Digits as needed number of digits the phone
40. field Jie E E T 160 Enable Call Hold eee eeeeeee 148 Enable Call Transfer 0 147 Enable Call Waiting 148 Enable Caller ID E1 105 Enable Caller ID T1 97 Enable Caller Name Identification 149 Enable Console Messages field 142 Enable DHCP Ethernet IP Parameters field ccccceee 69 MultiVOIP User Guide Enable DNS Ethernet IP Parameters Helda ee Mesos 72 Enable ISDN PRI field EIISDN pes ierra esis vents 103 TIAISDN e eien 95 Enable SMTP field c cee 134 Enable SNMP Agent 121 Enable SNMP Agent field 123 Enable SRV Ethernet IP Parameters field eorr 72 enabling SMTP eee eeeeeeeees 133 enabling web browser GUI 74 Error Correction RADIUS Attributes cceecsseceereeeseeeeee 163 Error Correction SMTP logs 138 error correction forward 82 error message COM port conflict 44 63 MultiVOIP Not Found 64 Phone Database Not Read 64 ESF and CRC frame format T1 92 ethernet cable pinout 353 Ethernet IP parameter definitions 67 68 69 70 72 Ethernet IP Parameter fields 802 1p Priority Levels 67 68 Frame Typene i ieni 67 Ethernet IP Parameter screen fields Enable DNS ccccceesceeeseeeeees 72 Ethernet IP Parameters screen fields Call Control Priority 68 Call Control PHB 008 70 Diff SOLV ennnen
41. the By ed digits received by Matched phonebook prefix this gateway from matched in the remote processing the call gateway will be listed in log presuming that DTMF is set to Out of Band Call Successful or Call Type Indicates the Call Status unsuccessful Signaling protocol used for the call H 323 SIP or SPP Call Indicates call s DTMF Indicates whether the Capability DTMF dialing digits are carried Inband or Out of Band The corresponding field values differ for the 3 different voip protocols For H 323 this field can display Out of Band or Inband For SIP it can display either Out of Band RFC2833 or Out of Band SIP INFO to indicate the out of band condition or Inband to indicate the in band condition For SPP it can display Out of Band RFC2833 or Inband Direction originating party 137 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Custom Fields Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description Server The IP address of Outbound The dialing digits Details the traffic control PiSits Sent sent by this gateway server if any to the remote being used gateway presuming whether an H 323 that DTMF is set to gatekeeper a SIP Out ofBanid proxy or an SPP registrar gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server Disconnect Indicates whether the call was disconnected si
42. 10000 Re trans If packets are lost as indicated mission by absence of an in ms acknowledgment then the endpoint will retransmit the lost packets after this designated time duration has elapsed Default value 2000 milliseconds Mas Number off times the voip will Re trans re transmit a lost packet if no mission acknowledgment has been received Default value 3 118 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SPP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Single Port Protocol SPP continued Client Options Client Option fields are active only in registrar client mode and only for client voip units Primary Zs This is the preferred SPP registrar gateway for controlling the traffic of the current voip Alternate 23 A first and a second alternate SPP Registrar gateway can be specified for use by the current voip for situations where the Primary Registrar gateway is busy or otherwise unavailable Registrar IP n n n n This is the IP address of the Address registrar voip to which this client is assigned Default value 0 0 0 0 effectively there is no useful default value Registrar 10000 or This is the port number of the Port other registrar voip to which this client is assigned Default port number 10000 Polling integer The interval between the voip Registrar Registrar 1 and 2 Interval 60 300
43. 123 Advanced button Outbound Phonebook Me cat everett ah cece 224 A DA ree ere eee eee 181 Advanced Features field group 82 aitfloW nnoonneoonssonseeosooosro0r000r0er00r000e 34 Alerting Party Supplementary Services 151 152 153 Allow Incoming Calls Through Gatekeeper Only H 323 Call Signaling field eee 109 Allow Incoming Calls Through SIP Proxy Only SIP Call Signaling field onn ipni 115 Allowed Name Type Alerting Party 151 152 153 Calling Party ossee 150 Allowed Name Types Call Name ID Alerting Party oseese 151 Busy Party cernens 152 Calling Party 0 eeeeeeeeeee 150 Connected Party eee 153 allowing pop ups with Web GUI 74 Alternate GK Gatekeepers 1 and 2 H 323 Call Signaling fields 110 Alternate IP Address field Bl Aesthetics kek 226 A A EEE OEE EEE EEE 183 Alternate IP Routing El eosa nane an aeS 219 Tinan AN NE SEE 176 Alternate Phone Number field SPP El raean a a 224 Alternate Phone Number SPP Add Edit Outbound Phonebook Index BV vos sotees ein E tesco 224 STD ANE E AE tii eet 181 Alternate Proxy 1 and 2 SIP Call Signaling fields eee 115 Alternate Registrar 1 and 2 SPP Call Signaling fields eee 119 Alternate Routing PSTN failover feature and 183 Alternate Routing field definitions BV eiei innr atte tees 226 TAD EE steed ees ates 183 Alternate Routing field definitions El Alternate IP Address 226
44. 5 digit extensions as if they were in the same facility More importantly the VOIP system should be configured to maximize savings in long distance calling charges To achieve both of these objectives ease of use and maximized savings the VOIP phonebooks must be set correctly NOTE VOIPs are commonly used for another reason as well VOIPs allow an organization to integrate phone and data traffic 209 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide onto a single network Typically these are private networks Free Calls One VOIP Site to Another The most direct use of the VOIP system is making calls between the offices where the VOIPs are located Consider for example the Wren Clothing Company This company has VOIP equipped offices in London Paris and Amsterdam each served by its own PBX VOIP calls between the three offices completely avoid international long distance charges These calls are free The phonebooks can be set up to allow all Wren Clothing employees to contact each other using 3 4 or 5 digit numbers as though they were all in the same building United Kingdom Wren Clothing Co a VOIP PBX Site London Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Amsterdam The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Paris ___ _ Free VOIP Calls France 210 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Local Rate Calls Within Local Calling Area of Remote VOIP In the second use
45. AAA sch krs Bl Z ws JOS adess Eassa O O O OOOO O OOOOO MultiVOIP 2410 Configuration Ethernet IP Voice Fax Call Signaling TIEMISDN SOME rEthernet IP Parameters Regional SMTP Ethernet Parameters RADIUS C Packet Prioritization 802 1p Frame Type Logs Traces NAT Traversal 802 1p Parameters Supplementary Services Priority System Information Call Control 3 Excellent Effort OK Advanced Phone Book VoIP Media 6 Voice 2 Statistics Change Password Others 0 Best Effort Save amp Reboot Logout Gateway Name MultivolP Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB 34 C Enable DHCP e aaa VolP Media PHB 46 IP Address 192 169 41 81 _ IP Mask 255 255 255 0 FTP Server c 7 Enable Help C Enable DNS Enable DNS SRV DNS Server IP Address The Windows GUI gives access to commands via icons and pulldown menus whereas the web GUI does not 335 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation and Maintenance gt MultivoIP Multi OIP 2410 4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help AMSSSE BEES OMS E Configuration Voice Fax E Call Signaling TI E1 ISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information E Advanced Phone Book E Statistics Ethemet IP Parameters p Ethernet Parameters 802 1p Parameters
46. ATATA 103 FXS T1 disconnection triggering of E TET 95 FXS Ground Start Supervision Parameters Elirenne nosen 102 103 Peis S EE S 94 95 FXS Options E1 fields No Response Timet 64 101 FXS Options T1 fields No Response Timet 000 93 G711 coders RTP packetization VOICE FAX oo eeeeeeesecsseceseeeeeteeeeees 295 G723 coders RTP packetization VOICE LAX annuaire 295 G726 coders RTP packetization VOICE TAX aaseista 295 G727 coders RTP packetization VOICE TAX aaen Aicideasesetetes 295 G729 coders RTP packetization VOICE TAX yoan eese 295 Gain 1 custom tone field 131 Gain 1 tone pair scheme 128 129 Gain 2 custom tone field 131 Gain 2 tone pair scheme 128 129 MultiVOIP User Guide Gatekeeper Discovery Polling Interval H 323 Call Signaling field 111 gatekeeper interaction El models c cccccceeeeeeee 18 19 T1 models ccceceeeeeeeee 10 11 Gatekeeper IP Address H 323 Call Signaling field wee 110 Gatekeeper Name H 323 Call Signaling fields eee 110 GateKeeper RAS Parameters 110 111 Gateway Ethernet IP Parameters fields nnna ne 69 Gateway H 323 ID Outbound Phonebook field A t EE ETS 179 222 Gateway Name callee statistics logs field ghanana 269 Gateway Name caller statistics logs feldir aeir 269 Gateway Name Ethernet IP Parameters field c cceeceeee 69 Gate
47. Cadences optional 14 Set SMTP Parameters applicable if Log Reports are via Email 15 Set Log Reporting Method GUI locally in MultiVOIP Configuration program SNMP remotely in MultiVoipManager program or SMTP via email 16 Set Supplementary Services Parameters The Supplementary Services screen allows voip deployment of features that are normally found in PBX or PSTN systems e g call transfer and call waiting 59 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 17 Set NAT Traversal STUN parameters Optional Applicable only under SIP Call Signaling when the UDP transport protocol is used 18 Set RADIUS parameters Optional Used only if system interfaces with RADIUS server for billing or other accounting functions 19 Set Baud Rate of COM port connection to Command PC 20 View System Info screen and set updating interval optional 21 Save the MultiVOIP configuration 22 Create a User Default Configuration optional When technical configuration is complete you will need to configure the MultiVOIP s inbound and outbound phonebooks This manual has separate chapters describing T1 Phonebook Configuration for North American influenced telephony settings and E1 Phonebook Configuration for Euro influenced telephony settings Local Configuration Procedure Detailed You can begin the configuration process as a continuation of the MultiVOIP software installation You can establish your configuration o
48. Call Details Voice coder G 723 G 729 The voice coder being used on G 711 etc this call Disconnect Values are Indicates whether the call was Reason Normal and disconnected simply because the Local desired conversation was done disconnection or some other irregular cause occasioned disconnection e g a technical error or failure DTMF Capability inband Indicates whether the DTMF out of band dialing digits are carried Expressions Inband or Out of Band The corresponding field values differ differ slightly for the 3 different voip protocols for different Call Signaling For H 323 this field can display protocols Out of Band or Inband For H 323 SIP or SIP it can display either Out of SPP Band RFC2833 or Out of Band SIP INFO to indicate the out of band condition or Inband to indicate the in band condition For SPP it can display Out of Band RFC2833 or Inband Outbound Digits 0 9 The digits sent by MultiVOIP to Received PBX telco that were acknowledged as having been received by the remote voip gateway Outbound Digits 0 9 The digits transmitted by the Sent MultiVOIP to the PBX telco for this call 267 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Details Server Details n n n n When the MultiVOIP is for n 0 255 operating in the non direct mode with Gatekeeper in H 32
49. Community Name 2 123 Community Name 1 0 123 Enable SNMP Agent 123 Permissions 1 ccsceceseeeeee 123 Permissions 2 cs ccsccceseeeees 123 Port Number eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 SNMP Parameters setting 121 software uninstalling detailed 46 Update zesiserseeteveisesess a 5I software Multi VOIP uninstalling 321 software configuration SUMPAY a A E 39 software installation detailed irnn iiinn 39 software loading 39 software version numbers 41 software MultiVOIP moving around in eee 64 software Multi VOIP screen surfing 1N eee eee 64 Solving Common Connection ProbleM neiii 63 sound quality improving 82 specifications E1 models cscccoessesrescoeeees 26 PA MOIS y eeens 25 SPP Call Signaling screen Mode SPP Protocol 5 118 SPP Call Signaling screen fields Alternate Registrars 1 and 2 119 Client Options s es 119 General Options 0 0 0 ee eee 118 Keep Alive oninia 119 Max Retransmission SPP General OPUODS scsi escsegiases detest eopess 118 Polling Interval eee 119 MultiVOIP User Guide Primary Registrar eee 119 Registrar IP Address 119 Registrar Options eee 119 Registrar Port 119 Retransmission SPP General OPtiONS aieri eer 118 Signaling Port SPP General OPtiONS oe soi
50. DNS server to be used to resolve Internet computer names 72 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration About Service Records An SRV record holds the following information Service the symbolic name of the desired service Protocol this is usually either TCP or UDP Domain name the domain for which this record is valid TTL standard DNS time to live field Class standard DNS class field this is always IN Priority the priority of the target host Weight A relative weight for records with the same priority Port the TCP or UDP port on which the service is to be found Target the hostname of the machine providing the service An example SRV record might look like this _Ssip _tcp example com 86400 IN SRV 0 5 5060 sipserver example com This expression denotes a server named sipserver example com This server listens on TCP port 5060 for SIP protocol connections The priority given here is 0 and the weight is 5 TDM Routing Option Parameter fields Use TDM Y N Allows calls placed Routing for enabled by between ports on the Intra Gateway default same MultiVOIP voice calls channel board to be routed over internal Time Division Multiplex bus without conversion to IP TDM routing effectively eliminates the delay introduced by IP conversion If you require all calls to be IP routed disable the ase TDM Routing for Intra Gateway Calls option Since this is not normally required we gene
51. Details RADIUS Attributes field cece 163 Options From Details SMTP logs CLAS recesses ats epitads oip 138 Options To Details RADIUS Attributes field cece 163 Options To Details SMTP logs field sabes Sige ith ssbeseptcobfesensh teaches aes as batt 138 Others Priorities Ethernet IP params 802 1 p field oosist itse 68 out of band DTMF 0 719 Outbound Digits Received call progress field oo eee eee 261 Outbound Digits Received statistics logs IG aseisiin 267 Outbound Digits Received SMTP logs field assisi reinii 137 Outbound Digits Sent call progress field isa ceecetsiie tees hesschietennessnast 261 Outbound Digits Sent RADIUS Attributes field cece 162 Outbound Digits Sent SMTP logs fields madanani ai 138 Outbound Digits Sent statistics logs feld naaran rG 267 Outbound Digits Sent and DTMF Out of Band eects 138 Outbound Phonebook Entries List El seni aed Moa 216 Tl EAEE a itp estou 173 Outbound Phonebook entries list Bil E EE tetas 218 Thrais ninen etiese 175 outbound vs inbound phonebooks A E SET 214 Thamini a akiai e ns 171 Out of Band DTMF and Outbound Digits Sent moisnnnuiis rs 138 Output Gain field eee 78 output level fax tones eee 80 383 Index Packet Prioritization 802 1p Ethernet IP parameters 67 packet priority and DiffServ 71 packetization RTP ranges amp INCFEMENLS osise 295 packetizati
52. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED This warranty does not apply to any products which have been damaged by lightning storms water or power surges or which have been neglected altered abused used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured repaired by the customer or any party without MTS s written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with MTS s instructions MTS s entire obligation under this warranty shall be limited at MTS s option to repair or replacement of any products which prove to be defective within the warranty period or at MTS s option issuance of a refund of the purchase price Defective products must be returned by Customer to MTS s factory transportation prepaid MTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL ITS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS Repair Procedures for U S and Canadian Customers In the event that service is required products may be shipped freight prepaid to our Mounds View Minnesota factory Multi Tech Systems Inc 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds View MN 55112 Attn Repairs Serial A Returned Materials Authorization RMA is not required Return shipping charges surface will be paid by MTS Please include inside the shipping box a description of the problem a return shipping address it must be a street address not a P O Box number your telephone nu
53. InPhBk tmr This file updates the inbound phonebook in the MultiVOIP unit outbound phonebook OutPhBk tmr This file updates the outbound phonebook in the MultiVOIP unit 327 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 6 Contact MultiVOIP FTP Server You must make contact with the FTP Server in the voip using either a web browser or FTP client program Enter the IP address of the MultiVOIP s FTP Server If you are using a browser the address must be preceded by ftp otherwise you ll reach the web GUI within the MultiVOIP unit A ftp 192 168 2 2007 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 Back mA Fie Edit View Go F ait lt Bttp 192 168 2 200 328 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 7 Log In Use the User Name and password established in item 2 above The login screens will differ depending on whether the FTP file transfer is to be done with a web browser see first screen below or with an FTP client program see second screen below 329 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 8 Invoke Download Downloading can be done with a web browser or with an FTP client program 8A Download with Web Browser 8A1 In the local Windows browser locate the directory holding the MultiVOIP program files The default location will be C Program Files Multi Tech Systems MultiVOIP xxxx y
54. Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt BB Date and Time Setup gt IE Jasc Software 25 Download CAS Protocol Mozilla Firefox gt 25 Download Factory Defaults Microsoft Office gt 25 Download Firmware As Acrobat Distiller 7 0 2 Download User Defaults CX Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional By Set Password Mutivor 6 08 ig uninstall fm MultivOIP 2410 4 08 25 Upgrade Software Windows XP Professional 2 Two confirmation screens will appear Click Yes and OK when you are certain you want to continue with the uninstallation process Confirm File Deletion gt i 2 Are you sure you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components Confirm File Deletion x Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components 321 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 A special warning message similar to that shown below may appear for the MultiVOIP software s bin file Click Yes ReadOnly File Detected x An option that you selected requires that files be installed to your system or files be uninstalled from your system or both A read only file C ProgramFiles MVP3000 v4 00a mvpt1 bin was found while performing the needed file operations on your system To perform the file operation click the Yes button otherwise click No Yes No Cancel 4 A completion screen will appear InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete Insta
55. Pierre voip at IP address 200 2 9 9 5 The Pierre voip matches the called digits 16154923117 to its Inbound Phonebook entry 1615492 6 The Pierre PBX dials extension 3117 in the office at Pierre Variations in PBX Characteristics The exact dialing strings needed in the Outbound and Inbound Phonebooks of the MVP2410 will depend on the capabilities of the PBX Some PBXs require trunk access codes like an 8 or 9 to access an outside line or to access the VOIP network Other PBXs can automatically distinguish between intra PBX calls PSTN calls and VOIP calls Some PBX units can also insert digits automatically when they receive certain dialing strings from a phone station For example a PBX may be programmable to insert automatically the three digit VOIP identifier strings into calls to be directed to analog VOIPs The MVP2410 offers complete flexibility for inter operation with PBX units so that a coherent dialing scheme can be established to connect a company s multiple sites together in a way that is convenient and intuitive for phone users When working together with modern PBX units the presence of the MVP2410 can be completely transparent to phone users within the company 207 Chapter 7 E1 Phonebook Configuration European Telephony Standards 208 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration E1 Versus T1 Telephony Environments We present separate chapters for the MVP3010 MultiVOIP t
56. Quick Start Guide presents additional information on phonebook setup Local Remote Configuration The MultiVOIP must be configured locally at first to establish an IP address for the MultiVOIP unit But changes to this initial configuration can be done either locally or remotely 50 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Local configuration is done through a connection between the Command port of the MultiVOIP and the COM port of the computer the MultiVOIP configuration program is used Remote configuration is done through a connection between the MultiVOIP s Ethernet network port and a computer connected to the same network The computer could be miles or continents away from the MultiVOIP itself There are two ways of doing remote configuration and operation of the MultiVOIP unit 1 using the MultiVoipManager SNMP program or 2 using the MultiVOIP web browser interface program MultiVoipManager MultiVoipManager is an SNMP agent program Simple Network Management Protocol that extends the capabilities of the MultiVOIP configuration program MultiVoipManager allows the user to manage any number of VOIPs on a network whereas the MultiVOIP configuration program can manage only the VOIP to which it is directly locally connected The MultiVoipManager can configure multiple VOIPs simultaneously whereas the MultiVOIP configuration program can configure only one at a time MultiVoipManager may but does not need to
57. Read Write Otherwise select Read Only to view settings 123 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 12 Set Regional Parameters Phone Signaling Tones amp Cadences This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Regional Parameters Pulldown Icon Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H TIfE1s ISDN Parameters Ctri T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Shortcut Sidebar Ctrl R Configuration Ethernet IP Yoice Fax Call Signaling TIJE1sISDN SNMP 124 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The Regional Parameters screen will appear For the country selected the standard set of frequency pairs will be listed for dial tone busy tone unobtainable tone fast busy or trunk busy ring tone and other more specialized tones User Defined Tones Frequency Frequency Cadencelvecs0v0ll Gant Gard These tone pairs are used in T 7 DINNI 2 2 KOK 015 conjunction with the FXO pit a naain Supervision secondary These tone pairs are used to supervise pai of ae INTERFACE answering and disconnection of calls 5 configuration screen 4 Add Edt Tone Country Selection For Butin Modem Urzed StaretuS Tone Type Frequency 1 Fim
58. Received with Errors THI M RTP Packets Transmitted Received Received with Errors m RTCP Packets Transmitted Received Received with Errors Jd IP Statistics Field Definitions Field Values Name Description UDP versus TCP User Datagram Protocol versus Transmission Control Protocol UDP provides unguaranteed connectionless transmission of data across an IP network By contrast TCP provides reliable connection oriented transmission of data 272 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance IP Statistics Field Definitions Field Values Description Name UDP versus TCP continued Both TCP and UDP split data into packets called datagrams However TCP includes extra headers in the datagram to enable retransmission of lost packets and reassembly of packets into their correct order if they arrive out of order UDP does not provide this Lost UDP packets are unretrievable that is out of order UDP packets cannot be reconstituted in their proper order Despite these obvious disadvantages UDP packets can be transmitted much faster than TCP packets as much as three times faster In certain applications like audio and video data transmission the need for high speed outweighs the need for verified data integrity Sound or pictures often remain intelligible despite a certain amount of lost or disordered data packets whic
59. Round Trip Delay ee 226 Alternate Routing field definitions T1 Alternate IP Address 183 Round Trip Delay eee 183 Annex E field sneren 113 Answer Delay Enable Bd EE E A EART 102 j a P EA A S 94 Answer Delay Timer I ERE TST 102 Tl sac sie ais 94 answer supervision criteria FXS E1 Sie phi Rie R Aled Anes 103 answer supervision criteria FXS T1 Dahir Biter arenes 95 Answer Tones FXS answer supervision field 95 103 Append SIP Proxy Domain Name in User ID proxy server 115 Auto Disconnect field group 88 AutoCar e R 83 AutoCall Voice Fax Params and Pass Through Enable FXS Loop Stait eeoa n ee iei E 83 AutoCall Offhook Alert field 83 84 Automatic Disconnection field 88 Available Tones FXS answer supervision E1 field 103 Available Tones FXS answer supervision T1 field 95 bandwidth code 0 ccceeeeeeee 81 battery caution oo eee eee ceeeteeeeee 31 368 MultiVOIP User Guide baud rate default Multi VOIP software connection 06 164 baud rate fax ee eeeeceeeereeees 719 baud rate setting eee 164 Behind Proxy NAT device 120 Bipolar Violation E1 stats field 286 Bipolar Violation T1 stats field 283 Blue Alarm E1 stats field 284 Blue Alarm T1 stats field 281 Boot LED on MVP 2410 3010
60. Select from a range of coders with Coder law 64 specific bandwidths The higher the kbps bps rate the more bandwidth is G 726 used The channel that you are 16 24 32 calling must have the same voice 40 kbps coder selected G 727 nine bps Default G 723 1 6 3 kbps as rates required for H 323 Here 64K of G 723 1 digital voice are compressed to 5 3 kbps 6 3K allowing several simultaneous 6 3 kbps conversations over the same G 729 bandwidth that would otherwise 8kbps carry only one Net Coder To make selections from the 6 4 7 2 8 Selected Coder drop down list the 8 8 9 6 Manual option must be enabled kbps Max 11 128 This drop down list enables you to bandwidth kbps select the maximum bandwidth coder allowed for this channel The Max Bandwidth drop down list is enabled only if the Coder is set to Automatic If coder is to be selected automatically Auto setting then enter a value for maximum bandwidth 81 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Advanced Features Silence Y N Determines whether silence Compression compression is enabled checked for this voice channel With Silence Compression enabled the MultiVOIP will not transmit voice packets when silence is detected thereby reducing the amount of network bandwidth that is being used by the voice channel Default o
61. Services Parameters cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 144 Set TI E1 ISDN Parameters 89 Set Voice FAX Parameters 75 setting Ethernet IP parameters 65 setting password 316 web browser GUI eee 320 setting RTP Parameters 295 setting user defaults eee 313 Setup SAV N g i eserita ses 168 USER E EEEE 313 setup saving user values 313 Shared Secret RADIUS screen field S E EEST 160 signaling cadences ceceeeeeee 124 Signaling Port H 323 Call Signaling field sncstaconi anid iad 109 Signaling Port SIP Call Signaling field ionia nnan ai 114 signaling tones sssesseeseseesseeeesee 124 Silence Compression call progress field i ssaeave Riise ds Aiea 263 Silence Compression RADIUS Attributes ccceceeeeeesseeeseeeeees 163 Silence Compression SMTP logs 138 Silence Compression field 82 Single Port Protocol general description Bl EE T 18 Tiaia naan he iirc 10 SIP compatibility El models eesis 18 TL models iieis 10 SIP Call Signaling Parameter definitions 0 00 114 115 116 SIP Call Signaling screen fields Password proxy server 116 Index Proxy Domain Name IP Address a R ates dis 115 Proxy Polling Interval 116 Re Registration Time proxy SOLVED ereere en iEn Ee aE EE 116 Signaling Number proxy server E OEE EEA 115 TTL Value ee ra eeke ees 116 Use SIP PrOXy isee 114
62. Software I Mozilla Firefox IM Microsoft Office Acrobat Distiller 7 0 DX Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional MutivorP 6 08 fH MultivOIP 2410 4 08 305 gt B Configuration Port Setup gt B Date and Time Setup gt 25 Download CAS Protocol 2 Download Factory Defaults La EE Firmware 2 Download User Defaults B Set Password gt B Uninstall gt 2 Upgrade Software Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 If a password has been established the Password Verification screen will appear Password Verification Type in the password and click OK 4 The MultiVOIP ___ Firmware screen appears saying MultiVOIP model number is up Reboot to Download Firmware Mult OIP Firmware a Click OK to download the firmware The Boot LED on the MultiVOIP will light up and remain lit during the file transfer process 306 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 5 The program will locate the firmware bin file in the MultiVOIP directory Highlight the correct newest bin file and click Open Look in jmutvoep x Bl c File name mvp Files of type Code Files bin 7 Cancel P A 6 Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen during the file transfer fy y 1900000090999 9999999999999 Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 The MultiVOIP s Boot LED will t
63. TIJE1 ISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information E Advanced E Phone Book E Statistics E Save Setup E Connection E Help Ethemet IP Parameters p Ethernet Parameters id x 802 1p Parameters Frame Type TYPE I z Priority Call Control VolP Media Others BExcellent Effort 7 BVoice hd O Best Effort hd VLAN ID p IP Parameters Gateway Name MultivolP I Enable DHCP IP Address 192 168 41 81 Call Control PHB 34 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 FTP Server M Enable r Diff Serv Parameters VoIP Media PHB 46 The primary advantage of the web GUI is remote access for control and configuration The controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit itself must both be connected to the same IP network and their IP addresses must be known Once you ve begun using the web browser GUI you can go back to the MultiVOIP Windows GUI at any time However you must log out of the web browser GUI before using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI 21 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Logging of System Events MultiTech has built SysLog Server functionality into the software of the MultiVOIP units SysLog is a de facto standard for logging events in network communication systems Logs IV Enable Console Messages Logs I Turn Off Logs Cancel GUI C SMTP C SNMP Help SysLog Serve
64. User Name proxy server 115 SIP Fields Outbound Phonebook a E ES 223 Tirra a k 180 SIP incompatibility with H 450 Supplementary Services 144 Bd E E TS 18 TE ta e a 10 SIP Port Number field Bid ERE E ARS 223 Tid RR T esate 180 SIP port number standard Bd R N EES 223 TD RR E EE TS 180 SIP Proxies Statistics Servers IPAddress iiinis noiris 292 Portaat n e A a 292 StAtUs a p 292 Typi E skies 292 SIP Proxy Parameters 0000 114 SIP URL field Bl essa nie cana 223 TSA inaw ena eee 180 SMTP log reporting type button 142 SMTP logs by email illustration 139 SMTP Parameters definitions 135 SMTP Parameters fields Enable SMTP ccccceee 134 Login Name sses 134 Mail Server IP Address 135 Mail Type reisiin seeiis 135 Number of Days 135 Number of Records 135 PASS WOIC nieas iisi doce 135 Port Number cccccceceees 135 Recipient Address 135 Reply To Address 0 135 Requires Authentication 134 SUBJECT ooieoe nsiet E 135 388 MultiVOIP User Guide SMTP parameters accessing 133 SMTP parameters setting 133 SMTP port standard 135 SMTP prerequisites cesses 57 SMTP enabling 0 0 eee 133 SNMP log reporting type button 142 SNMP agent program 5I SNMP agent enabling 121 SNMP Parameter fields Address ienien 123
65. VOIP program menu 298 uninstalling Multi VOIP software 46 321 unobtainable tone custom 131 unobtainable tones s eee 130 unpacking MVP24 10 ce eecetecreetecneeereeeeee 32 MVP3010 cee cecesecreeeeeneeeeeeeeee 32 Up Time System Info eee 167 254 update interval logging 141 updated firmware obtaining 300 upgrade Bl E E E E T 17 Ti E E E 9 upgrade card 4 to 8 channel installation 361 Upgrade Software option description Multi VOIP program menu 298 upgrade firmware s s s 304 uploads vs downloads FTP 324 Use Fast Start H 323 Call Signaling feldinn aonet 109 MultiVOIP User Guide Use Gatekeeper Outbound Phonebook field ED secsucedseececsescelsdte conccahiessdass sees 222 TD E E O E 179 Use Online Alternate Gatekeeper List H 323 Call Signaling field 111 Use Proxy SIP field j KE EEE 223 Thoen ea Gated Ate Ste tees 180 Use Registrar field Outbound Phonebook j E E E 224 A U POE E E E EA 181 Use SIP Proxy field eee 114 Use TDM Routing for Intra Gateway CaSe enta eai 73 user default configuration creating aare staves aa a TE a Ei 169 user defaults downloading 313 user defaults setting eee 313 user name Windows GUL ceceeseeseereees 316 User Name proxy server field 115 user values software saving 313 variations in PBX characteristics Bl aise n
66. View Minnesota 55112 763 785 3500 or 800 328 9717 U S Fax 763 785 9874 Technical Support 800 972 2439 http www multitech com CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW i sievecessscxesessssvessssesss3suneees sosvesvedecvosvedecncssassevsoubseosenvedesvenes 6 ABOUT THIS MANUAL cccccccscscsccececececeeecececececececececececececececeseceseesseeaseceseseseeseseaeegs 7 INTRODUCTION TO TI MULTIVOIPS MVP2410 amp MVP24 48 00 cceceessceeeesreeeees 9 PL FVONE PANELED 833 esis E cas E E cts ead oot Bebawes cae Shuh E 15 INTRODUCTION TO EI MULTIVOIPS MVP3010 amp MVP30 60 c ccesssssecesteees 17 EP BY OntPANCLLE DS sess cs E EEE A bates sages Se abe aae E sath sees a 23 ED LED Descriptions seiiet sE e keiina ri ai er eaS eA Eai 24 eia G O7 N LOIN OA EEE E EE E EA S ga 25 Specs for Digital TI Multi VOIP Units 0 cccccccccesscessceseceseesecesecnsecnsecneeeaeeeneees 25 Specs for Digital EI MultiVOIP UNiits c cccccescescessceseceecesecesecusecneceeeaeeeneees 26 INSTALLATION AT A GLANCE o onn aea i EE E EE ETE E rika 27 RELATED DOCUMENTATION ccccccccscsccecececececeeecececececececesecesseseececesseasessueseeseeeaes 27 CHAPTER 2 QUICK START INSTRUCTIONG cccssssscssssscccsssseccsssssecess 28 CHAPTER 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION AND CABLING cscc0cees 30 INTRODUCTION oiccceccce rinses E cues EE EEE EEE EEA 31 SAFETY WARNINGS AEEA EEE EEE EEEE E EE 31 Lithium Battery CQUtion 00 ccvccssscss
67. Voice Coder Lost call Compression Rate used for call will be listed in log Outbound The DTMF dialing Prefix When selected the Digits digits received by Matched phonebook prefix Sent this gateway from matched in the remote processing the call gateway will be listed in log presuming that DTMF is set to Out of Band Call Successful or Status unsuccessful Server The IP address etc of the traffic control server if any Details being used whether an H 323 gatekeeper a SIP proxy or an SPP registrar gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server The Options field refers to non mandatory server features that might be activated For example with H 323 various H 323 Version 4 options might be listed Multiplexing Tunneling etc 162 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Custom Fields Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description From Details To Details Gateway Originating Gatew N Completing or Number gateway answering gateway IP Addr IP address where IP Addr IP address where call call originated was completed or answered Descript Identifier of site Descript Identifier of site where call where call was originated completed or answered Options When selected log Options When selected log will not use will not use Silence Silence Compression and Compression and Forward Error Forward Error Co
68. a call network Called Party unknown The call dialing plan under Number Plan ISDN telephony which the called party operates data telex national standard private as received from network 96 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration T1 Parameter Definitions contd Field Name Values Description General T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Line Build Out 0 dB 7 5 dB To reduce the crosstalk on 15 dB 22 5 dB received signals a transmit attenuator can be placed in the data path Transmit attenuation is selectable Default O dB Pulse Shape 0 to 40 Meters Refers to length of cable Level 40 to 81 m between MultiVOIP and 81 to 122m PBX telco in meters Most 122 to 162 m common will be 0 to 40m 162 to 200 m Caller ID Parameters Caller ID Y N Turns Caller ID feature on if Enable checked and off if unchecked Calling 0 9 A DTMF symbol used to mark the Number Prefix beginning of the calling party Caller ID number for use with Caller ID Maximum length 4 characters Calling 0 9 A DTMF symbol used to mark Number Suffix the end of the calling party Caller ID number for use with Caller ID Maximum length 4 characters Detect Flash Y N This setting determines whether Hook or not the MultiVOIP responds to hook flash signals Detection Time 100 1500 Minimum hook flash time that milliseconds will be interpreted as a valid flash by the MultiVOIP Generation 10
69. a collection of resolutions of issues that MultiVOIP users have encountered these are Troubleshooting Resolutions in the searchable Knowledge Base Overview MultiVOIP User Guide MultiVOIP Product Family MVP MVP MVP MVP Description ig 7 Model 2410 24 48 3010 30 60 Function T1 T1 E1 E1 digital digital digital digital VOIP VOIP VOIP VOIP unit add on unit add on card card Capacity 24 24 30 30 channels added channels jadded channels channels Chassis 19 1U circuit 19 1U circuit Mounting rack card rack card mount only mount only pore MVP MVP MVP MVP MVP 7 Model 810 428 410 210 130 130FXS Function analog add on analog analog analog voip card voip voip voip Capacity 8 4 added 4 2 1 channels channels channels channels channel Chassis 19 1U circuit 19 1U Table table Mounting rack card rack top top mount only mount peaa MVP810ST MVP410ST 7 Model Function ISDN BRI voip ISDN BRI voip Capacity 4 ISDN lines 2 ISDN lines 8 B channels 4 B channels Chassis 19 1U rack mount 19 1U rack mount Mounting 1 BRI means Basic Rate Interface MultiVOIP User Guide Overview Introduction to TI MultiVOIPs MVP2410 amp MVP24 48 We proudly present MultiTech s T1 Digital Multi VOIP products The MVP2410 is a rack mount model and the MVP24 48 is an add on expansion card that doubles the c
70. appears saying MultiVOIP model number is up Reboot to Download Firmware Multi OIP Firmware oR cancel _ Click OK to download the factory defaults The Boot LED on the MultiVOIP will light up and remain lit during the file transfer process 311 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 5 After the PC gets a response from the MultiVOIP the Dialog IP Parameters screen will appear IP Parameters r Diff Serv Parameters gt 434 Call Control PHB Frame Ts TYPE Jl 7 E VolP Media PHB m IP Parameters J Enable DHCP _ IP Address 192 168 3 TH Cancel IP Mask 25 a 255 a 0 Help Gateway i The user should verify that the correct IP parameter values are listed on the screen and revise them if necessary Then click OK 6 Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen during the data transfer by CAAA AAAAEAAAAEAEAAEAEE Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 EERE The MultiVOIP s Boot LED will turn off at the end of the transfer 7 The Download Factory Defaults procedure is complete 312 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Setting and Downloading User Defaults The Download User Defaults command allows you to maintain a known working configuration that is specific to your VOIP system You can then experiment with alterations or improvements
71. ariet 70 DNS Server IP Address 72 Enable DHCP cccceseeeeees 69 Enable SRV ccccesccesseesseeeeeee 72 FTP Server Enable 0 72 Gateway osassa irs 69 Gateway Name 69 IP Address 2 00 a 69 IP Mask montse edtesn ick 69 Others Priorities ccceeeeee 68 Packet Prioritization 802 1p 67 TDM Routing Option 73 Use TDM Routing for Intra Gateway Calls ee 73 VLAN D rsca orae 68 VoIP Media Priority 68 375 Index Voip Media PHB cee 70 Ethernet IP Parameters screen ACCESSING oiii oeii isesi ieres 65 European Community Directives 348 Excessive Zeroes E1 stats field 286 Excessive Zeroes T1 stats field 281 expansion card 4 to 8 channel Installation cceesceeesseeeeees 361 factory default software settings 310 factory defaults downloading 310 factory repair for customers U S amp Canada seiret reirei 344 failover PSTN El models spe eere enes 18 TI modelsi s et en ent 10 failover PSTN feature 183 FAQ for MultiVOIPS cece 7 fast busy unobtainable tones 130 Fast Connect 113 See Fast Start Fast Start compatibility 0 0 109 Fast Start plus H 245 Tunneling field CT OTS 113 fax baud rate default 719 Fax Enable field ccceceeseeeeees 79 FAX ParameterS ccccsccccesseeees 79 fax tones output level 80 Fax Volume f
72. e 79 Voice FAX Parameter fields Max Baud Rate Fax 05 79 Voice FAX Parameter fields Fax Vol men i i orisiisicierisi 80 Voice FAX Parameter fields Jitter Value Fax ccccceeeeeeees 80 Voice FAX Parameter fields Mode Fax c ccccssseceessreeeesees 80 Voice FAX Parameter fields Silence Compression 0 82 Voice FAX Parameter fields Echo Cancellation cc0cccee 82 Voice FAX Parameter fields Forward Error Correction 82 Voice FAX Parameter fields Dynamic Jitter Buffer 86 Voice FAX Parameter fields Minimum Jitter Value 000 00 86 Voice FAX Parameter fields Maximum Jitter Value 87 Voice FAX Parameter fields Optimization Factor eee 87 Voice FAX Parameter fields Automatic Disconnection 88 Voice FAX Parameter fields Jitter Value oo ieee ccceceeeseeeeeeee 88 Index Voice FAX Parameter fields Call Duration ossee 88 Voice FAX Parameter fields Consecutive Packets Lost 88 Voice FAX Parameter fields Network Disconnection 88 Voice FAX Parameters screen ACCESSING sceeeeseceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 Voice FAX parameters setting 75 voip email account eee eee 134 voip management remote 121 Voip Media PHB field 70 VoIP Media Priority Ethernet IP parameters field eee 68 voip software h st POcio naaraan 5I voip system example conceptual E1
73. e E E ce EE E cotuata e a Rens TP eTa TAE E AI EE EE A EES E IEE TSE IET E IEEE EAEE SEEE T1 Telephony Parameters for MVP2410 E1 Telephony Parameters for MVP3010 SMTP Parameters for email call log reporting eeeesseseessesseserersrersrrssersrerererseses 57 Config Info Checklist esearo eee enee hire SR EE EEEE E 58 Local Configuration Procedure Summary sssesssesesseseesseeesereereerreresrsrresesreesse 59 Local Configuration Procedure Detailed osnoseeneeeeeeeeneeseneeseesesreseeeeee 60 Modem Relay riscritto aiaei ia ea iaia 87 Contents MultiVOIP User Guide CHAPTER 6 T1 PHONEBOOK CONFIGURATION u csssscsssscssscssssccssssees 170 T1 VERSUS E1 TELEPHONY ENVIRONMENTS ccsscccesecessceceeeeenceceseeeeneecsaeennees 171 CONFIGURING T1 NAM TELEPHONY MULTIVOIP PHONEBOOKG 0 c 0006 171 T 1 PHONEBOOK EXAMPLES oira neiii oeio EEE E E E E 189 3 Sites AU TIEx ample eorne A E E EE OESS 189 Configuring Mixed Digital Analog VOIP Systems nosos 195 Call Completion Summaries cccsscceseceenseceseeeenseceseceesseceseeeeaseceaeecsaeceeneeenaeees 204 Variations in PBX CRArACtCristics cccccccccccccccesesssecececeeesssscecececeessssseeeeeeeessnneaes 207 CHAPTER 7 E1 PHONEBOOK CONFIGURATION u ccssccsssscsssscssesessssees 208 E1 VERSUS T1 TELEPHONY ENVIRONMENTS ccsscccesrcessceceeeeeneeceaeeeeaeeceseesnees 209 E1 STANDARD INBOUND AND OUTBOUND MULTIVOIP PHONEBOOKSG 2
74. enclosure ensure adequate airflow within the rack so that the maximum recommended ambient temperature is not exceeded Ensure that the unit is properly connected to earth ground by verifying that it is reliably grounded when mounted within a rack If a power strip is used ensure that the power strip provides adequate grounding of the attached apparatus When mounting the equipment in the rack make sure mechanical loading is even to avoid a hazardous condition such as loading heavy equipment in rack unevenly The rack used should safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it supports Ensure that the mains supply circuit is capable of handling the load of the equipment See the power label on the equipment for load requirements full specifications for MultiVOIP models are presented in chapter 1 of this manual Maximum ambient temperature for the unit is 60 degrees Celsius 140 degrees Fahrenheit at 20 90 non condensing relative humidity This equipment should only be installed by properly qualified service personnel Only connect like circuits In other words connect SELV Secondary Extra Low Voltage circuits to SELV circuits and TN Telecommunications Network circuits to TN circuits 34 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling 19 Inch Rack Enclosure Mounting Procedure Attaching the MultiVOIP to a rack rail of an EIA 19 inch rack enclosure will certainly require two persons Essentially the techn
75. gateway s successive attempts to connect to and be governed by a higher level SPP registrar gateway The Primary Registrar is the highest level registrar gateway Alternate Registrar 1 is second Alternate Registrar 2 is the lowest order SPP registrar gateway Registrar Options Registrar Option fields are active only in registrar client mode and only for registrar voip units Keep Alive 30 300 Time out duration before a in sec seconds registrar will unregister a client that does not send its Tm here signal Client normally sends its I m here signal every 20 seconds Timeout default 60 seconds 119 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SPP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Proxy NAT Device Parameters Behind Y N Enables MultiVOIP running Proxy NAT in SPP Registrar mode to device operate behind a proxy NAT Address Translation Proxy NAT nnnn Device where Parameters n 0 255 Public IP Address device NAT Network The public IP address of the proxy NAT device which the MultiVOIP is behind An example of a NAT equipped SPP network is shown below About SPP Proxy NAT Device Parameters SPP Client Registrar System Registrar Private IP Voip A Proxy NAT device is sometimes used in a Client Registrar SPP voip system where the registrar voip is in a private
76. get an outside line 235 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP located in the company s Paris facility 200 002 008 005 Rotterdam 200 002 010 003 London Inner 200 002 010 003 London Outer 200 002 010 003 Guildford 200 002 010 003 London company office empl extensions 200 002 008 005 Amsterdam company office employees The Inbound PhoneBook for the Paris VOIP is shown below 236 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP in the company s Amsterdam facility 200 002 010 003 London inner 200 002 010 003 Guildford 200 002 009 007 Paris 200 002 009 007 Lyon 200 002 010 003 London company office employ ext 200 002 009 007 Paris company office employee ext The Inbound PhoneBook for the Amsterdam VOIP is shown below 237 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Configuring Digital amp Analog VOIPs in Same System Analog MultiVOIP units like the MVP 210 410 810 are compatible with digital MultiVOIP units like the MVP3010 In many cases digital and analog VOIP units will appear in the same telephony IP system In addition to MVP 210 410 810 MultiVOIP units Series II units legacy analog VOIP units Series I units made by MultiTech may be included in the system as well When legacy VOIP units are included the VOIP admi
77. in both offices is shown below Local Call Area Codes 612 651 952 r Company HQ Minneapolis North Sub area 763 T1 Digital PBX voIP 7 200 2 10 3 5173 mi 717 5170 Overlay Area Code 443 f g G ae Baltimore Sales Ofc area 410 R t Digital _T1 BX u igital P t VolP FR e 7003 Lo 200 2 9 7 7002 325 7001 190 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP located in the company s Baltimore facility 200 002 010 003 St Paul 200 002 010 003 Minneapolis N Suburbs 200 002 010 003 Minneapolis S Suburbs The entries in the Minneapolis VOIP s Inbound PhoneBook match the Outbound PhoneBook entries of the Baltimore VOIP as shown below 191 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide To call the Minneapolis St Paul area a Baltimore employee must dial eleven digits In this case we are assuming that the Baltimore PBX does not require an 8 or 9 to seize an outside phone line If a Baltimore employee dials any phone number in the 612 area code the call will automatically be handled by the company s voip system Upon receiving such a call the Minneapolis voip will remove the digits 1612 But before the suburban Minneapolis voip can complete the call to the PSTN of the Minneapolis local calling area it must dial 9 to get a
78. in the MultiVoip Program menu Go to Start Programs MultiVOIP___x xx The final expression x xx is the firmware version number In the illustration below the firmware version is 4 00a made for the E1 MultiVOIP MVP3010 Ee MultiVOlP 3000 4 004 When a new firmware version is installed the MultiVOIP software can be upgraded in one step using the Upgrade Software command or piecemeal using the Download Firmware command and the Download Factory Defaults command 304 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Download Firmware transfers the firmware including the H 323 protocol stack in the PC s MultiVOIP directory into the nonvolatile flash memory of the MultiVOIP Download Factory Defaults sets all configuration parameters to the standard default values that are loaded at the MultiTech factory Upgrade Software implements both the Download Firmware command and the Download Factory Defaults command Downloading Firmware 1 The MultiVoip Configuration program must be off when invoking the Download Firmware command If it is on the command will not work 2 To invoke the Download Factory Defaults command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Download Firmware amp Set Program Access and Defaults eS Windows Catalog Windows Update WinZip Launch RealOne Player B Configuration Programs 2 Documents Settings Search Help and Support gt an Accessories Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt FA Jasc
79. menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Supplementary Services Parameters Pulldown Icon gt Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H TIfE1sISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl aAlt L Supplementary Services Ctri Alt H System Information Ctrl alt Shortcut Sidebar El Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt H Voice Fax Call Signaling TIsE1 ISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information Supplementary Services features derive from the H 450 standard which brings to voip telephony functionality once only available with PSTN or PBX telephony Supplementary Services features can be used under H 323 only and not under SIP Even though the H 450 standard refers only to H 323 Supplementary Services are still applicable to the SIP and SPP voip protocols 144 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration In each field enter the values that fit your particular network m Supplementary Services Parameters Select Channel Channel 1 bs Call Transfer rm Call Name Identification M Enable M Enable Allowed Name Type Transfer Sequence fs 1 I Calling Party T Busy Party Call Hold I Alerting Party I Connected Party MV Enable Ca
80. of the VOIP system the local calling area of each VOIP location becomes accessible to all of the VOIP system s users As a result international calls can be made at local calling rates For example suppose that Wren Clothing buys its zippers from The Bluebird Zipper Company in the western part of metropolitan London In that case Wren Clothing personnel in both Paris and Amsterdam could call the Bluebird Zipper Company without paying international long distance rates Only London local phone rates would be charged This applies to calls completed anywhere in London s local calling area which includes both Inner London and Outer London Generally local calling rates apply only within a single area code and for all calls outside that area code national rates apply There are however some European cases where local calling rates extend beyond a single area code Local rates between Inner and Outer London are one example of this It is also possible in some locations that calls within an area code may be national calls But this is rare United Kingdom Wren Clothing Co Manone fo irs VOIP PBX Site ren Clothing Co Bluebird Zipper Co i London London Laa f 2 yy VOIP PBX Site te aos Vt Amsterdam The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co s VOIP PBX Site OF Paris 4 Calls at London local rates Local Calling Area 211 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Similarly the VOIP sys
81. of tone durations used msec On Off four integer time to denote supervisory tones specified values in by user Supervisory tones relate to milli seconds zero value for dial tone indicates continuous tone answering and disconnection of calls Although most cadences have only two parts an on duration and an off duration some telephony cadences have four parts Most cadences then are expressed as two iterations of a two part sequence Although this is redundant it is necessary to allow for expression of 4 part cadences 129 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 13 Set Custom Tones and Cadences optional The Regional Parameters dialog box has a secondary dialog box that allows you to customize DTMF tone pairs to create unique ring tones dial tones busy tones or unobtainable tones fast busy signal or re order tones telling the user that she must hang up an off hook phone or survivability tones an indication of call routing redundancy for your system This screen allows the user to specify tone pair attributes that are not found in any of the standard national regional telephony toning schemes To access this customization feature click on the Custom button on the Regional Parameters screen The Custom button is active only when Custom is selected in the Country Region field Custom Tone Par Sotinos Tore Pae Ds Tore 130 MultiVO
82. or the commands in the Program group Type your password in the Password field of the Password screen Type this same password again in the Confirm Password field to verify the password you have chosen 317 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide NOTE Be sure to write down your password in a convenient but secure place If the password is forgotten contact MultiTech Technical Support for advice Password Click OK 5 A message will appear indicating that a password has been set successfully Hult OIP Password M __ care After the password has been set successfully the MultiVOIP will re boot itself and in so doing its BOOT LED will light up 318 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 6 After the password has been set the user will be required to enter the password to gain access to the web browser GUI and any part of the MultiVOIP software listed in the Program group menu User Name and Password are both needed for access to the FTP Server residing in the MultiVOIP Password Yerification When MultiVOIP program asks for password at launch of program the program will simply shut down if CANCEL is selected The MultiVOIP program will produce an error message if an invalid password is entered Multi OIP eA 319 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Setting a Password Web Browser GUI Setting a password is optional when usi
83. reside on the same PC as the MultiVOIP configuration program The MultiVoipManager program is on the MultiVOIP Product CD Updates when applicable may be posted at on the MultiTech FTP site To download go to ftp ftp multitech com MultiVoip Web Browser Interface The MultiVOIP web browser GUI gives access to the same commands and configuration parameters as are available in the MultiVOIP Windows GUI except for logging functions When using the web browser GUI logging can be done by email the SMTP option 51 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Functional Equivalence of Interfaces The MultiVOIP configuration program is required to do the initial configuration that is setting an IP address for the MultiVOIP unit so that the VOIP unit can communicate with the MultiVoipManager program or with the web browser GUI Management of the VOIP after that point can be done from any of these three programs since they all offer essentially the same functionality Functionally either the MultiVoipManager program or the web browser GUI can replace the MultiVOIP configuration program after the initial configuration is complete with minor exceptions as noted WARNING Do not attempt to interface the MultiVOIP unit with two control programs simultaneously that is by accessing the MultiVOIP configuration program via the Command Port and either the MultiVoipManager program or the web browser interface via the Ethernet Port The r
84. selected DTMF ms this setting determines how long each DTMF digit sounds or is held Default 100 ms Not supported in 5 02c BRI software DTMF Out of When DTMF Out of Band is selected In Out of Band or the MultiVOIP detects DTMF tones at Band Inband its input and regenerates them at its output When DTMF Inband is selected the DTMF digits are passed through the MultiVOIP unit as they are received In 502c BRI software DTMF Out of Band can be checked or unchecked Out of Band RFC 2833 RFC2833 method Uses an RTP Mode SIP Info mode defined in RFC 2833 to transmit the DTMF digits SIP Info method Generates dual tone multi frequency DTMF tones on the telephony call leg The SIP INFO message is sent along the signaling path of the call You must set this parameter per the capabilities of the remote endpoint with which the voip will communicate The RFC2833 method is the more common of the two methods FAX Parameters Fax Enable Y N Enables or disables fax capability for a particular channel Modem Y N When enabled modem traffic can be Relay carried on voip system When disabled Enable modem traffic will bypass the voip system Modem Bypass mode Max Baud 2400 4800 Set to match baud rate of fax machine Rate 7200 9600 connected to channel see Fax machine s Fax 12000 user manual 14400 bps Default 14400 bps 79 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Config
85. the problem is resolved 7 No repairs are to be made by you Repairs are to be made only by Multi Tech Systems or its licensees Unauthorized repairs void registration and warranty 8 Manufacturer Multi Tech Systems Inc Trade name MultiVOIP Model number MVP 810 410 210 FCC registration number US AU7DDNAN46050 Modular jack USOC RJ 48C Service center in USA Multi Tech Systems Inc 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds View MN 55112 Tel 763 785 3500 FAX 763 785 9874 Canadian Limitations Notice Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect t
86. the VOIP to interact properly with the PBX or central office switch that it serves The need to download CAS protocols arises for only a small minority of VOIP users and only when PBX switch is found to be incompatible with standard protocols Match this parameter to the setting of PBX or central office switch FXS Options No Response Timer 1 65535 in seconds Length of time before call connection attempt is abandoned Applicable only when FXS is selected as CAS protocol 101 Technical Configuration r T1 E1 ISDN Parameters s g T Long Haul Mode J CRC Check Line Build Out f0 dB MultiVOIP User Guide OK Cancel Pulse Shape Level 0 to 40m fedl Supervision Frame Format ESF X CAS Protocol FXS Ground Start EXS Ground Start E amp M Immediate MFR2 China v FXS Ground Start Supervision IV Answer Delay Survivability DialT one UnobtainableT one lt OK Cancel RingTone Es ra Answer Tones Help Answer Delay Timer 12 When the FXS Ground Start CAS Protocol is used a secondary screen can be accessed via the Supervision button to set these FXS parameter values E1 Parameter Definitions Timer in seconds Field Name Values Description FXS Ground Start Supervision Parameters Answer Delay Y N When this option is selected the Enable FXS interface sends the connection notice to the calling party
87. to the telephone company 2 As indicated below the suitable jack Universal Service Order Code connecting arrangement for this equipment is shown If applicable the facility interface codes FIC and service order codes SOC are shown 3 An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details 4 If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible 5 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operation or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice to allow you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service 6 If trouble is experienced with this equipment the model of which is indicated below please contact Multi Tech Systems Inc at the address shown below for details of how to have repairs made If the equipment is causing harm to the network the telephone company 349 Regulatory Information MultiVOIP User Guide may request you to remove the equipment form t network until
88. to the configurations confident that a working configuration can be restored if necessary 1 Before you can invoke the Download User Defaults command you must first save a set of configuration parameters by using the Save Setup command in the sidebar menu of the MultiVOIP software 2 Before the setup configuration is saved you will be prompted to save the setup as the User Default Configuration Select the checkbox and click OK Bee ee sees S6SuueSSeSeer ese ses segaq MultiVOIP will be brought down OK Cancel Help A user default file will be created The MultiVOIP unit will reboot itself 313 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 To download the user defaults go to Start Programs MultiVOIP xxx Download User Defaults Set Program Access and Defaults eS Windows Catalog Windows Update WinZip Launch RealOne Player BS Configuration gt Accessories gt B Configuration Port Setup im Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt B Date and Time Setup 2 Documents gt I Jasc Software Z5 Download CAS Protocol Mozilla Firefox a Download Factory Defaults an Microsoft Office i 2 Download Firmware Search Acrobat Distiller 7 0 4 Download User Defaults DS Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional Set Password Ins pevlelinere MukivoIP 6 08 gt 8 uninstall fH MultivoIP 2410 4 08 A Z5 Uparade Software Settings gt 4 A confirmation screen will appear indicating that this action will ent
89. used the port number 1720 must be chosen 222 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description SIP Fields Use Proxy Y N Select if proxy server is used Transport TCP or Voip administrator must choose Protocol UDP between UDP and TCP transmission protocols UDP is a high speed low overhead connectionless protocol where data is transmitted without acknowledgment guaranteed delivery or guaranteed packet sequence integrity TCP is slower connection oriented protocol with greater overhead but having acknowledgment and guarantees delivery and packet sequence integrity SIP Port 5060 or other The SIP Port Number is a Number UDP logical port number See RFC3087 The voip will listen for SIP Control of messages at this logical port Servi If SIP is used 5060 is the Context using default standard or well SIP Request known port number to be URI by the used If 5060 is not used Network then the port number used is that specified in the SIP Working roti Request URI Universal Resource Identifier SIP URL sip userphone Looking similar to an email hostserver where aserphone is the telephone number and hostserver is the domain name or an address on the network address a SIP URL identifies a user s address In SIP communications each call
90. with the gatekeeper in order to maintain the connection If the MultiVOIP does not register before the TTL interval expires the MultiVOIP gateway s registration with the proxy server will expire and the proxy server will no longer permit call traffic to or from that gateway Calls in progress will continue to function even if the gateway becomes de registered 116 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 117 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The tables below describes all fields in the general SPP Call Signaling screen SPP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Single Port Protocol SPP Mode Direct SPP voip systems can operate Client or in two modes Registrar in the direct mode where all voip gateways have static IP addresses assigned to them or in the registrar client mode where one voip gateway serves as registrar and all other gateways being its clients point to that registrar The registrar assigns IP addresses dynamically General Options Port The UDP port on which data transmission will occur Each client voip has its own port If two client voips are both behind the same firewall then they must have different ports assigned to them If there are two clients and each is behind a different firewall then the clients could have different port numbers or the same port number Default port number
91. with which it interfaces There are eight types of technical parameters that must be set These technical parameters pertain to 1 its operation in an IP network 2 its operation with telephony equipment 3 its transmission of voice and fax messages 4 its interaction with SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol network management software MultiVoipManager 5 certain telephony attributes that are common to particular nations or regions 6 its operation with a mail server on the same IP network per SMTP parameters such that log reports about VoIP telephone call traffic can be sent to the administrator by email 7 implementing some common premium telephony features Call Transfer Call Hold Call Waiting Call ID Supplementary Services and 8 selecting the method by which log reports will be made accessible The process of specifying values for the various parameters in these seven categories is what we call technical configuration and it is described in this chapter Phonebook Configuration The second type of configuration that is required for the MultiVOIP pertains to the phone number dialing sequences that it will receive and transmit when handling calls Dialing patterns will be affected by both the PBX telephony equipment and the other VOIP devices that the MultiVOIP unit interacts with We call this Phonebook Configuration and for analog MultiVOIP units it is described in Chapter 6 The
92. 0 146 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The Supplementary Services fields are described in the tables below Supplementary Services Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Select Channel 1 24 2410 1 30 3010 The channel to be configured is selected here Call Transfer Enable Y N Select to enable the Call Transfer function in the voip unit This is a blind transfer and the sequence of events is as follows Callers A and B are having a conversation Caller A wants to put B into contact with C Caller A dials call transfer sequence Caller A hears dial tone and dials number for caller C Caller A gets disconnected while Caller B gets connected to caller C A brief musical jingle is played for the caller on hold Transfer Sequence any phone keypad character The numbers and or symbols that the caller must press on the phone keypad to initiate a call transfer The call transfer sequence can be 1 to 4 characters in length using any combination of digits or characters or The sequences for call transfer call hold and call waiting can be from 1 to 4 digits in length consisting of any combination of digits 1234567890 147 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Hold Y N Select to enable Call Hold func
93. 0 1500 In some systems a MultiVOIP Time milliseconds might receive a hook flash signal from an upstream device a PBX voip or other device and must replicate it to a downstream device This parameter determines the duration of the hook flash signal that is passed to a downstream device Clocking External Internal Set opposite to telco PBX setting Example if telco clocking internal set VOIP clocking as external 97 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide T1 Parameter Definitions contd Field Name Values Description Line Coding AMI B8ZS Match to PBX or telco PCM Law A Law Mu Law Match to PBX or telco Mu law is analog to digital compression expansion standard used in North America A law is European standard Yellow Alarm Bit 2 1111 Depending on the Frame Format Format used there are choices of Yellow Alarm format as follows D4 Bit2 0 in every speech channel FS bit of frame 12 is forced to one ESF Bit2 0 in every speech channel 1111111100000000 pattern in data link channel Check with your PBX telco administrator for the correct setting or use the default value 1111 98 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration E1 Parameters The parameters applicable to F1 and their values are shown in the figure below These E1 Parameter fields are described in the tables that follow m TI E1 ISDN Parameters Ok L
94. 00 209 Free Calls One VOIP Site to ANOther ccccccccccccccssssscecececsssssnececececsesssssceeceenens 210 Local Rate Calls Within Local Calling Area of Remote VOIP 000 211 National Rate Calls Within Nation of Remote VOIP Site 213 Inbound versus Outbound PRON DOOKS cccccecccevecccecvveecsesececnsscecesssscesnssseseees 214 PHONEBOOK CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE ssscesseecsseceseeeceaeceeeeecaeceeneecaeeeses 218 E11 PHONEBOOK EXAMPLES sssssscosssvovsccesstsonsccetscsonscessssvonssesssvonsesensavensesenscs 231 3 Sites AU EL Example ccicccccsccescccssecesstssenvccuvsecnsoedvennssteceusicesaeetssnaecandsetessacaee ns 231 Configuring Digital amp Analog VOIPS in Same System 238 Call Completion Summaries in a ea EE A TE EE EEEE REA 246 Variations in PBX CRArACtECristiCs cccccscccccccceesessececececsssssaeceeeceesensseeeeeeeessneaes 249 International Telephony Numbering Plan Resources 250 CHAPTER 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE esseeseoesecssesssccsscescesceescesee 252 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ccsccccssecesececsseceeececsaccesneecsaeceeneecsaeeeneecsaeeesees 253 System Information SCCM ccccesccescesecesecssecnsecsseeseeeseesseeeseeseceseeesecesscnaeenaeenae 253 Statistics Screens occcccccccccccccsessscecececssssseceeceessnsscecececeesesesseeeeececeeseeseeeseceesereaes 256 Abo t Call Progress rerai ne iiaae aeniea aaa aikoi NE aaRS ES ARa eE aias 256 INATA Eo a PE E A E sees ieadasa
95. 00 2 9 6 0 Site E FXS channel 201 200 2 9 7 1 Site A FXS channel 1615 200 2 9 9 0 Gives remote voip XXX Note 2 users access to local XXXX PSTN of Site D Pierre SD area code 615 3xxx 200 2 9 9 0 Allows remote voip users to call all PBX extensions at Site D Note Pierre SD using only four digits 1402 200 2 9 5 0 Gives remote voip users access to local PSTN of Site F Lincoln NE area code 402 140226374 200 2 9 5 0 Gives remote voip Note 1 users access to key Note 3 phone system extensions at Site F Lincoln 197 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Note 1 The x is a wildcard character Note 2 By specifying Channel 0 we instruct the MVP2400 2410 to choose any available data channel to carry the call Note 3 Note that Site F key system has only 30 extensions x7400 7429 This destination pattern 140226374 actually directs calls to 402 263 7430 through 402 263 7499 into the key system as well This means that such calls which belong on the PSTN cannot be completed In some cases this might be inconsequential because an entire exchange fully used or not might have been reserved for the company or it might be unnecessary to reach those numbers However to specify only the 30 lines actually used by the key system the destination pattern 140226374 would have to be replaced by three other destination patterns namely 1402263740 1402263741 and 14022
96. 005 Configuration Advanced Phone Bock Statistics Download Connection inip ANBZOSCHEtS EN 4D Click Add 218 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration 2 The Add Edit Outbound PhoneBook screen appears r Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Phone Number Details I Accept AnyNumber Destination Pattern ce334 Total Digits l 12 Cancel Remove Prefix 00334 Add Prefix E IP Address 200 002 OOS OOF Description Access to Lyon area r Protocol Type eo m H 323 JV Use GateKeeper GatewyH323ID Gateway Prefix es H 323 Port Number 1720 m SIP I Use Proxy Help Advanced Transport Protocol TCR UDP SIP Port Number 5060 SIP URL SPP Use Registrar Port Number fi 0000 Alternate Phone Number J Remote Device is MultolP 110 120 200 400 800 Enter Outbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP unit Note that the Advanced button gives access to the Alternate IP Routing feature if needed Alternate IP Routing can be implemented in a secondary screen as described after the primary screen field definitions below 219 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The fields of the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen are described in the table below Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Y N When checked Any Number Number
97. 1 2 0 6 A 1 2 0 6 A Mains 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Frequencies Power 17 watts 27 watts Consumption Mechanical 1 75 H x 1 75 H x Dimensions 17 4 W x 17 4 W x 8 75 D 8 75 D 4 5cm H x 4 5cm H x 44 2 cm W x 44 2 cm W x 22 2 cm D 22 2 cm D Weight 7 1 lbs 7 5 lbs 3 2 kg 3 4 kg 26 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview Installation at a Glance The basic steps of installing your MultiVOIP network involve unpacking the units connecting the cables and configuring the units using management software MultiVOIP Configuration software and confirming connectivity with another voip site This process results in a fully functional Voice Over IP network Related Documentation The MultiVOIP User Guide the document you are now reading comes in electronic form and is included on your system CD It presents in depth information on the features and functionality of Multi Tech s MultiVOIP Product Family The CD media is produced using Adobe Acrobat for viewing and printing the user guide To view or print your copy of a user guide load Acrobat Reader on your system The Acrobat Reader is included on the MultiVOIP CD and is also a free download from Adobe s Web Site www adobe com prodindex acrobat readstep html This MultiVOIP User Guide is also available on Multi Tech s Web site at http www multitech com Viewing and printing a user guide from the Web also requires that you have the Acrobat Reader loaded
98. 1 E1 Connector T1 E1 Connector 7 l Receive Pair from line 1 2 Transmit Pair to line Voice Fax Channel Connectors Pin Functions E amp M Interface Pin Descr Function 1 M Input 2 E Output 3 TI 4 Wire Output 4 4 Wire Input 2 Wire Input 5 T 4 Wire Input 2 Wire Input 6 R1 4 Wire Output 7 SG Signal Ground Output 8 SB Signal Battery Output 354 MultiVOIP User Guide Cable Pinouts Pin Functions FXS FXO Interface FXS Pin Description FXO Pin Description 2 N C 2 N C 3 Ring 3 Tip 4 Tip 4 Ring 5 N C 5 N C 355 Cable Pinouts MultiVOIP User Guide ISDN BRI RJ 45 Pinout Information The S T interface uses an 8 conductor modular cable terminated with an 8 pin RJ 45 plug An 8 pin RJ 45 jack located on the terminal is used to connect the terminal to the DSL Digital Subscriber Loops using this modular cable The table below shows the Pin Number Terminal Pin Signal Name and Network Pin Signal name for the S T interface Pin TE Signal NT Signal Pin 1 Not used Not used 1 2 Not used C Not used 2 3 Tx Rx 3 4 R Te 4 5 Rx Tx 5 6 T Re 6 7 Not used Not used 7 8 Not used C Not used 8 TE Terminal Equipment NT Network 356 MultiVOIP
99. 1 stats Transmit Line Open E1 stats field dale A E EE 286 Transmit Line Open T1 stats field RELEE ENE AN raed te 282 Transmit Line Short E1 stats field Transmit Slip E1 stats field 286 Transmit Slip T1 stats field 282 Transmit Slip Negative E1 stats field a E 286 Transmit Slip Negative T1 stats field E a ceeacecnt a eaten 282 Transmit Slip Positive E1 stats field EEA EAE 285 Transmit Slip Positive T1 stats field EE E E E 281 triggering log report email 135 Troubleshooting Resolutions for Multi VOIPS 0 0 eeeeseeeeneeseeeeneees J TTL Value SIP Call Signaling field 1 Turn Off Logs field eee 142 Type call statistics logs field 266 392 MultiVOIP User Guide Type H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field ccceseeeseeeseees 291 Type of tone Regional Parameters field aea crak acidemia 127 Type SIP Proxies Statistics Servers Hels cosets delet neeed eset estes 292 Type SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ccccseeeeeereees 293 Type of Service IP header field amp Diff SOV onenen eit errn 71 U interface ISDN BRI description 357 UDP multiplexed H 323 Annex E fielden tieien 113 UDP TCP compared Bl EEE A S 223 IP Statistics context 273 Tl chsstes EET 180 unconditional forwarding BV sszessds AEE AT 229 A A E AEA 187 Uninstall program menu option command sseesseseeeesreerereers 321 Uninstall option description Multi
100. 123 Community Name 1 SNMP field 123 compatibility Fast Start 0 0 109 compatibility H 450 with H 323 not WIth SUP risette 144 Bd E PET 18 T e ara raea aE 10 compression standard Bid E ETT 106 DL R REE AT 98 compression silence cesceeceee 82 Compression Silence RADIUS Attributes oc eeeecseceeseeereeeeee 163 Compression Silence SMTP logs sini E abt Auli 138 configuration of voip local versus remote 50 51 Configuration option description MultiVOIP program menu 297 Configuration Parameter Groups ACCESSING vicec ccscsssaccecsecadersaseeess seve 64 Configuration Port Setup option description MultiVOIP program MENU otee en ee Areas 297 configuration procedure local detatle diss s sesiaitiawietcue ess 60 SUMMAS ainvessteeesecvescaveets es 59 Configuration Version System Info 167 configuration local escesee 53 configuration phonebook E EE dian 215 Thea ota ra iE tase 172 configuration saving eee 168 USED aenea eesi 313 371 Index configuration user default 169 Configuring MultiVOIP phonebooks general Bil fet ied veda oacnieees 209 TE he e annas 171 conflicts COM Portesson eesis 44 Connection Problems Solving 63 Consecutive Packets Lost field 88 Console Message Settings Filters for PEE E E E E E 143 console messages enabling 141 console parameters tracked 143 contactin
101. 26 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 5 Identify Files to be Updated Determine which files you want to update Six types of files can be updated using the FTP feature In some cases the file to be transferred will have Ftp as the part of its filename just before the suffix or extension So for example the file mvptlFtp bin can be transferred to update the bin file firmware residing in the MultiVOIP Similarly the file fxo_loopFtp cas could be transferred to enable use of the FXO Loop Start telephony interface in one of the analog voip units and the file r2_brazilFtp cas could be transferred to enable a particular telephony protocol used in Brazil File Type File Names Description firmware bin file mvptlFtp bin This is the MultiVOIP firmware file Only one file of this type will be in the directory factory defaults fdefFtp cnf This file contains factory default settings for user changeable configuration parameters Only one file of this type will be in the directory CAS file fxo_loopFtp cas em_winkFtp cas 12_brazilFtp cas 12_chinaFtp cas These telephony files are for Channel Associated Signaling The directory contains many CAS files some labeled for specific functionality others for countries or regions where certain attributes are standard Any CAS file used must first be renamed to CASFILE CAS inbound phonebook
102. 27 Regional Parameters fields Country Selection for Built In Modem eesseeckesstisctesetesstane 128 regional parameters setting 124 Register Duration field Registered Gateway Details eee 289 Register with Gatekeeper H 323 Call Signaling field ow eee 109 Registered Gateway Details Statistics screen accessing 289 Registered Gateway Details Statistics function 287 289 Registered Gateway Details screen289 Registered Gateway Details screen fields Description seses 289 IP Addr S Sinnica eain 289 No of Entries seere 289 PO aks eS 289 Register Duration e 289 Stats i nanena isei 289 Registered Gateway Details screen fieldsi iicieed articles E 289 Registrar IP Address field 119 Registrar Options SPP Call Signalining fields 119 Registrar Port field eee 119 Registration Option Parameters Inbound Phone Book BL sii ei ee eee ee 230 TD E E E E 188 remote configuration modem MV P2241 Oaren 37 MV P3010 iien 37 386 MultiVOIP User Guide Remote Configuration Command Modem SEUD FOLK gosse iii eadeni 59 125 remote control configuration web GUI and eee 337 Remote Device is legacy voip Outbound Phonebook TA E EEE sees ete 181 Remote Device is legacy Multi VOIP CHECKBOX rsrsrs 224 remote phonebook configuration 324 remote voip configuration 50 Remote Voip Management 121 Remove Prefix inbound
103. 3 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 421 1 Call Completion Summaries Site A calling Site C Method 1 1 Dial 101 2 Hear dial tone from Site B 3 Dial 7175662 4 Await completion Talk Site A calling Site C Method 2 1 Dial 101 7175662 2 Await completion Talk Note Some analog VOIP gateways will allow completion by Method 2 Others will not Site C calling Site A 1 Dial 7175000 2 Hear dial tone from Site B VOIP 3 Dial 201 4 Await completion Talk 204 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Site D calling Site C 1 Dial 9 15077175662 2 9 gets outside line On some PBXs an 8 may be used to direct calls to the VOIP while 9 directs calls to the PSTN However some PBX units can be programmed to identify the destination patterns of all calls to be directed to the VOIP PBX at Site D is programmed to divert all calls made to the 507 area code and exchange 717 into the VOIP network It would also be possible to divert all calls to all phones in area code 507 into the VOIP network but it may not be desirable to do so The MVP2410 removes the prefix 1507 and adds the prefix 101 for compatibility with the analog MultiVOIP s phonebook scheme The is a delimiter separating the analog VOIP s phone number f
104. 3 mode with proxy in SIP mode or in the client server configuration of SPP mode this field shows the IP address of the server that is directing IP phone traffic Packets sent integer value The number of data packets sent over the IP network in the course of this call Packets received integer value The number of data packets received over the IP network in the course of this call Packets loss integer value The number of voice packets lost from this call that were lost after being received from the IP network Bytes sent integer value The number of bytes of data sent over the IP network in the course of this call Bytes received integer value The number of bytes of data received over the IP network in the course of this call 268 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Details cont d FROM Details Gateway Name alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway string that originated this call IP Address X X X X IP address of the VOIP gateway where x has a from which the call was range of 0 to 255 _ received Options FEC SC Displays VOIP transmission options used by the VOIP gateway originating the call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression TO Details Gateway Name alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway string that com
105. 63742 In this way calls to 402 263 7430 through 402 263 7499 would be properly directed to the PSTN In the Site D outbound phonebook the 30 lines are defined exactly that is without making any adjacent phone numbers unreachable through the voip system 198 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP2410 Digital VOIP Site D Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Bismarck 1507 1507 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to Rochester local PSTN using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Cheyenne 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to Lincoln area local PSTN via FXO channel CH4 of the Site F VOIP 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to extensions 263 thirty of key 740 system at Site F 1402 200 2 9 5 Lincoln Human 263 operator or auto 741 attendant is 1402 200 2 9 5 needed to 263 complete these 742 calls Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 199 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP2410 Digital VOIP Site D Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Numb
106. Auto 150 Here it comes Received 52 bytes in 1 0 secs 528 99 bps transfer succeeded 226 Transfer OK Closing connection Close Cancel Logw nd Help Options About 9 Verify Transfer The files transferred will appear in the directory of the MultiVOIP P ftp voip1 192 168 2 200 Microsoft Internet Explorer voip 192 168 2 200 A al casfile cas factdef cnt H323 pdl myptlftp bin OutPhBk tmr InPhBk tmr 10 Log Out of FTP Session Whether the file transfer was done with a web browser or with an FTP client program you must log out of the FTP session before opening the MultiVOIP Windows GUI 333 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Web Browser Interface F MukivorP rukivOIP 2410 4 00 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edt Vew Favertes Took Hep O O n 12 Al sah Leros E a A Ja Bd Akkas E herp 192 16 41 01 E Popups temporarty alowed To alvarrs akow pop ups from thes ste cikk here Malti VOIP 2410 Web Based Configuration z ay Det f sages a nadia swore ts gt m 7 Vocefar Over P Netsorks ma Heip omg 2e Wirte Bere Meh Tech Syta Ia 2206 TEL PED S 34 PAX DEI WEITE Mirunds Whew MO SSLN USA Tech Sapport 800 9722407 Web cate itp wus b come FTP ste fe dinh ssm Tach Suppert tosppart muian cas eseeseeeeeseeeese 11 12 13 4 1 6 617 W 19 2 21 22 23 24 You can cont
107. Compression enabled the Multi VOIP will not transmit voice packets when silence is detected thereby reducing the amount of network bandwidth that is being used by the voice channel FEC stands for Forward Error Correction Forward Error Correction enables some of the voice packets that were corrupted or lost to be recovered FEC adds an additional 50 overhead to the total network bandwidth consumed by the voice channel Default Off Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide About Logs Accessing Statistics Logs Pulldown Icon Statistics Call Progress Ctrl Alt 4 tad IP Statistics Ctrl P w pere a T1 E1 Statistics Ctrl 1 7 Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt w m t Logs Details Link Management Ctrl 2 ITA Alternate Servers Ctrl Alt 4 gt Shortcut Sidebar El Statistics Call Progress Ctrl 0 IP Statistics Link Management T1JE1 Statistics 264 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The Logs Screen 265 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Details Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Log column 1 or higher All calls are assigned an event number in chronological order with the most recent call having the highest event number Start Date Time column dd mm yyyy hh mm ss The starting time of the call event The date is presented as a day expression of one or two dig
108. Description Default When this button is clicked all Voice FAX parameters are set to their default values Select 1 2 210 Channel to be configured is selected Channel 1 4 410 here 1 8 810 Copy Copies the Voice FAX attributes of Channel one channel to another channel Attributes can be copied to multiple channels or all channels at once Voice Gain Signal amplification or attenuation in dB Input Gain 31dB Modifies audio level entering voice to channel before it is sent over the 31dB network to the remote VOIP The default amp recommended value is 0 dB Output Gain 31dB Modifies audio level being output to to the device attached to the voice 31dB channel The default and recommended value is 0 dB DTMF Parameters DTMF Gain The DTMF Gain Dual Tone Multi Frequency controls the volume level of the DTMF tones sent out for Touch Tone dialing DTMF Gain 3dBto Default value 4 dB Not to be High Tones 31dB amp changed except under supervision of mute MultiTech s Technical Support DTMF Gain 3dBto Default value 7 dB Not to be Low Tones 31dB amp changed except under supervision of mute MultiTech s Technical Support 78 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description DTMF Parameters Duration 60 3000 When DTMF Out of Band is
109. E1 Parameters screen in the Configuration section of the MultiVOIP software 55 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide E1 Telephony Parameters for MVP3010 The following parameters must be known about the PBX or telco central office equipment to which the E1 MultiVOIP will connect E1 Phone Parameters Info needed to operate Ask phone company or MVP3010 PBX maintainer E1 Telephony Parameters 3 Record for this VOIP Site e Which frame format is used Double Frame MultiFrame w CRC4 MultiFrame w CRC4 modified e Which CAS or PRI protocol is used e Clocking Does the PBX or telco switch use internal or external clocking Note that the setting used in the voip unit will be the opposite of the setting used by the telco PBX e Which line coding is used AMI___ or HDB3___ e Pulse shape level most commonly 0 to 40 meters Write down the values for these E1 parameters You will need to enter these values in the T1 E1 Parameters screen in the Configuration section of the MultiVOIP software 56 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SMTP Parameters for email call log reporting required if log reports of VOIP call traffic are to be sent by email Optional SMTP Parameters Preparation Task Ask Mail Server administrator to set up email account with password for the MultiVOIP unit itself Be sure to give a unique identifier to each individual Mult
110. E1 PhoneBook Configuration 4 The Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen appears r Add Edit Inbound Phone Book J Accept AnyNumber Remove Prefix 0044207 Add Prefix 9 7 Channel Number Hunting hd Description Access to Inner London m Call Forward ME kz r Forward Condition I Unconditional J Busy I No Response Forward Destination H323 call Phone or IP address SIP call Phone or IP address or IP address port or Phone IP address port or SIP URL or Ph IP address SPP call Phone or IP address port or Phone IP address port Ring Count fo r Registration Options H323 Register as T E164 Tech Prefix m SPP I H3231D J Register With SPP Registrar SIP J Register With SIP Proxy Enter Inbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP unit The fields of the Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen are described in the table below 227 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Number Y N When checked Any Number appears as the value in the Remove Prefix field The Any Number feature of the Inbound Phone Book does not work when an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used
111. FTP server is actually housed in the MultiVOIP unit and the controller PC which is actually the repository of the info to be transferred uses an FTP client program In this situation we have chosen to call the transfer of files from the PC to the voip downloads Be aware that some FTP client programs may use the opposite terminology i e they may refer to the file transfer as an upload You can download firmware CAS telephony protocols default configuration parameters and phonebook data for the MultiVOIP unit with this FTP functionality These downloads are done over a network not by a local serial port connection Consequently voips at distant locations can be updated from a central control point The phonebook downloading feature greatly reduces the data entry required to establish inbound and outbound phonebooks for the voip units within a system Although each MultiVOIP unit will require some unique phonebook entries most will be common to the entire voip system After the phonebooks for the first few voip units have been compiled phonebooks for additional voips become much simpler you copy the common material by downloading and then do data entry for the few phonebook items that are unique to that particular voip unit or voip site 324 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance To transfer files using the FTP server functionality in the MultiVOIP follow these directions 1 Establish Network Connecti
112. Function Port Number telnet 23 tftp 69 snmp 161 snmp tray 162 gatekeeper registration 1719 H 323 1720 SIP 5060 SysLog 514 359 Appendix C Installation Instructions for MVP428 Upgrade Card 360 MultiVOIP User Guide 8 Channel Analog Expansion Card Installation Instructions for MVP428 Upgrade Card In this procedure you will install an additional circuit board into the MVP410 converting it from a 4 channel voip to an 8 channel voip Summary A Attach four standoffs to main circuit card B Mate the 60 pin connectors male connector on main circuit card female on upgrade card C Attach upgrade card to main circuit card 4 screws Replace main card screws with standoffs here 2 places Add standoffs here ef 2 places Attach upgrade card screws into standoffs 4 places Mate 60 pin connectors Figure D 1 Installation Summary Procedure in Detail 1 Power down and unplug the MVP410 unit 2 Using a Phillips driver remove the blank cover plate at the rear of the MVP410 chassis Save the screws screws on blank cover plate 2 Figure C 2 Removing screws from blank cover plate 361 8 Channel Analog Expansion Card MultiVOIP User Guide 3 Using a Phillips driver remove the three screws that secure the main circuit board and back panel assembly to the chassis NOTE Follow standard ESD precautions to protect the circuit board from static electricity damage
113. GUI C SMTP awaneet ae SysLog Server IP Address p F Treen Port 1514 we Aen a ae TTT naasanaasat Online Statistics Updation Interval 5 Sec The SysLog Server resides in the MultiVOIP unit itself To implement this functionality you will need a SysLog client program sometimes referred to as a daemon SysLog client programs both paid and freeware can be obtained from Kiwi Enterprises among other firms See www kiwisyslog com SysLog client programs essentially give you a means of structuring console messages for convenience and ease of use MultiTech Systems does not endorse any particular SysLog client program SysLog client programs by any qualified provider should suffice for use with MultiVOIP units Kiwi s brief description of their SysLog program indicates the typical scope of such programs Kiwi Syslog Daemon is a freeware Syslog Daemon for the Windows platform It receives logs displays and forwards Syslog messages from hosts such as routers switches Unix hosts and any other syslog enabled device There are many customizable options available 14 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview Supplementary Telephony Services The H 450 standard an addition to H 323 brings to voip telephony more of the premium features found in PSTN and PBX telephony MultiVOIP units offer five of these H 450 features Call Transfer Call Hold Call Waiting Call Name Identification not
114. IP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration The fields of the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen are described in the table below Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Y N When checked Any Number Number appears as the value in the Destination Pattern field The Any Number feature works differently depending on whether or not an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the IP Address in the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Destination Patterns When external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the external routing device used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol The IP Address of the external routing device must be set in the Phone Book Configuration screen 177 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Destination prefixes Defines the beginning of Pattern area code
115. IP User Guide Technical Configuration The Custom Tone Pair Settings fields are described in the table below Custom Tone Pair Settings Definitions Field Name Values Description Tone Pair dial tone busy tone ring tone unobtainable tone survivability tone re order tone TONE PAIR VALUES Identifies the type of telephony signaling tone for which frequencies are being specified About Defaults US telephony values are used as defaults on this screen However since this dialog box is provided to allow custom tone pair settings default values are essentially irrelevant Frequency 1 frequency in Frequency of lower tone of pair Hertz This outbound tone pair enters the MultiVOIP at the input port Frequency 2 frequency in Frequency of higher tone of pair Hertz This outbound tone pair enters the MultiVOIP at the input port Gain 1 gain in dB Amplification factor of lower 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair This figure and mute describes amplification that the setting MultiVOIP applies to outbound tones entering the MultiVOIP at the input port Default 16dB Gain 2 gain in dB Amplification factor of higher 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair This figure and mute describes amplification that the setting MultiVOIP applies to outbound tones entering the MultiVOIP at the input port Default 16dB 131 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide
116. IPaddress Mail Now Port Number C Text HIML Mail Type Subject Cal Logs OIP UNIT 3 ReplyTo Address ftechnician acmetech com Recipient Address Jadmin acmetech com r Mail Criteria Number of Records 500 I Number of Days fi Rights ReadAwrite SMTP Parameters Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable SMTP Y N In order to send log reports by email this box must be checked However to enable SMTP functionality you must also select SMTP in the Logs screen Requires Y N If this checkbox is checked the Authentication MultiVOIP will send Authentication information to the SMTP server The authentication information indicates whether or not the email sender has permission to use the SMTP server Login Name alpha This is the User Name for the numeric per MultiVOIP unit s email account email domain 134 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SMTP Parameters Definitions cont d Recipient Address email address Field Name Values Description Password alpha Login password for MultiVOIP numeric unit s email account Mail Server IP n n n n This is the mail server s IP address Address for n 0 to This mail server must be accessible 255 on the IP network to which the MultiVOIP is connected Port Number 25 25 is a standard port number for SMTP Mail Type tex
117. If Any Number is selected calls received from phone numbers not matching a listed Prefix shown in the Remove Prefix column of the Inbound Phone Book will be admitted into the voip on the channel listed in the Channel Number field Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Prefixes Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination often a local PBX Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination often a local PBX 228 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Channel 1 30 or E1 channel number to which Number Hunting the call will be assigned as it enters the local telephony equipment often a local PBX Hunting directs the call to any available channel Description Describes the facility or geographical location at which the call originated Call Forward Parameters Enable Y N Click the check box to enable the call forwarding feature Forward Uncondit Unconditional When selected Condition Busy all calls received will be No Resp forwarded Busy When selected calls will be forwarded when station is busy No Response When selected calls will be forwarded if called party does not answer after a specified number of rings as specified in Ri
118. N SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information E Advanced E Phone Book E Statistics E Save Setup E Connection E Help Ethemet IP Parameters p Ethernet Parameters id x 802 1p Parameters Frame Type TYPE I z r Priority Call Control VolP Media Others 3 Excellent Effort 7 6 Voice h O Best Effort hd VLAN ID p IP Parameters Gateway Name MultivolP I Enable DHCP IP Address 192 168 41 81 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 ETTE r Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB YolP Media PHB I Enable 0000000000000 00000000008 The primary advantage of the web GUI is remote access for control and configuration The controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit itself must both be connected to the same IP network and their IP addresses must be known Once you ve begun using the web browser GUI you can go back to the MultiVOIP Windows GUI at any time However you must log out of the web browser GUI before using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI 13 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Logging of System Events MultiTech has built SysLog Server functionality into the software of the MultiVOIP units SysLog is a de facto standard for logging events in network communication systems l Logs m Console Message Settings M Enable Console Messages Filters Cancel Logs T Tum Off Logs Help
119. Number of error laden RTP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software RTCP Packets Realtime Transport Control Protocol packets convey control information to assist in the transmission of RTP voice packets RTCP packets are a type or subset of UDP packets Transmit integer Number of RTCP packets transmitted ted value by this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of RTCP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden RTCP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software 275 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide About Link Management The Link Management screen is essentially an automated utility for pinging endpoints on your voip network This utility generates pings of variable sizes at variable intervals and records the response to the pings Accessing Link Management Pulldown Statistics Call Progress Ctrl Alt 4 Logs Ctrl O IP Statistics Ctrl P T1 E1 Statistics Ctrl 1 Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt W Link Management Alternate Servers Ctrl Alt 4
120. OIP PBX Site 2 n Amsterdam 1 11 1 l1 y a MW oricasee Button Co Rotterdam 7 Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site 4 Paris __ Calls at Dutch National Rates France 213 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Similarly the VOIP system allows Wren Clothing employees in London and Amsterdam to call anywhere in France at French national rates it allows Wren Clothing employees in Paris and Amsterdam to call anywhere in the United Kingdom at its national rates Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site London Wren Ste S0 VOIP PBX Amsterdam The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Paris lt Calls at French National Rates _ Calls at UK National Rates we D gt x LAS N x z N I n France Inbound versus Outbound Phonebooks To make the VOIP system transparent to phone users and to allow all possible free and reduced rate calls the VOIP administrator must configure the Outbound and Inbound phone books of each VoIP in the system The Outbound phonebook for a particular VOIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate locally typically in a PBX in a particular facility and reach any of its possible destinations at remote VOIP sites including calls terminating at points beyond the remote VOIP site The Inbound phonebook for a particular VOIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to ori
121. P mode In this mode all voips in system are peers and each has its own static IP address Port Number Values numeric Description When operating in Registrar Client mode this is the port by which the gateway receives all SPP data and control messages from the registrar gateway This ability to receive all data and messages via one port allows the voip to operate behind a firewall with only one port open When operating in Direct mode this is the Port by which peer voips receive data and messages Alternate Phone Number Phone number associated with alternate IP routing numeric Remote Device is legacy voip When checked this MultiVOIP can operate with first generation MultiVOIP units in the same IP network These include MVP 110 120 200 400 800 Y N Advanced button Values N A Description Gives access to secondary screen where an Alternate IP Route can be specified for backup or redundancy of signal paths See discussion on next page For SIP amp H 323 operation only 181 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Clicking on the Advanced button brings up the Alternate Routing secondary screen This feature provides an alternate path for calls if the primary IP network cannot carry the traffic Often in cases of failure call traffic is temporarily diverted into the PSTN However this feature could also be used to divert traffic to a redunda
122. R E 216 a E itch EES 173 Add Outbound Phonebook Entry icon Bl EE E E EE T 216 Ti E E ET 173 Add Prefix inbound field ET brna ara oeae 228 Tid E E E S 186 Add Prefix outbound field BED EES E E 221 Rb S A ET 178 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook field definitions Elainen 228 229 230 a EE EEE E EAEE 186 187 188 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook screen Bod E EAE AA E EA 228 a E E E E E E EEE 186 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook screen fields E1 Accept Any Number 228 Add Prefix 228 Channel Number 229 Description callee location 229 Enable Call Forwarding 229 Forward Condition 0 000 229 Forward Destination 00 230 Registration Option Parameters 230 Remove Prefix cccecccsseeeeee 228 Ring Count 230 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook screen fields T1 Accept Any Number 186 Add Prefieren ank 186 Channel Number 0 186 Description callee location 186 MultiVOIP User Guide Enable Call Forwarding 186 Forward Condition 00 187 Forward Destination 187 Registration Option Parameters 188 Remove Prefix c cccceees 186 Ring Count 188 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook field definitions ETit 220 221 222 223 224 A o EES 177 178 179 180 181 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook fields El Accept Any Numbert 220 Add Prefix ccccccecssecee
123. Services Parameter fields Call Name Identification Enable 749 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Calling Party 0 eeeeeeeeeeee 150 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 150 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Alerting Party c ceseeeeeee 151 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 151 Supplementary Services Parameter fields B sy Party nihi rtrai te 152 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 152 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Connected Party eee 153 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 153 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Caller ID niarainn 154 Supplementary Services Parameters fields Transfer Sequence s sesieeeee 147 Supplementary Services Parameters screen ACCESSING eeeeeeeeeeeee 144 Supplementary Services parameters SCttin 2s her ES 144 Supplementary Services incompatible WILL SIP oaeiae nieis 144 Bl EE A iste 18 Dl vance eh chad guanine 10 support technical eee 346 switch types phone and ISDN PRI Ages Ailesthanurdastelons tea Sashes tees 107 SysLog client E EE E cnn aa 22 390 MultiVOIP User Guide A Aa E E E 14 SysLog client programs availability 340 features amp presentation types 342 SysLog functionality i A A E EEN 22 TA E E E EE 14 SysLog server Bil E EE E EER 22
124. TA models eese 11 Subject email logs field 135 Supplementary Telephony Services Bid AAA A O EE 23 TA EE ENEE 15 Supplementary Services Alerting Party 151 152 153 Call Hold ss enaren esris 145 Call Hold Enable e cee 148 Call Name Identification 145 Call Transfer ceeeeeeeeeeee 145 Call Transfer Enable 147 Call Waiting seeen 145 Call Waiting Enable 0 148 Caller Name Identification Enable eea r oati aE ra iieiea ias 149 Calling Party eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 150 Enable Call Hold eee 148 Enable Call Transfer 147 Enable Call Waiting 148 Enable Caller Name Identification pHa dei Baie eb aids 149 Hold Sequence ou eee 148 Retrieve Sequence eee 148 Select Channel cceeeeeeeees 147 Transfer Sequence 147 Supplementary Services Info logs foksi anaiena 270 Supplementary Services Parameter buttons Copy Channel ee 154 Default sc scscoveesaicitiagesteectens 154 Supplementary Services Parameter Definitions 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Call Waiting Enable 148 Hold Sequence ou eee 148 Retrieve Sequence 148 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Call Hold Enable 148 Index Call Transfer Enable 147 Select Channel cce 147 Supplementary
125. The figure below shows S and T connection points in an ISDN network Point S Tama 4 0 Wires nw ser Telco Pa NT2 4 8 Wires Central l PBX Office i N nn Aono Terminal 2 Wires Point S Point S p E lt N L h Terminal Terminal 357 Appendix B TCP UDP Port Assignments 358 MultiVOIP User Guide Cable Pinouts Well Known Port Numbers The following description of port number assignments for Internet Protocol IP communication is taken from the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA web site WwWw iana org The Well Known Ports are assigned by the IANA and on most systems can only be used by system or root processes or by programs executed by privileged users Ports are used in the TCP RFC793 to name the ends of logical connections which carry long term conversations For the purpose of providing services to unknown callers a service contact port is defined This list specifies the port used by the server process as its contact port The contact port is sometimes called the well known port To the extent possible these same port assignments are used with the UDP RFC768 The range for assigned ports managed by the IANA is 0 1023 Well known port numbers especially pertinent to MultiVOIP operation are listed below Port Number Assignment List Well Known Port Numbers
126. User Guide Cable Pinouts ISDN Interfaces ST and U The MVP410ST and MVP810ST are ISDN BRI voip units that use an S T outlet interface You will need an NT1 device to connect these units to any network equipment that has the U ISDN interface In the UK and in many European countries the telco supplies an NT1 device for ISDN BRI service An ISDN Basic Rate BRI U Loop consists of two conductors from the telco central office to the customer premises The equipment on both sides of the U loop accommodates the extensive length of the U loop and the noisy environment in which it may operate At the customer premises the U loop is terminated by an NT1 network termination 1 device An NT1 device makes an end user s 4 wire terminal equipment compatible with the telco s 2 wire twisted pair ISDN BRI line The NT1 drives an S T bus The S T bus is usually made up of 4 wires but in some cases may be 6 or 8 wires S and T refer to connection points in the ISDN specification When a PBX is present S refers to the connection between the PBX and the terminal Terminal can mean any sort of end user ISDN device data terminals telephones FAX machines voip units etc Point T refers to the connection between the NT1 device and customer supplied equipment Terminals can connect directly to the NT1 device at point T or there may be a PBX private branch exchange i e a customer owned telephone exchange
127. VP3010 can be completely transparent to phone users within the company 249 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide International Telephony Numbering Plan Resources Due to the expansion of telephone number capacity to accommodate pagers fax machines wireless telephony and other new phone technologies numbering plans have been changing worldwide Many new area codes have been established new service categories have been established for example to accommodate GSM personal numbering corporate numbering etc Below we list several web sites that present up to date information on the telephony numbering plans used around the world While we find these to be generally good resources we would note that URLs may change or become nonfunctional and we cannot guarantee the quality of information on these sites URL Description http phonebooth interocitor net wtng The World Telephone Numbering Guide presents excellent international numbering info that is both broad and detailed This includes info on re numbering plans carried out worldwide in recent years to accommodate new technologies http www oftel gov uk numbers number htm UK numbering plan from the Office of Telecommunications the UK telephony authority http www itu int home index html The International Telecommunications Union is an excellent source and authority on international telecom reg
128. X removes 9 and passes 14022637424 to voip 3 Pierre voip passes remaining string 14022637424 on to the Lincoln voip at IP address 200 2 9 5 4 The dialed string matches an inbound phonebook entry at the Lincoln voip namely 1402263742 5 The Lincoln voip rings one of the three FXS ports connected to the Lincoln key phone system 6 The call will be routed to extension 7424 either by a human receptionist operator or to an auto attendant which allows the caller to specify the extension to which they wish to be connected 206 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Site F calling Site D A voip call from a Lincoln key extension to extension 3117 on the PBX in Pierre South Dakota A The required entry in the Lincoln Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 31 The string 1615492 would have to be added as a prefix The call would be directed to the Pierre voip s IP address 200 2 9 9 B The corresponding entry in the Pierre Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 1615492 1 Caller at Lincoln picks up phone receiver presses button on key phone set This button has been assigned to a particular voip channel any one of the three FXS ports 2 The caller at Lincoln hears dial tone from the Lincoln voip 3 The caller at Lincoln dials 3117 4 The Lincoln voip adds the prefix 1615492 and sends the entire dialing string 16154923117 to the
129. a Dacian seiaee es 349 Canadian Limitations Notice ccccccccccccccccssssssceccccccsssseseeccccccsssseccecccessuuseesesess 350 WEEE Statement EEEE 351 APPENDIX A CABLE PINOUTS cccssssscssssscccsssscccsssscccessssccccsscccscssseseees 352 APPENDIX Ac CABLE PINOUTS vevsies amp cosdeccs costa o cued de Seen Sens amp caednc da Cosette og coves eben Meus Se ceseee 353 Command Cable jiccch icine tice ier atin ceeds cuted Bitch a cncted atime oa Masts 353 Ethernet CONNECIOR cress cat A ge ca Ree ha a e a a a aa reias 353 LALJET CONNCCLON EEE E NIAE ca tec Boe eel eat ce etek 354 Voice Fax Channel Connectors u cccceccccccccccccsseseccecccccccusseccececcssassseccecesessanens 354 ISDN BRI RJ 45 Pinout Information ccccecccesc eee ceee ene eeee eee eeceseceeeeseeenseeseenaes 356 ISDN Interfaces ST Gnd U Pirae eidi dust e ia a feast 357 APPENDIX B TCP UDP PORT ASSIGNMENT ccssssscsssssccsssssscesssceeeses 358 WELL KNOWN PORT NUMBERS 00csesesssesesssssssessssscsesesesssesesesesesessseseseseseeeeees 359 PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT LIST cccccscscscscscececececececesecececececeseseseseseseeeeseseeeees 359 APPENDIX C INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MVP428 UPGRADE CARD EAA EET E E E sented ansbuesscbebececsosssescessces 360 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MVP428 UPGRADE CARD ccccccceceeseeeeeeeees 361 ITBI D CEET ITI EAEE TATEN ETATE 366 Chapter 1 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Overview About Th
130. a nr pei 118 SPP Fields Outbound Phonebook BV A OA esti ok 224 A t E E EE E 181 SPP Fields Phonebook Configuration STEEN ieir eiaeaen aie 118 SPP Registrars Statistics Servers IP Adress one an Bed tee sees 293 POL Ais ccavtottiena ences dtl 293 TYPO weevacisssspsctadechastespsveietiteccises 293 SPP Registrarss Statistics Servers StAtUs sescceastiatd ead Aee 293 SPP general description eso ANE ee ee eee eh oe 18 fl eres eerie Tren eres 10 SPP strengths amp compatibilities of darter RO eae eset eeu 18 il ere ee eee eee EA 10 SRV record icac8d hice 73 ST interface ISDN BRI description sssr 357 Start Date Time RADIUS Attributes field cece 161 Start Date Time SMTP logs field E E E teenie 136 Start Date Time statistics logs field E E E 266 Start Now command Link Management button 278 Status H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field ceeeeeseeeeees 291 Status SIP Proxies Statistics Servers field ceeeeesceeees 292 Status SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ceceesseeeees 293 Status statistics logs field 266 Status field Registered Gateway Details jaiero a ec amp tei tet 289 Status Freeze Signalling Active E1 Stats fleld a ccceicseteecehdetshes 285 389 Index Status Freeze Signalling Active T1 Stats field ee cceesteeetteeereees 281 STUN clients and servers 155 STUN support El models cee eeeceeneeeeseeeeeee 19
131. abilities All adhere to the European standard of E1 trunk telephony using digital 30 channel time division multiplexing which allows 30 phone conversations to occur on the E1 line simultaneously All can also accommodate E1 lines of the ISDN Primary Rate Interface type ISDN PRI Figure 1 3 MultiVOIP MVP3010 Chassis Scale ability The MVP3010 is tailored to companies needing more than a few voice over IP lines but not needing carrier class equipment When expansion is needed the MVP3010 can be field upgraded into a dual E1 unit by installing the MVP30 60 kit which is essentially a second MultiVOIP motherboard that fits into an open expansion card slot in the MVP3010 The upgraded dual unit then accommodates two E1 lines E1 VOIP Traffic The MVP3010 accepts its outbound traffic from an E1 trunk that s connected to either a PBX or to a telco carrier The MVP3010 transforms the telephony signals into IP packets for transmission on LANs WANs or the Internet Inbound IP data traffic is converted to telephony data and signaling When connected to PBX When connected to a PBX the MVP3010 creates a network node served by 10 100 Base T connections Local PBX phone extensions gain toll free access to all phone stations directly connected to the VOIP network Phone extensions at any VOIP location also gain local rate access to the entire local public switched telephone network PSTN at every other VOIP location in the system When conne
132. ad Factory Defaults 298 Download Firmware 298 Set Password 298 Uninstall ie esekien 298 Upgrade Software cee 298 Multi VOIP program menu option descriptions cesses 297 298 MultiVOIP software Installing airerik 39 location of files 00 eee eee 42 program icon location 43 uninstalling eee eee 46 321 MultiVOIP software moving around iN ee eee 64 MultiVoipManagert eeee 51 MultiVoipManager software El model s sccscsvscssseesststtessessazs 19 Tl models vcs 8 ities ae 11 musical jingle during call transfer 147 MVP2410 cabling procedure ce 36 unpacking 32 MVP 2410 remote configuration modem 37 MVP3010 cabling procedure e 36 remote configuration modem 37 unpacking 32 Name IP Server field 157 NAT inter operation support El models riisiin 19 Tl modelane nieeenke 11 NAT Traversal screen fields Enables narirsiiirasseuisuss 157 Keep Alive Timers 157 Name IP Server 0 c008 157 PD rte e Arar Aes 157 Port Servet ean orne 157 national rate calls to foreign voip sites Bil EEA EET 213 382 MultiVOIP User Guide Netcoder coders RTP packetization VOICE FAX oenn E 295 network access seeseerererereeeee 123 Network Disconnection field 88 PBX EVISDN ieaiai 103 TIIS DN oretta cate 95 No of Entries field Registe
133. ading to only one VOIP unit at a time With an FTP client program multiple voips can receive FTP file transmissions in response to a single command the transfers may occur serially however Although MultiTech does not provide an FTP client program with the MultiVOIP software or endorse any particular FTP client program we remind our readers that adequate FTP programs are readily available under retail shareware and freeware licenses Read and observe any End User License Agreement carefully Two examples of this are the WSFTP client and the SmartFTP client with the former having an essentially text based interface and the latter having a more graphically oriented interface as of this writing User preferences will vary Examples here show use of both programs 4 Enable FTP Functionality Go to the Ethernet IP Parameters screen and click on the FTP Server Enable box m Ethernet IP Parameters m Ethernet Parameters JV Packet Prioritization 802 1 Frame Type TYPE II X m 802 1p Parameters Priority Call Control 3 Excellent Effort VoIP Media 6 Voice kd Others O Best Effort x VLAN ID i IP Parameters Gateway Name MulivolP I Enable DHCP r Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB 34 VoIP Media PHB 46 IP Mask i d m FTP Server IV Enable Gateway s IP Address a Enable SRV DNS Server IP Address 3
134. ae a S 210 T a ete alee 172 inter operation with phone system El models cccececsceeeeereeeeeee 17 T1 models ececceceesseeeeesreeees 9 IP Address callee statistics logs field ae e O n 269 IP Address caller statistics logs field areren aaa 269 IP Address Ethernet IP Parameters field onenen oe a 69 IP Address H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field 291 IP Address IP Statistics field 273 IP Address outbound phonebook l A EEI EN E EET 221 Tl Ata tatieettcic a het ek 178 IP Address ping target Link Management field 279 IP Address SIP Proxies Statistics Servers field ccesceeseereees 292 IP Address SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ccccsceeseeseees 293 MultiVOIP User Guide IP Address field Registered Gateway Details arinetan aeeie 289 IP Address to Ping Link Management field 278 IP Address From Details RADIUS Attributes field eee 163 IP Address From Details SMTP Joss Held js serete 138 IP address SysLog Server 142 IP Address To Details RADIUS Attributes field eeeee 163 IP Address To Details SMTP logs field oireen 138 IP Call Direction call progress field E TSE 258 IP Call Type call progress field 258 IP datagram and DiffServ 71 IP Direction statistics logs field 266 IP Mask field csi iieiea 69 IP Statistics field IP Address niner 273 TP Statistics field definitions 272 273 274 TP S
135. ail rebooting the MultiVOIP IP 2410 x Downloading User Defaults will Reboot the Multi OIP 2410 Do you want to continue cme Click OK 314 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 5 Progress bars will appear during the file transfer process aooo CARRARA EAARAEAERAEEAAEEA Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 BENE 5 When the file transfer process is complete the Dialog IP Parameters screen will appear Dialog MIP Parameters m Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB Frame Type TYPE II M VoIP Media PHB IP Parameters Tl Enable DHCP IP Address 192 168 3 143 Cancel IP Mask 200 4 200 200 4 0 Gateway 6 Set the IP values per your particular VOIP system Click OK Progress bars will appear as the MultiVOIP reboots itself 315 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Setting a Password Windows GUI After a user name has been designated and a password has been set that password is required to gain access to any functionality of the MultiVOIP software Only one user name and password can be assigned to a voip unit The user name will be required when communicating with the MultiVOIP via the web browser GUI NOTE Record your user name and password in a safe place If the password is lost forgotten or unretrievable the user must contact MultiTech Tech Support i
136. al Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SIP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values amp Description SIP Proxy Parameters Password Values alphanumeric Description Password for proxy server function See User Name description above Re Values numeric in seconds Registration Description This is the timeout interval for Time registration of the MultiVOIP with a SIP proxy server The time interval begins the moment the MultiVOIP gateway registers with the SIP proxy server and ends at the time specified by the user in the Re Registration Time field this field When if registration lapses call traffic routed to from the MultiVOIP through the SIP proxy server will cease However calls in progress will continue to function until they end Proxy Polling integer The interval between the voip Interval 60 300 gateway s successive attempts to connect to and be governed by a higher level SIP proxy server The Primary Proxy is the highest level gatekeeper Alternate Proxy 1 is second Alternate Proxy 2 is the lowest order SIP proxy server TTL Value The SIP proxy Time to Live value As soon as a in seconds MultiVOIP gateway registers with a SIP proxy server allowing the proxy server to control its call traffic a countdown timer begins The TTL Value is the interval of the countdown timer Before the TTL countdown expires the MultiVOIP gateway needs to register
137. apacity of the MVP2410 without adding another chassis These voice over IP products have fax capabilities These models adhere to the North American standard of T1 trunk telephony using digital 24 channel time division multiplexing which allows 24 phone conversations to occur on the T1 line simultaneously They can also accommodate T1 lines of the ISDN Primary Rate Interface type ISDN PRI Figure 1 1 MultiVOIP MVP2410 LEDs Scale ability The MVP2410 is tailored to companies needing more than a few voice over IP lines but not needing carrier class equipment When expansion is needed the MVP2410 can be field upgraded into a dual T1 unit by installing the MVP24 48 kit which is essentially a second MultiVOIP motherboard that fits in an open expansion card slot in the MVP2410 The upgraded dual unit then accommodates two T1 lines T1 VOIP Traffic The MVP2410 accepts its outbound traffic from a T1 trunk that s connected to either a PBX or to a telco carrier The MVP2410 transforms the telephony signals into IP packets for transmission on LANs WANs or the Internet Inbound IP data traffic is converted to telephony data and signaling When connected to PBX When connected to a PBX the MVP2410 creates a network node served by 10 100 Base T connections Local PBX phone extensions gain toll free access to all phone stations directly connected to the VOIP network Phone extensions at any VOIP location also gain toll free access to the entir
138. aracterized by bandwidth reservation per flow 5 Video Traffic characterized by delay lt 100 ms 6 Voice Traffic characterized by delay lt 10 ms 7 Network Control Traffic urgently needed to maintain and support network infrastructure HIGHEST PRIORITY Call Control Priority VoIP Media Priority 0 7 where 0 is lowest priority 0 7 where 0 is lowest priority Sets the priority for signaling packets Sets the priority for media packets Others Priorities VLAN ID 0 7 where 0 is lowest priority 1 4094 Sets the priority for SMTP DNS DHCP and other packet types The 802 1Q IEEE standard allows virtual LANs to be defined within a network This field identifies each virtual LAN by number 68 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description IP Parameter fields Gateway alphanumeric Descriptor of current voip Name unit to distinguish it from other units in system Enable DHCP Y N Dynamic Host disabled by Configuration Protocol is a default method for assigning IP address and other IP parameters to computers on the IP network in a single message with great flexibility IP addresses can be static or temporary depending on the needs of the computer IP Address 4 places 0 255 The unique LAN IP address assigned to the MultiVOIP IP Mask 4 places 0 255 Subnetw
139. ard briefly 2 seconds after going call routing offhook denoting survivable mode redundancy amp of voip unit and re order tone a applies to tone pattern indicating the need for MultiVantage the user to hang up the phone In voip units only some cases the tone pair scheme denoted by a country name may also be used outside of that country The Custom option button assures that any tone pairing scheme worldwide can be accommodated ey xi screen Supervision Tones have been set to default values in Interface Page This message screen appears whenever the Country field is changed It informs the operator that upon change of the Country field value all User Defined Tones will be deleted Standard Tones fields Type column dial tone Type of telephony tone pair for ring tone which frequency gain and busy tone cadence are being presented unobtainable tone fast busy survivability Frequency 1 tone re order tone freq in Hertz Lower frequency of pair Frequency 2 freq in Hertz Higher frequency of pair 127 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Regional Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Standard Tones fields cont d Gain 1 gain in dB Amplification factor of lower 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute This applies to the dial ring busy setting and unobtainable tones that the MultiVOIP
140. arnings seeeeseeeeeereeerereeee 31 Safety Warnings Telecom 31 Save Setup command 168 saving configuration eee 168 E ES ERE AEEA EE S EES 313 Saving the MultiVOIP Configuration a a A Soles Aah eee dhs 168 savings on toll calls Bid g soci test Shenseve inde tees 209 DD E EE A a alee beste 171 scale ability Bl E A EAT 17 A E RE E E EER 9 Select All RADIUS Attributes field a iaraa eir rea a es 161 Select All SMTP logs field 136 Select Attributes RADIUS button E AE E E E EERE ERT 160 Select Channel field eee 78 Select Channel Supplementary Services field eee eeeeeeeeeeee 147 Selected Coder field eee 8l Server Address RADIUS screen field oren a eee er ee 160 Server Details call progress field 261 Server Details RADIUS Attributes I ET KS ME AAE NT 162 Server Details SMTP logs field 138 Server Details statistics logs field RAS AREE E E T 268 Service Records cccceesceeeseeee 73 Set Baud Rate cc cccceesseeeeee 164 Set ISDN Parameters 0 107 Set Log Reporting Method 140 387 Index Set Password program menu option COMMANA 0 eee eect cee eeee tees 316 Set Password web browser GUI command 320 Set Password option description Multi VOIP program menu 298 Set Regional Parameters 124 Set SMTP Parameters 00 133 Set SNMP Parameters 0 00 0 121 Set Supplementary
141. ating in Direct mode this is the Port by which peer voips receive data and messages Alternate Phone Number Phone number associated with alternate IP routing numeric Remote Device is Advanced button Y N Check when system includes 1st generation MultiVOIPs to allow inter operation These include MVP 110 120 200 400 800 MultiVOIP units Values N A Description Gives access to secondary screen where an Alternate IP Route can be specified for backup or redundancy of signal paths See discussion on next page For SIP amp H 323 operation only 224 MultiVOIP User Guide MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Clicking on the Advanced button brings up the Alternate Routing secondary screen This feature provides an alternate path for calls if the primary IP network cannot carry the traffic Often in cases of failure call traffic is temporarily diverted into the PSTN However this feature could also be used to divert traffic to a redundant backup unit in case one voip unit fails The user must specify the IP address of the alternate route for each destination pattern entry in the Outbound Phonebook m Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Phone Number Details Destination Pattern 0334 C Total Digits 42 Remove Prefix 0334 OC Add Prefs IP Address 200 G62 O09 OOF Description Access to Lyon area Alternate Routing Altemat
142. ation 10 Set ISDN Parameters if applicable These parameters are acces sible in the T1 E1 ISDN Parameters screen If your T1 or E1 phone line is a Primary Rate Interface ISDN line enable ISDN PRI and set it for the particular implementation of ISDN that your telco uses The ISDN types supported by the digital MultiVOIP units at press time are listed below organized by country ISDN Parameters VE Terminal County JUSA Operator N_ISDN2 7 C Network Country Australia Belgium Europe Germany HongKong Italy Japan Korea NewZealand Sweden USA 107 Operator AUSTEL_1 BG_ 1 ETSI ECMA_QSIG FT_WN6 RITA FT_WN2 FT_VN3 FT_VN6 DT_1TR6 HK_TEL ETSI NTT KDD KOREAN_OP TEL_NZ SWD_TVKT N_ISDN1 N_ISDN2 ATT_4ESS ATT_5E5 ATT_5E9 ATT_5E10 BELLCORE_PRI NT_DMS100 BT ISDN2 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 11 Set Call Signaling Parameters This dialog box leads to 3 others one for each of the call signaling types supported H 323 SIP and SPP These dialog boxes can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or a sidebar menu Accessing Call Signaling Parameters Pulldown Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H TIfE1s ISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Paramete
143. ative has reset occurred Slips indicate a clocking mismatch or lack of synchronization between T1 E1 devices When slips occur data may be lost or repeated 283 Operation and Maintenance E1 Statistics Screen ed sy Ez e z eee MultiVOIP User Guide E1 Statistics Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Red Alarm Integer tally of The alarm condition declared when a alarms device receives no signal or cannot counted since synchronize to the signal being received A last reset Red Alarm is generated if the incoming data stream has no transitions for 176 consecutive pulse positions Blue Alarm Tally since last Alarm signal consisting of all 1 s including reset framing bit positions which indicates disconnection or failure of attached equipment Loss of Tally since last Loss of data frame synchronization Frame reset Alignment 284 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance E1 Statistics Field Definitions cont d Field Values Description Name Receive Detected alarm indication signal in Timeslot 16 timeslot 16 according to ITU T G 775 Alarm Indicates the incoming time slot 16 Indication contains less than 4 zeros in each of Signal two consecutive time slot 16 multiframe periods Transmit A short exists between the transmit Line Short pair for at least 32 consecutive pulses Tra
144. ator Keep Alive NAT STUN seconds packets to the STUN server to determine whether or not the STUN server is available 157 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 18 Set RADIUS parameters In general RADIUS is concerned with authentication authorization and accounting The MultiVOIP supports the accounting and authentication functions The accounting function is sell suited for billing of voip telephony services In the Attributes secondary screen accessed by clicking on Select Attributes the voip administrator can select the parameters to be tallied by the RADIUS server Accessing RADIUS Parameters Pulldown Icon gt Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 v4 08 C F a Configuration Advanced Phone Book Stal Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl Alt Call Signaling Alt C RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt SFt v Shortcut Sidebar E Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt U Yoice Fax Call Signaling TisE1sISDN SNMP Regional SMTP Logs Traces 158 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Radius IV Enable Accounting IV Enable Authentication Server Address 192 168 2 10 OK Accounting Port 1813 Cance
145. aw ahead 249 Tsetse tinsel ie 207 version numbers software 4 version firmMWware cccceeeeeees 304 VLAN ID Ethernet IP Parameters field raeno ea 68 Voice Coder call progress field 258 Voice coder statistics logs field 267 VOICE delay s es 86 87 Voice Gain field eee eeeeeeeee 78 voice packets recovering lost corrupted 82 voice packets consecutive lost 88 voice packets delayed 86 87 voice packets re assembling 80 voice quality improving 82 voice quality versus delay 87 Voice FAX connector pinott 354 Voice FAX Parameter definitions 87 88 Voice FAX Parameter Definitions 78 79 80 81 82 86 Voice FAX Parameter fields Index AutoCall Offhook Alert 83 84 AutoCall Offhook Alert fields 83 84 Generate Local Dial Tone 84 Offhook Alert Timer 00 85 Out of Band Mode DTMP 78 Phone Number Auto Call Offhook Alert norreno ni 85 Voice FAX Parameter fields Copy Channel eee 78 Default arn eenn 78 DTMF Gain 78 DTMF Gain High Tones 78 DTMF Gain Low Tones 78 DTMF In Out of Band 78 Duration DTMP 006 78 Input Gal iiiter 78 Output G l sirist esiis 78 Select Channel cceeeeeee 78 VOICE Gain o ceeeeeeccceesessesseeeseeeees 78 Voice FAX Parameter fields Fax Enable o
146. ble mode of VOIP unit re order tone a tone pattern indicating the need for the user to hang up the phone and intercept tone a tone that warns an a party that has gone off hook but has not begun dialing within a prescribed time that an automatic emergency or attendant number will be called the automatic call can be used to direct an attendant s attention to a disabled or distressed caller allowing an appropriate response to be made In some cases the tone pair scheme denoted by a country name may also be used outside of that country The Custom option button assures that any tone pairing scheme worldwide can be accommodated Note intercept tone is applicable only when the FXS telephony interface has been chosen in the Interface screen and when the AutoCall OffHook Alert field is set to OffHook Alert in the Voice Fax Parameters screen The time allowed for dialing before the automatic calling process begins is set in the Offhook Alert Timer field of the Voice Fax Parameters screen 126 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Regional Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Country USA Japan UK Name of a country or region that Region Custom uses a certain set of tone pairs for Note dial tone ring tone busy tone and Survivability unobtainable tone fast busy tone indicates a tone survivability tone tone special type of he
147. bout the network LAN WAN Internet etc to which the MultiVOIP will connect Ask your computer network Info needed to operate administrator all MultiVOIP models IP Network Parameters oS J Record for each VOIP Site in System e IP Address e IP Mask e Gateway e Domain Name Server DNS Info e If SIP protocol is used determine whether or not 802 1p Packet Prioritization will be used Write down the values for these IP parameters You will need to enter these values in the IP Parameters screen in the Configuration section of the MultiVOIP software You must have this IP information about every VOIP in the system 54 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration T1 Telephony Parameters for MVP2410 The following parameters must be known about the PBX or telco central office equipment to which the T1 MultiVOIP will connect T1 Phone Parameters Info needed to operate Ask phone company or MvP2410 PBX maintainer T1 Telephony Parameters N Record for this VOIP Site e Which frame format is used ESF__ or D4__ e Which CAS or PRI protocol is used e Clocking Does the PBX or telco switch use internal or external clocking Note that the setting used in the voip unit will be the opposite of the setting used by the telco PBX e Which line coding is used AMI__ or B8ZS__ Write down the values for these T1 parameters You will need to enter these values in the T1
148. call when IP network connectivity with the remote site has been lost MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 9 Set T1 E1 ISDN Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Pulldown Icon Multi oIP Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Yoice Fax Ctrl T Call Signaling 89 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In each field enter the values that fit your particular network m T1 E1 ISDN Parameters I Long Haul Mode J CRC Check Frame Format ESF x F4 A D4 SLCIE CAS Protocol l x E amp M Wink E amp M Wink with Dial Tone FXO Ground Start FXO Loop Start FXS Ground Start FXS Loop Start E amp M Immediate a CAS Protocol E amp M Wink OK Line Build Out fo 7 dB Cancel Supervision Help Pulse Shape Level fo to 40m z 40 to 81m 162 to 200m _ r CallerlD r Calling Number Prefix f Calling Number Suffix F m Flash Hook Detection Time in ms fi oo FXS Options No Response Timer 180 Generation Time in ms foo ISDN Parameters Terminal Network X Country USA Operator N_ISDN2 7 rm C
149. can call its Inbound phonebook describes the dialing sequences that can be used to call that MultiVOIP and how those calls will be directed Of course the phone numbers are not literally listed individually but are instead described by rule Consider two types of calls in the three city system described above 1 calls originating from the Miami office and terminating in the New York Manhattan office and 2 calls originating from the Miami office and terminating in New York City but off the company s premises in an adjacent area code an area code different than the company s office but still a local call from that office e g Staten Island The first type of call requires an entry in the Outbound PhoneBook of the Miami VOIP and a coordinated entry in the Inbound phonebook of the New York VOIP These entries would allow the Miami caller to dial the New York office as if its phones were extensions on the Miami PBX The second type of call similarly requires an entry in the Outbound PhoneBook of the Miami VOIP and a coordinated entry in the Inbound Phonebook of the New York VOIP However these entries will be longer and more complicated Any Miami call to New York City local numbers will be sent through the VOIP system rather than through the regular toll public phone system PSTN But the phonebook entries can be arranged so that the VOIP system is transparent to the Miami user such that even though that Miami user dials
150. cility using numbers in the range 7000 to 7999 Note also that a comma as in the entry 9 443 denotes a delay in dialing A one second delay is commonly used to allow a second dial tone to be generated for calls going outside of the facility s PBX system 193 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Outbound PhoneBook for the Minneapolis VOIP is shown below The third destination pattern 7 facilitates reception of co worker calls using local appearing extensions only In this case the Add Prefix field value for this phonebook entry would be 1410325 200 002 009 007 Baltimore overlay 200 002 009 007 Baltimore Office 194 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Configuring Mixed Digital Analog VOIP Systems Analog MultiVOIP units like the MVP 210 410 810 are compatible with digital MultiVOIP units like the MVP2410 In many cases digital and analog VOIP units will appear in the same telephony IP system In addition to MVP 210 410 810 MultiVOIP units Series II units legacy analog VOIP units Series I units made by MultiTech may be included in the system as well When legacy VOIP units are included the VOIP administrator must handle two styles of phonebooks in the same VOIP network The diagram below shows a small scale system of this kind one digital VOIP the MVP2410 operates with two Series II analog VOIPs an MVP210 and an MVP410 and two Series I legacy VOIPs two MVP200 units
151. click on Save Setup in the sidebar menu to save your configuration You can change your configuration at any time as needed for your system 230 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Remember that the initial MultiVOIP setup must be done locally or via the built in Remote Configuration Command Modem using the MultiVOIP program However after the initial configuration is complete all of the MultiVOIP units in the VOIP system can be configured re configured and updated from one location using the MultiVOIP web GUI software program or the MultiVOIP program in conjunction with the built in modem E1 Phonebook Examples To demonstrate how Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries work in an international VOIP system we will re visit our previous example in greater detail It s an international company with offices in London Paris and Amsterdam In each office a MVP3010 has been connected to the PBX system 3 Sites All E1 Example The VOIP system will have the following features 1 Employees in all cities will be able to call each other over the VOIP system using 4 digit extensions 2 Calls to Outer London and Inner London greater Amsterdam and greater Paris will be accessible to all company offices as local calls 3 Vendors in Guildford Lyon and Rotterdam can be contacted as national calls by all company offices Note that the phonebook entries for Series II analog MultiVOIPs MVP 210 410 810 used i
152. connection When Network is selected it indicates that the MultiVOIP should emulate the central office network side of the digital connection Setting used for MultiVOIP must be opposite to the setting used in the PBX For example if the PBX is set to Terminal then the MultiVOIP must be set to Network 103 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide E1 Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description ISDN Parameters Country see table later Country in which MultiVOIP is this chapter operating with ISDN Operator see table later Indicates phone switch this chapter manufacturer model or refers to telco so as to specify the switching system in question ISDN is implemented somewhat differently in different switches Note on ISDN implementation options Country amp are shown arranged by Operator country in a table below soon options after E1 Parameter Definitions Numbering Details Parameters Calling Party unknown Calling party type is part of Number Type national calling party Number international Information element that is sent network specific on ISDN line The Calling party subscriber number information element abbreviated identifies the origin of a call as received from network Called Party unknown Called Party Number Type and Number Type national Called Party Number Plan are international part of Cal
153. criptor will be sent to the remote callee voip identifying 145 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide the channel over which the call is being originated for example Calling Party Omaha Sales Office Line 2 If that voip channel is dedicated to a certain individual the descriptor could say that as well for example Calling Party Harold Smith in Omaha When the home voip receives a call from any remote voip the home voip sends a status message back to that caller This message confirms that the home voip s phone channel is either busy or ringing or that a connection has been made for example Busy Party Omaha Sales Office Line 2 These messages appear in the Statistics Call Progress screen of the remote voip Note that Supplementary Services parameters are applied on a channel by channel basis However once you have established a set of supplementary parameters for a particular channel you can apply this entire set of parameters to another channel by using the Copy Channel button and its dialog box To copy a set of Supplementary Services parameters to all channels select Copy to All and click Copy p Supplementary Services Parameters Select Channel Channel 1 OK Default Copy Channel Copy Channel 1 Supplementary Services Copy T Copy to All Channels Cancel Jig ss ss E Help mB fs 8 8 on no sf ss sf 8 EnS DES DES ES Ei np ss ss GS GE i T 26 7 27 7 287 23 J 3
154. cs field 270 Call Type SMTP logs field 137 Call Waiting 145 Call Progress Details statistics field urasan 262 Call Progress Details statistics feldinn 262 a EE E E E 23 Du RE EE 15 Call Waiting call progress field 262 Call Waiting Enable 148 Called Party Number Plan Bd EA EEES 104 DAD E EES TT 96 Called Party Number Type BI ERARE 104 SDD R R EE A ET 96 Caller IDs opaa teia e 145 Call Progress Details statistics Helds tsetera tah 262 Caller ID call progress field 262 Caller ID Supplementary Services held sicocki indie Saree th 154 Caller ID Enable Bil sss Aisa ais He Ac ee 105 Dl seas ttt esigal arenes 97 Caller Name Identification Enable 149 Calling Number Prefix Caller ID E1 seed aR ee eis 105 Calling Number Prefix Caller ID T1 Hiei ALAA S 97 Calling Number Suffix Caller ID l A D EPE EEE 105 Calling Number Suffix Caller ID Tl E E A ian 97 Calling Party Supplementary Services 150 Calling Party Number Type Bl E EEE E EEE 104 Tle E A EEE 96 Canadian Class A requirements 349 Canadian Limitations Notice regulatory eseseeeseeeeseeereeeee 350 370 MultiVOIP User Guide CAS Protocol field BW ik tle tase T 101 TES EE EE A tives weenie 93 CAS Protocol downloading 308 CAS vs CCS DS A EEE ees 93 101 CCS vs CAS a E E EE cakes 93 101 CD MultiVOIP w ee eeeeeeeeeeee 27 Channel call progress fi
155. cted to PSTN When the F1 line s connected to the MVP3010 are connected directly to the PSTN the unit becomes a Point of Presence server dedicated to local calls off net 17 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 SIP amp SPP Being H 323 compatible the MVP3010 can place calls to telephone equipment at remote IP network locations that also contain H 323 compatible voice over IP gateways It will interface with H 323 software and H 323 gatekeeper units H 323 specifications also bring to voip telephony many special features common to conventional telephony H 323 features of this kind that have been implemented into the MultiVOIP include Call Hold Call Waiting Call Identification Call Forwarding from the H 450 standard and Call Transfer H 450 2 from H 323 Version 2 The fourth version of the H 323 standard improves system resource usage esp logical port or socket usage by handling call signaling more compactly and allowing use of the low overhead UDP protocol instead of the error correcting TCP protocol where possible The MultiVOIP is also SIP compatible SIP means Session Initiation Protocol However H 450 Supplementary Services features can be used under H 323 only and not under SIP SPP Single Port Protocol is a non standard protocol developed by Multi Tech SPP is not compatible with the Proprietary protocol used in Multi Tech s earlier generation of voip gateways SPP offers advantages in certain situat
156. ction Auto Call 7 OffHook Alert Auto Call OffHook Alert ne IV Generate Local Dial Tone OffHook Alert Timer 10 secs Phone Number en Default m Dynamic Jitter Buffer Minimum Jitter Value eo ms Maximum Jitter Value 300 ms Optimization Factor p m Automatic Disconnection J Jitter Value so ms J Consecutive Packets Lost 20 E Call Duration 180 secs M Network Disconnection 300 secs 76 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Note that Voice FAX parameters are applied on a channel by channel basis However once you have established a set of Voice FAX parameters for a particular channel you can apply this entire set of Voice FAX parameters to another channel by using the Copy Channel button and its dialog box To copy a set of Voice FAX parameters to all channels select Copy to All and click Copy Voice Fax Parameters Select Channel Channel 1 X Ok Cancel Copy Channel Defaut Hep Copy Channel Copy Channel 1 Voice Fax Parameters to I Copy to All c Channels Cancel Copy Hn E Hap Channels Bn sf Hf E Channels Bn ff 8 sf BH sf S EE 77 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Voice FAX Parameters fields are described in the tables below Voice Fax Parameter Definitions Field Name Values
157. d group for ease of use Accessing Packetization Time Pulldown amp MultiVOIP v 04 Shortcut Icon Sidebar none none Configuration Advanced Packetization Time Phone Book Statistics Save Setup Connection Hel 294 MultiVOIP User Guide Packetization Time Screen ketization Time E Statistics ic Save Setup E Connection Help Packetization rates can be set separately for each channel crane el o zl jeo xl feo zl EW fso zl feo zi E feo l eo l eo feo zi o zi Operation amp Maintenance eld The table below presents the ranges and increments for packetization rates Packetization Ranges and Increments Coder Types Range in Kbps default value Increments in Kbps G711 G726 G727 5 120 5 5 G723 30 120 30 30 G729 10 120 10 10 Netcoder 20 120 20 20 295 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Once the packetization rate has been set for one channel it can be copied into other channels Packetization Time Select Channel Packetization Rate J G711 A law 64 Kbps G727 40 16 Kbps x e e Cancel Copy Channel G711 U law 64 Kbps G727 40 24 Kbps Copy Channel Copy Channel 1 Packetization Parameters to T Copy to All Channels Cancel Vv gg ss EES Help g 8 Hf S BH 8 8 8 we HB 8 8 ww He Bg 8 8 wf ff E a E E J 296 MultiVOIP User G
158. d PhoneBook entries are completed click on Save Setup in the sidebar menu to save your configuration You can change your configuration at any time as needed for your system Remember that the initial MultiVOIP setup must be done locally or via the built in Remote Configuration Command Modem using the MultiVOIP program After the initial configuration is complete all of the MultiVOIP units in the VOIP system can be configured re configured and updated from one location using the MultiVOIP web GUI software program or the MultiVOIP program in conjunction with the built in modem 188 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration T1 Phonebook Examples The following example demonstrates how Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries work in a situation of multiple area codes Consider a company with offices in Minneapolis and Baltimore 3 Sites All T1 Example Notice first the area code situation in those two cities Minneapolis s local calling area consists of multiple adjacent area codes Baltimore s local calling area consists of a base area code plus an overlay area code Oe E E a oe i Compan l VOIPIPBX w i Baltimore i Outstate MD i Overlay i 443 I St Paul amp Suburbs 651 Slite SW Suburbs Baltimore 952 410 I I 1 I 1 I 1 I I w Company I VOIP PBX I 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 189 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide An outline of the equipment setup
159. d Phonebook for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 1402 4 Access to Lincoln local PSTN by users at remote VOIP locations via FXO port at Site F 1402 740 0 Gives remote voip users access 263740 to extension of key phone 1402 741 0 system at Site F Lincoln 263741 Because call is completed at key 1402 742 0 system abbreviated dialing 4 263742 digits is not workable Human operator or auto attendant is needed to complete these calls 202 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A 1507 1507 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Rochester area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to Lincoln area PSTN via FXO channel CH4 of the Site F VOIP 7 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to Lincoln 263 key extensions with four digits 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre area PSTN via Site D PBX 31 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre PBX 492 extensions with four digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 20
160. e voip unit in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Alerting Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field of the Supplementary Services screen When channel 2 of the Omaha voip receives a call from any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Alerting Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will be sent back and will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip This confirms to the Denver voip that the phone is ringing in Omaha 151 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Busy Party If the home voip unit is receiving a Allowed call directed toward an already Name Type engaged channel or phone station and CNI Busy Party is selected then the identifier from the Caller Id field will tell the originating remote voip unit that the channel or called party is busy This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is receiving the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip unit in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Busy Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been en
161. e Multiplexing calls can be carried on a single Mux port rather than opening a separate signaling port for each call This conserves bandwidth resources H 245 Values Y N Tunneling Description H 245 messages are Tun encapsulated within the Q 931 call signaling channel Among other things the H 245 messages let the two endpoints tell each other what their technical capabilities are and determine who during the call will be the client and who the server Tunneling is the process of transmitting these H 245 messages through the Q 931 channel The same TCP IP socket or logical port already being used for the Call Signaling Channel is then also used by the H 245 Control Channel This encapsulation reduces the number of logical ports sockets needed and reduces call setup time 112 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 Version 4 Parameters Parallel H 245 Values Y N FS Tun Description FS Fast Start or Fast Connect is a Q 931 feature of H 323v2 to hasten call setup as well as pre opening the media channel before the CONNECT message is sent This pre opening is a requirement for certain billing activities Under Parallel H 245 FS Tun this Fast Connect feature can operate simultaneously with H 245 Tunneling see description above Annex E AE Values Y N Description M
162. e IP Address S OK Round Trip Delay Cancel 225 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Alternate Routing Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Alternate nnn Alternate destination for outbound data traffic IP where in case of excessive delay in data transmission Address n 0 255 Round milliseconds The Round Trip Delay is the criterion for Trip judging when a data pathway is considered Delay blocked When the delay exceeds the threshold specified here the data stream will be diverted to the alternate destination specified as the Alternate IP Address 3 Select Inbound PhoneBook List Entries Multi oIP Multi OIP v6 08 CP Firmware Jul 22 2005 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help AHSBSSESBRESB Configuration E Advanced E Phone Book E Outbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Inbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry E Statistics Save Setup E Connection Help p Inbound Phone Book 0044207 f Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Mab blame Number of Entries 11 p Details ChannelNo 1 Description Calls to Inner London r Registration Options m H323 Register as E 164 Tech Prefix H323 1D SIP Register With SIP Proxy SPP Register With SPP Registrar 226 MultiVOIP User Guide
163. e VoIP will only accept files of this name This is a safety precaution to prevent the wrong files from being uploaded to the VoIP Once the primer file has been uploaded upload the FTP firmware file If you accepted the defaults during the software loading process this file is located on your local drive at C Program Files Multi Tech Systems MultiVOIP 4 08 where the X is the software number and the 08 is the version number of the MultiVOIP software on your local drive Of course the firmware file is named mvptlftp bin Important You cannot go back to 4 04 or earlier versions using FTP You must use upgradesoftware via the serial port Important These ftp upgrade instructions do not apply to software release 4 05 and above 323 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide FTP Server File Transfers Downloads MultiTech has built an FTP server into the MultiVOIP unit Therefore file transfers from the controller PC to the voip unit can be done using an FTP client program or even using a browser e g Internet Explorer Netscape or FireFox used in conjunction with Windows Explorer The terminology of downloads and uploads gets a bit confusing in this context File transfers from a client to a server are typically considered uploads File transfers from a large repository of data to machines with less data capacity are considered downloads In this case these metaphors are contradictory the
164. e installation 39 Product CD El models niaren 19 TV AMOUEISs naese 11 product family 8 Program Menu itemsS 06 297 Protocol Type outbound phonebook Bd ERR EE SAES 221 TD E RE RTA 178 Proxy Domain Name IP Address field aea neraet 115 Proxy Polling Interval SIP Call Signaling field ot eee 116 Proxy NAT Device Parameters Public IP Address esses 120 PSTN failover feature Alternate Routing and 183 El models soiin narenn 18 TI models 3 4 6e0 eet sae ee 10 Pulse Density Violation T1 stats fielde aaraa iiai 282 Pulse Shape Level field Bl E E E 105 Tl 6s ae ea a E EA 97 Q 931 Port Number outbound phonebook field Wiest arent aie 179 quality of service E EAEE ania ant 18 The siscck nei ata ade 10 rack mounting QLOUNCING 0 eee eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 SALEty naine a eis 31 34 rack mounting instructions 33 rack mounting procedure 35 rack equipment weight capacity Of eeeeee 34 rack mountable voip models 31 RADIUS accounting parameters CUStOMIZING ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 163 385 Index RADIUS Accounting parameters CUStOMIZING nosses 161 RADIUS accounting support EI models cccecceesseeeeeereeeeeeee 19 TI models onteien 11 RADIUS screen field Enable Accounting 160 Retransmission Interval 160 RADIUS screen fields Accounting Port sses 160 Server Address
165. e last Loss of data frame synchronization Frame reset Alignment Excessive Tally since last Displayed value will increment if Zeroes reset consecutive zeroes beyond a set threshold are detected I e tally increments if more than 7 consecutive zeroes in the received data stream are detected under B8ZS line coding or if 15 consecutive zeroes are detected under AMI line coding Status Signaling has been frozen at the most Freeze recent values due to loss of frame Signaling alignment loss of multiframe Active alignment or due to a receive slip Line Line loopback deactivation signal has Loopback been detected in the receive bit stream Deactivation Signal Transmit A short exists between the transmit pair for Line Short at least 32 consecutive pulses Transmit For use by MTS Technical Support Data personnel Overflow Transmit The frequency of the transmit clock is less Slip Positive than the frequency of the transmit system interface working clock A frame is repeated 281 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide T1 Statistics Field Definitions cont d Field Values Description Name Yellow Tally since last The alarm signal sent by a remote T1 E1 Alarm reset device to indicate that it sees no receive signal or cannot synchronize on the receive signal Frame To be supplied Search Restart Flag Loss of Tally since last In D4 or ESF mode displayed value will MultiFrame rese
166. e local public switched telephone network PSTN at every other VOIP location in the system When connected to PSTN When the T1 line s connected to the MVP2410 are connected directly to the PSTN the unit becomes a Point of Presence server dedicated to local calls off net Overview MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 SIP amp SPP Being H 323 compatible the MVP2410 can place calls to telephone equipment at remote IP network locations that also contain H 323 compatible voice over IP gateways It will interface with H 323 software and H 323 gatekeeper units H 323 specifications also bring to voip telephony many special features common to conventional telephony H 323 features of this kind that have been implemented into the MultiVOIP include Call Hold Call Waiting Call Name Identification Call Forwarding from the H 450 standard and Call Transfer H 450 2 from H 323 Version 2 The fourth version of the H 323 standard improves system resource usage esp logical port or socket usage by handling call signaling more compactly and allowing use of the low overhead UDP protocol instead of the error correcting TCP protocol where possible The MultiVOIP is also SIP compatible SIP means Session Initiation Protocol However H 450 Supplementary Services features can be used under H 323 only and not under SIP SPP Single Port Protocol is a non standard protocol developed by Multi Tech SPP is not compatible with the Proprietary protoc
167. e number 0015 17 02 02 System4 Notice 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0014 17 02 01 System1 Critical 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0013 17 02 00 User Warning 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0012 17 01 59 System2 Info 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0011 17 01 58 Local6 Critical 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0010 17 01 57 Local4 Emerg 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0009 17 01 56 UUCP Debug 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0008 17 01 55 Local4 Info 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0007 17 01 54 User Error 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0006 17 01 53 Local3 Notice 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0005 17 01 52 Kernel Info 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0004 17 01 51 News Info 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0003 17 11 50 Guctem Critical 1277001 This ic Guclan tect meceane number NNN 100 61MPH 17 02 09 18 2002 342 Chapter 9 Warranty Service and Tech Support 343 Warranty Service amp Tech Support MultiVOIP User Guide Limited Warranty Multi Tech Systems Inc MTS warrants that its products will be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of two years from the date of purchase or if proof of purchase is not provided two years from date of shipment MTS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
168. ector 354 Voice FAX connector 354 Polling Interval SPP Call Signaling Heee tee ttre tee 119 pop ups allowing with Web GUI 74 pop ups and Web GUL 334 Port H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field cecseeeseereees 291 Port SIP Proxies Statistics Servers feldene rere a 292 Port SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ccceesceeseeereees 293 Port SPP General Options field 118 Port field Registered Gateway Details eniin ania 289 Port field SysLog Server 142 Port Number proxy server field 115 Port Number SMTP field 135 port number SNMP field 123 Port Number field SPP Outbound Phonebook Bl E Bip eieiednvieie Bids 224 liens sascha Save Re ine 181 power consumption El models jaiciaiscc otis ietecees 26 power frequency El mod liser onteni 26 Prefix Matched call progress field HBG eurae i aa eE ees REEE 261 Prefix Matched RADIUS Attributes field nct sis sister aceuaisaaie 162 Prefix Matched SMTP logs field 137 prerequisites for technical configuration 53 PRI ISDN implementations 107 MultiVOIP User Guide Primary Proxy SIP Call Signaling field ioc ic wie e 115 Primary Registrar SPP Call Signaling field ow eee 119 Priority H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field 291 Priority Levels 802 1p 67 68 PLOdUCE CD seserinis 27 use in softwar
169. ed this value determines when the FXS interface sends the connection notice 94 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration T1 Parameter Definitions contd Field Name Values Description Para FXS Ground Start Supervision meters Tone Detection Enable Y N After a specified tone chosen from the Available Tones list coming from the PBX is stopped the FXS interface will send the connect signal to the calling party Available Tones List Busy Tone Dial Tone Reorder Tone Survivability Dial Tone Unobtainable Tone List from which tones can be chosen to signal call answer Answer Tones Busy Tone Dial Currently chosen call answer List Tone Reorder Tone supervision tone Survivability Dial Tone Unobtainable Tone ISDN Parameters Field Name Values Description Enable Y N If digital connection is ISDN ISDN PRI PRI type this box should be checked When ISDN is enabled the CAS Protocols field is grayed out ISDN has its own signaling method Terminal either When Terminal is selected it Network Terminal or indicates that the MultiVOIP should Network emulate the subscriber terminal side of the digital connection When Network is selected it indicates that the MultiVOIP should emulate the central office network side of the digital connection Setting used for MultiVOIP must be opposi
170. eeeeeees 258 Duration ccccceeessseceeeeees 258 Mod rna 258 Voice Coder ccceceecceesseceeeee 258 IP Call Type eee 258 IP Call Direction 258 Packets Sent ccecceeeeeees 259 Packets Received 00 259 Bytes Sent scscsecsssiscsoveocacseses 259 Bytes Received eee 259 Packets Lost ceecceeeeeeees 259 Outbound Digits Sent 261 Outbound Digits Received 261 Prefix Matched c0000 261 Server Details eeeee 261 DTMF Capability 261 Call On Hold cece 262 Call Waiting 262 Caller ID inince eana 262 Call Status c cece 263 Call Control Status 263 Silence Compression 263 Forward Error Correction 263 Gateway Name from and to 260 IP Address from and to 260 Options from and to 260 Gateway Name from 260 IP Address from cccccccesseceee 260 Options fFOM eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 260 Gateway Name too 260 IP Address to ceecceeessseeeseteeeees 260 Options t0 oes eseeeeeteeeeeneeeees 260 Call Status call progress field 263 Call Status RADIUS Attributes field E TA ETATEN 162 Call Status SMTP logs field 137 Call Transferases asue 145 Earne ae S AEN 23 TDD E Shanes pana EET 15 Call Transfer Enable 0 147 Call Transfer music jingle during hold EE O E verticep tats haere As 147 Call Transferred To logs statisti
171. eeneeeseenaes 313 Setting a Password Windows GUI 0 sscsscceseeeseesseesseeseesseeeeeeeeceeceeeeseenaeenseents 316 Setting a Password Web Browser GUI ccsccsscesseesseesseeseeeseeeeceeeceseceseenssenseaes 320 MultiVOIP User Guide Contents Un Installing the MultiVOIP Software 0 1 ccsccescsseesseeseeeseesseeeeeseeeseeeneeneenas 321 Up Srading SOfWATE ei ie oea E iE REE E a EEE EE E S 323 FTP SERVER FILE TRANSFERS DOWNLOADS c cscceesssceceesececssceecessneeeeseaeees 324 WEB BROWSER INTERFACE sssssesssesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesssessseseseseseesseseseseeeesns 334 SYSLOG SERVER FUNCTIONS orense se E SEE er S a E Ea eE E EEE e kei S EnS 340 CHAPTER 9 WARRANTY SERVICE AND TECH SUPPORT 00008 343 LIMITED WARRANTY oaan ar E E E E EE E EEEE ERE EEE 344 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR U S AND CANADIAN CUSTOMERS ccccccceceeeeseeeseseees 344 TECHNICAE SUPPORT vicecpsecececccsviesey cesaceteek coesas sovee cece cons donsvacccecnweasupteveccusesoedepaeoeee 346 Contacting Technical Support 1 1cecccscesecesecsseeneeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeecesecnsecaecaeenaeees 346 CHAPTER 10 REGULATORY INFORMATION ccccssssscscssssccsssscccssecees 347 EMC Safety and R amp TTE Directive Compliance cc scccescceesseceseceeneceseeeeneees 348 FCC DECLARATION mesran vecbeoccecea cick venseoes a a a aa i 348 Industry CONG sennie nen e e E EA Beste Sas a EN assets 349 ECC Part OS TELECOM ser aa a a e N a
172. eld 258 channel capacity s es 8 Bil oki EEE EE 17 TIe i a n a a 9 Channel Numter inbound field BY EERE 229 A N EEE EA EET 186 Channel Number RADIUS Attributes field eee 161 Channel Number SMTP logs field PARE T 136 channel tracing on off logging 143 Clear IP Statistics button 273 Clear command Link Management DUTON aa 278 Client Options fields 119 Clocking field Bl e E A AEE ak 105 Tl ar ea r ESR RRS 97 coder bandwidth max eee 81 GIN 8 icon eset 8l G T23 sie ee eens 8l G TOn RE Hees ee 8l GT eie E N ENR R 8l G72 EE EEEE 8l Net Coder noranta 8l Coder RADIUS Attributes field 162 Coder SMTP logs field 137 Coder field erccnenisieinens r 8l coder options packetization rates and 294 Coder Parameters field group 8l coder types voice fax RTP packetization s es 295 COM port conflict resOlVing eceeeecees 63 ETOT MESSAGE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 63 on command PC sessen 44 MultiVOIP User Guide COM port allocation eee 164 COM port assignments 164 COM port conflict ETOT MESSAGE 0 ee eeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeee 44 COM Port Setup screen 44 63 command cable pinout 353 command modem and Regional Parameters screen 59 125 Command Modem SCtUP FOF eee ipata 59 125 command PC COM port assignment detailed 44 community voip defined
173. eper to control its call traffic a countdown timer begins The RAS TTL Value is the interval of the countdown timer Before the TTL countdown expires the MultiVOIP gateway needs to register with the gatekeeper in order to maintain the connection If the MultiVOIP does not register before the TTL interval expires the MultiVOIP gateway s registration with the gatekeeper will expire and the gatekeeper will no longer permit call traffic to or from that gateway Calls in progress will continue to function even if the gateway becomes de registered Gatekeeper integer The interval between the voip Discovery 60 300 gateway s successive attempts Polling to connect to and be governed Interval by a higher level gatekeeper The Primary GK is the highest level gatekeeper Alternate GK1 is second Alternate GK2 is the lowest order gatekeeper Use Online When selected voip will seek an alternate Alternate gatekeeper when none of the 3 gatekeepers Gatekeeper shown on this screen are available from a List list The list will reside on the Primary Y N gatekeeper or one of the Alternate gatekeepers The gatekeeper holding the list would download that list onto the voip gateways within the system 111 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 Version 4 Parameters H 323 Y N Signaling for multiple phon
174. er 1615 9 0 Allows phone users at remote Note 4 voip sites to call non toll Note 5 numbers within the Site D area code 615 Pierre SD over the VOIP network 1615 31 0 Allows voip calls directly to 49231 employees at Site D at extensions x3101 to x3199 Note 4 9 gives PBX station users access to outside line Note 5 The comma represents a one second pause the time required for the user to receive a dial tone on the outside line PSTN The comma is only allowed in the Inbound phonebook 200 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Bismarck 1507 1507 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Rochester area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Rochester 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Cheyenne 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre area PSTN via Site D PBX 31 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre PBX 492 extensions with four digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 201 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inboun
175. er Guide Overview supports inter operation with RADIUS servers for the RADIUS accounting function but not the RADIUS authentication function STUN Support The STUN protocol Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs Network Address Translation assists with the packet routing functions of devices behind NAT firewalls or routers The MultiVOIP supports inter operation with STUN servers and NATs SIP based environment only Gatekeeper E1 voip systems can have gatekeeper functionality by adding as an endpoint a Multi Tech standalone gatekeeper special software residing in separate hardware Gatekeepers are optional but useful within voip systems The gatekeeper acts as the clearinghouse for all calls within its zone MultiTech s stand alone gatekeeper software performs all of the standard gatekeepers functions address translation admission control bandwidth control and zone management and also supports many valuable optional functions call control signaling call authorization and bandwidth management Management Configuration and system management can be done locally with the MultiVOIP configuration software After an IP address has been assigned locally other configuration can be done remotely using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI Remote system management can be done with the MultiVoipManager SNMP software or via the MultiVOIP web browser GUI All of these control software packages are included on the Product CD 19 O
176. er or callee is identified by a SIP url sip user_name host_name The format of a sip url is very similar to an email address except that the sip prefix is used 223 E1 Phonebook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Def ns cont d Field Name Values Description SPP Fields Use Registrar Values Y N Description Select this checkbox to use registrar when voip system is operating in the Registrar Client SPP mode In this mode one voip the registrar as set in Phonebook Configuration screen has a static IP address and all other voips clients point to the registar s IP address as functionally their own However if your voip system overall is operating in Registrar Client mode but you want to make an exception and use Direct mode for the destination pattern of this particular Add Edit Phonebook entry leave this checkbox unselected Leave this checkbox unselected if your overall voip system is operating in the Direct SPP mode In this mode all voips in system are peers and each has its own static IP address Port Number Values numeric Description When operating in Registrar Client mode this is the port by which the gateway receives all SPP data and control messages from the registrar gateway This ability to receive all data and messages via one port allows the voip to operate behind a firewall with only one port open When oper
177. eration and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide MultiVOIP Program Menu cont d Menu Selection Description Download CAS Protocol The CAS protocol code allows the VOIP to interact properly with the PBX or central office switch that it serves The need to download CAS protocols arises for only a small minority of VOIP users and only when PBX switch is found to be incompatible with standard protocols Download Factory Defaults Select this to return the configuration parameters to the original factory values Download Firmware Select this to download new versions of firmware as enhancements become available Download User Defaults To be used after a full set of parameter values values specified by the user have been saved using Save Setup This command loads the saved user defaults into the MultiVOIP Set Password Select this to create a password for access to the MultiVOIP software programs Program group commands Windows GUI web browser GUI amp FTP server Only the FTP Server function requires a password for access The FTP Server function also requires that a username be established along with the password Uninstall Upgrade Software Select this to uninstall the MultiVOIP software most but not all components are removed from computer when this command is invoked Loads firmware including H 323 stack and settings from the controller PC to the MultiVOIP uni
178. ere x and y represent MultiVOIP model numbers and software version numbers 8B2 In the FTP client program window drag and drop files from the local browser pane to the pane for the MultiVOIP FTP server FTP client GUI operations vary In some cases you can choose between immediate and queued transfer In some cases there may be automated capabilities to transfer to multiple destinations with a single command SmartFTP 1 0 Build 969 ETP Commands View Tools Favorites Window Help ELI Merika AEE EEM Address 9 192 168 2 200 Login voip Password Port 21 192 168 2 200 Mie x E Local Brows 192 168 2 200 Name a myptt ftp bin fdefftp cnf a fxo_ground cas p 38 fxs_groi a fxs_groundFtp a fxs_loop cas a fxs_loopFtp cas h323 pdl 58 192 168 2 200 332 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Some FTP client programs are more graphically oriented see previous screen while others like the WS FTP client are more text oriented WS FTP LE 192 168 2 200 olx m Local System Remote Site Jc Progran Files Multi F 7 C Name Date t casfile cas factdef cnf H323 pdl nvptiftp bin r2_argentina r2_argent inaa r2_argent inaF r2_brazil cas r2_brazilani r2_brazilaniF r2_brazilFtp Refresh r2_china cas xj b C ASCII Binary T
179. es window the fifth Call Forwarding appears in the Add Edit Inbound phonebook screen Note that the first three features are closely related All of these H 450 features are supported for H 323 operation only they are not supported for SIP or SPP E1 Front Panel LEDs Because the MVP3010 and MVP30 60 both use a common main circuit card or motherboard the LED indicators are the same for both Figure 1 4 MVP3010 LEDs Active LEDs The MVP3010 front panel has two sets of identical LEDs In the MVP3010 as shipped that is without an expansion card the left hand set of LEDs is functional whereas the right hand set is not When the MVP3010 has been upgraded with an MVP30 60 kit the right hand set of LEDs will also become active 23 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide E1 LED Descriptions MVP3010 Front Panel LED Definitions LED NAME DESCRIPTION Power Indicates presence of power Boot After power up the Boot LED will be on for about 10 seconds while the MVP3010 is booting FDX Full Duplex amp Collision LED This LED indicates whether the Ethernet connection is half duplex or full duplex FDX and in half duplex mode indicates occurrence of data collisions LED is on constantly for full duplex mode LED is off constantly for half duplex mode When operating in half duplex mode the LED will flash during data collisions LNK Link Activity LED This LED is lit if Ethernet connec
180. es presence of power Boot After power up the Boot LED will be on for about 10 seconds while the MVP2410 is booting FDX Full Duplex amp Collision LED This LED indicates whether the Ethernet connection is half duplex or full duplex FDX and in half duplex mode indicates occurrence of data collisions LED is on constantly for full duplex mode LED is off constantly for half duplex mode When operating in half duplex mode the LED will flash during data collisions LNK Link Activity LED This LED is lit if Ethernet connection has been made Itis off when the link is down i e when no Ethernet connection exists While link is up this LED will flash off to indicate data activity T1 When lit indicates presence of T1 connection E1 E1 Not supported PRI PRI On if T1 line is of ISDN Primary Rate type ONL Online This LED is on when frame synchroni zation has been established on the T1 E1 link IC IC LED is on when Internal Clocking is selected in T1 E1 configuration LC Indicates Loss of Carrier LS Indicates Loss of Signal Test For testing purposes only 16 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview Introduction to El MultiVOIPs MVP3010 amp MVP30 60 We proudly present MultiTech s E1 Digital Multi VOIP products The MVP3010 is a rack mount model and the MVP30 60 is an add on expansion card that doubles the capacity of the MVP3010 without adding another chassis All of these voice over IP products have fax cap
181. es will be delivered to the MultiVoipManager application program SMTP Y N Log messages will be sent to user specified email address SysLog Server Y N This box must be checked if logging is to be Enable done in conjunction with a SysLog Server program For more on SysLog Server see Operation amp Maintenance chapter IP Address n n n n IP address of computer connected to voip for n network on which SysLog Server program is 0 255 running Port 514 Logical port for SysLog Server 514 is commonly used Online Statistics integer Set the interval in seconds at which Updation logging information will be updated Interval 142 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration To customize console messages by category and or by channel click on Filters and use the Console Messages Filters Settings screen ee 1 Console Message Settings IV Enable Console Messages Filters Console Messages Filter Settings Trace Off for Functions Functions Alternate Routing Common Printfs DIFFSERY DSP FTP H 323 H450 HUNTING IGK LOGS Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 7 Channel 9 Channel 10 143 Cancel Trace On for Functions Cancel OK Baer SYSLOG T 38 WEB Trace On for Channels Channel 6 Channel 8 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 16 Set Supplementary Services Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown
182. esults of using two programs to control a single VOIP simultaneously would be unpredictable 52 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Local Configuration This manual primarily describes local configuration with the Windows GUI After IP addresses have been set locally using the Windows GUI most aspects of configuration logging functions are an exception can be handled through the web browser GUI as well see the Operation and Maintenance chapter of this manual In most aspects of configuration the Windows GUI and web browser GUI differ only graphically not functionally For information on SNMP remote configuration and management see the MultiVoipManager documentation Pre Requisites To complete the configuration of the SS MultiVOIP unit you must know several things about the overall system Before configuring your MultiVOIP Gateway unit you must know the values for several IP and telephone parameters that describe the IP network system and telephony system PBX or telco central office equipment with which the digital MultiVOIP will interact If you plan to receive log reports on phone traffic by email SMTP you must arrange to have an email address assigned to the VOIP unit on the email server on your IP network A summary of this configuration information appears on page 58 Config Info CheckList 53 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide IP Parameters The following parameters must be known a
183. et IP Parameters field ccceceee 73 technical configuration prerequisites tO ee eee 53 SUMIMALY ss scess ceed e niae Eia 50 technical configuration procedure detailed imensi senor 60 SUMMALY oiiaee e i iii ia 59 technical support cee eeeeeees 346 telco authorities and ISDN 107 telecom safety warnings 31 telephony signaling cadences 124 telephony signaling tones 124 telephony toning schemes 130 temperature Operating oei 34 Terminal Network field BISDN eieiei esns 103 TIIS DN rs earo enie nee 95 PBX timeout interval voips under H 323 gatekeeper 111 voips under SIP proxy server 116 Timer Interval between Pings Link Management field 278 To gateway statistics logs field 266 toll call savings i E E E OA 209 TD eves EO A 171 toll free access T1 to remote PSTN cceccceeseeeees 9 within voip network seese 9 toll free access within voip network Ell chek ehettesdh ots Manta 17 TD E este eetis ee eA 9 Tone Detection FXO answer supervision criteria E1 field 103 Tone Detection FXO answer supervision criteria T1 field 95 Tone Pair custom field 131 tones Signaling eeeeseeeeeeee 124 Total Digits outbound field A ERE EE EE E es 221 A A EAS 178 Index trace on off logging eee 143 Transfer Sequence 145 147 Transmit Data Overflow E
184. evsssesscasiveateevesvsobepasvaceencvesseesiseccbesesusosesasvesvaees 31 SAfEtY Warnings TeleCOM ciiccsss sascscevesvssicasevescveceoniesusesueduateveassasesue SE EE En 31 UNPACKING YOUR MULTIVOIP cc cc ccccccc cece cececececececeeesececeseceeeseseseseseseeseesseseeeaes 32 Unpacking the MVP24 10 3010 ccccccesccesceescesscesecnsecusecasecaeecasecaeesseenseeseeeneensees 32 RACK MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS cccccccscscscscececececececececesececesecesesesesssseesseseseeeseaes 33 Safety Recommendations for Rack Installations cesccscessssesecesensesecneeeeenseeeeees 34 19 Inch Rack Enclosure Mounting Procedure 35 CABLING ETE EAEE EA rc atk cas Bec recta nace cos poten ce hc nay tea bo a Mus oa cea Leap ob tote Sooty 36 Cabling Procedures osinean reat EEEE EE Deda tees ives E E E EA 36 CHAPTER 4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION cccsssscscssssecesssccccssssccscssssecees 38 TINTRODU GION sscsteicee occ E ose een Ak coc este he eves hee Seth dl cel cass ck 39 LOADING MULTIVOIP SOFTWARE ONTO THE PC occ ccccccccccecececesececeseeeseeeeeseeees 39 UN INSTALLING THE MULTIVOIP CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE cccccceceseeeseeeeees 46 CHAPTER 5 TECHNICAL CONFIGURATION cscccssssscssssscccssseccsssssecees 49 CONFIGURING THE MULTIVOIP ccccccccceccccccccccececececececececececececeeesesseeeeeeseseseeeeaes LOCAL CONFIGURATION eecccciecceeaceescuceebseck cecoctee a canewececesebeceve a i venetorwensebess PreReguistes oen e hash
185. field BD EE TS 228 A A e ERE ETS 186 Remove Prefix outbound field Bl EAEE 221 Td EE EE E ETA 178 repair procedures for customers U S amp Canada sssiiiiiitissisissreiisrss 344 Reply To Address email logs field a Aara e eA OE E EE U OET E U ERS 135 Requires Authentication SMTP field E AR TAAT 134 Re Registration Time proxy server ea ea a EE devas ese 116 Resolutions Multi VOIP troubleshooting ceeeeeeeee 7 Response Timeout Link Management field 278 Retransmission SPP General Options field oo eee 118 Retransmission Interval RADIUS screen field cccesceeseeeneees 160 Retrieve Sequence 145 148 REC 2782 sschnv diss Reid hens 72 REC 2833 aenooie teati ie 79 REC 3087 irina iii angen 180 REE 3489 iiion Regedit 155 RECATA ccch dishes Reseda 70 REC 2597 eainiie 70 REC 2833 esisisnaiieessctie 137 261 267 REC3246 iie e aaiae 70 REC168 sac had Gea te ienie eas 359 REC 793 oni hrinn easton Antennas 359 ring cadences custoM 0 132 Ring Count forwarding condition MultiVOIP User Guide BY vies ceive ei tinees oun a eerste 230 WDD atic idee ees 188 TING tone CUStOM s src 131 TING CONES Sieiro eies 130 Round Trip Delay Link Management field 279 Round Trip Delay field EV AEE SS 226 A e PEE E E EEES 183 RTP packetization ranges amp increments rerin 295 RTP Parameters screen 295 Safety Recommendations for Rack Installations 34 safety W
186. figuration North American Telephony Standards 170 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration T1 Versus E1 Telephony Environments We present separate chapters for the MVP2410 MultiVOIP this chapter and the MVP3010 MultiVOIP Chapter 7 because the respective telephony environments in which they operate have different standards and conventions The MVP2410 is designed to operate under North American or T1 standards the MVP3010 is designed to operate under European or E1 standards The configuration of the phonebook is the same in either case However differences in the telephony environment give rise to different examples in each case Series II analog MultiVOIP units MVP130 MVP130FXS MVP210 MVP410 and MVP810 can be operated in either the T1 or E1 environments The examples in this chapter show these analog voip units being used in the same system as the MVP2410 digital MultiVOIP Configuring T1 NAM Telephony MultiVOIP Phonebooks When a VoIP serves a PBX system it s important that the operation of the VoIP be transparent to the telephone end user That is the VoIP should not entail the dialing of extra digits to reach users elsewhere on the network that the VoIP serves On the contrary VOIP service more commonly reduces dialed digits by allowing users served by PBXs in facilities in distant cities to dial their co workers with 3 4 or 5 digit extensions as if they were in the same facility Furthermore
187. g of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden UDP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software TCP Packets Transmission Control Protocol packets Transmit integer Number of TCP packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of TCP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden TCP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software 274 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance IP Statistics Field Definitions cont d RTP Packets Voice signals are transmitted in Realtime Transport Protocol packets RTP packets are a type or subset of UDP packets Transmit integer Number of RTP packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of RTP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer
188. g technical suppott 346 coordinated phonebook entries Bil ss EEE hes 215 A N RE tachi toca ee 172 Copy Channel command Voice Fax Parameters ccccccceesssseeeeeceeees 77 Copy Channel field 0 eee 78 Copy Channel Supplementary Services command eee 146 Copy Channel Supplementary Services field eee eeeeeeeeees 154 Count of Registered Numbers field Registered Gateway Details 289 country ISDN type and ee 107 switch type and ISDN 107 Country field ISDN EL ISDN ic sisiti aiietinng bien 104 LIASDNe aienea e 96 Country Selection for Built In Modem field crores a 129 Country Region tone schemes field Oa Mee a een 126 127 CRC and ESF frame format T1 92 CRC Check field peste eet er er et eee eet eer 100 Pa esti wale a aon eee ae 92 Creating a User Default Configuration hide teed eastern hee es ee eee 169 Custom tones Regional field 128 custom CAdENCES ccceeceeeereeeees 132 custom DTMB cccecceeeseeeees 131 Custom Fields RADIUS Attributes definitions kaari na 161 Index Custom Fields RADIUS definitions SE ese ee N 162 Custom Fields SMTP definitions adieu EEA ES 136 137 Custom Fields RADIUS Accounting Attributes Bytes Received 0 eee 162 Bytes Sentre irk re 162 Call Status ceeeeeeereeeees 162 COOGEE poise eten nire dette 162 OPOS oen hate beets 163 OptiOlSeis s cel R etek ees 163 Description callee
189. ginate remotely from any other VOIP sites in the system and to terminate on that particular VOIP Briefly stated the MultiVOIP s Outbound phonebook lists the phone stations it can call its Inbound phonebook lists the dialing sequences that can be used to call that MultiVOIP Of course the phone numbers are not literally listed individually The phone stations that can originate or complete calls over the VOIP system are described by numerical rules called destination patterns These destination patterns generally consist of country codes area codes or city codes and local phone exchange numbers 214 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration In order for any VOIP phone call to be made there must be both an Inbound Phonebook entry and an Outbound Phonebook entry that describe the end to end connection The phone station originating the call must be connected to the VOIP system The Outbound Phonebook for that VOIP unit must have a destination pattern entry that includes the called phone that is the phone completing the call The Inbound Phonebook of the VOIP where the call is completed must have a destination pattern entry that includes the digit sequence dialed by the originating phone station The PhoneBook Configuration procedure below is brief but it is followed by an example case For many people the example case may be easier to grasp than the procedure steps Configuration is not difficult but al
190. gram MENU eri a areant 298 Download Factory Defaults program menu option command 310 Download Factory Defaults option description Multi VOIP program MENU Josee ae ipanen 298 Download Firmware program menu option command 304 305 Download Firmware option description MultiVOIP program MENU ccs ce seceg neor copter copies 298 Download User Defaults program menu option command 313 Download User Defaults option description MultiVOIP program MENU ieee ease caste 298 downloading firmware machine perspective s es 299 324 downloading user defaults 313 downloads vs uploads FTP 324 DTMF Out of Band and Outbound Digits Sentieri iirst 138 DTMF Capability call progress field E E EE io aia 261 DTMF Capability SMTP logs field E E 137 DTMF Capability statistics logs field 2 ci ac anihicidiiihvs 267 DTMF Gain High Tones field 78 DTMF Gain Low Tones field 78 DTMF Gain field 0 eee eeeeeeee 78 DTMF In Out of Band field 79 DTMF inband s es 79 DTMF out of band eee 79 DTMF custom tone pairs 131 Duration call progress field 258 Duration DTMF field 79 Duration RADIUS Attributes field AEE EA E T 161 Duration SMTP logs field 136 Duration statistics logs field 266 Dynamic Jitter Buffer field 86 Dynamic Jitter field group
191. h appear as static IP n n n n IP address of the MultiVOIP For an IP Address 0 255 address to be displayed here the MultiVOIP must have DHCP enabled Its IP address in such a case is assigned by the DHCP server Clear Clears packet tallies from memory button Total Packets Sum of data packets of all types Transmit integer Total number of packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Total number of packets received by this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the Multi VOIP software value 273 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide IP Statistics Field Definitions cont d Field Values Description Name Total Packets Sum of data packets of all types cont d Received integer Total number of error laden packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software UDP Packets User Datagram Protocol packets Transmit integer Number of UDP packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of UDP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resettin
192. he MultiVOIP software will be closed when the download is complete You will have to launch the MultiVOIP software again to continue using it 309 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Downloading Factory Defaults 1 The MultiVoip Configuration program must be off when invoking the Download Factory Defaults command If it is on the command will not work 2 To invoke the Download Factory Defaults command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Download Factory Defaults Set Program Access and Defaults E3 Windows Catalog ty Windows Update g Winzip G Launch RealOne Player B Configuration N T Accessories gt BB Configuration Port Setup Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt B Date and Time Setup Documents gt F Jasc Software Z5 Download CAS Protocol an Mozilla Firefox i ownload Factory Defaults n Microsoft Office Download Firmware Search A Acrobat Distiller 7 0 2 Download User Defaults DX Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional Set Password Jes DCTs ERLE MulliVOIP 6 08 gt j5 Uninstall GH MultivOIP 2410 4 08 A Z5 Upgrade Software Programs Settings Run Shut Down c wn a a 2 a x lt fad 3 310 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 3 If a password has been established the Password Verification screen will appear Password Verification Type in the password and click OK 4 The MVP___ Firmware screen
193. he equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate 350 MultiVOIP User Guide Regulatory Information WEEE Statement Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment July 2005 The WEEE directive places an obligation on EU based manufacturers distributors retailers and importers to take back electronics products at the end of their useful life A sister Directive ROHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances compliments the WEEE Directive by banning the presence of specific hazardous substances in the products at the design phase The WEEE Directive covers all Multi Tech products imported into the EU as of August 13 2005 EU based manufacturers distributors retailers and importers are obliged to finance the costs of recovery from municipal collection points reuse and recycling of specified percentages per the WEEE requirements Instructions for Disposal of WEEE by Users in the European Union The symbol shown below is on the product or on its packaging which indicates that this product must not be disposed of with other waste Instead it is the use
194. here may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning 7 Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak 8 To reduce the risk of fire use only a UL listed 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord 31 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide Unpacking Your MultiVOIP When unpacking your MultiVOIP check to see that all of the items shown are included in the box If any box contents are missing contact MultiTech Tech Support at 1 800 972 2439 Unpacking the MVP2410 3010 Munya Quick Start Guide pout 2 Figure 3 1 Unpacking the MVP2410 3010 32 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling Rack Mounting Instructions The MultiVOIPs can be mounted in an industry standard EIA 19 inch rack enclosure as shown in Figure 3 2 Figure 3 2 Rack Mounting 33 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide Safety Recommendations for Rack Installations Ensure proper installation of the unit in a closed or multi unit enclosure by following the recommended installation as defined by the enclosure manufacturer Do not place the unit directly on top of other equipment or place other equipment directly on top of the unit If installing the unit in a closed or multi unit
195. his chapter and the MVP2410 MultiVOIP Chapter 6 because the respective telephony environments in which they operate have different standards and conventions The MVP3010 is designed to operate under European or E1 standards the MVP2410 is designed to operate under North American or T1 standards The configuration of the phonebook is the same in either case However differences in the telephony environment give rise to different examples in each case Series II analog MultiVOIP units MVP130 MVP130FXS MVP210 MVP410 and MVP810 can be operated in either the T1 or E1 environments The examples in this chapter show these analog voip units being used in the same system as the MVP3010 digital MultiVOIP E1 Standard Inbound and Outbound MultiVOIP Phonebooks Important The MultiVOIP s Outbound phonebook Definition lists the phone stations it can call its Inbound phonebook describes the dialing sequences that can be used to call that MultiVOIP and how those calls will be directed When a VOIP serves a PBX system the operation of the VOIP should be transparent to the telephone end user and savings in long distance calling charges should be enjoyed Use of the VOIP should not require the dialing of extra digits to reach users elsewhere on the VOIP network On the contrary VOIP service more commonly reduces dialed digits by allowing users served by PBXs in facilities in distant cities to dial their co workers with 3 4 or
196. iVOIP unit Get the IP address of the mail server computer as well To LT Department t re email account for VOIP MEMO O Fa AE voip unit2 biggytech com a 57 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Config Info CheckList Type of Config Info Models MultiVOIP 3 E to which Configuration screen 2 o Gathered A 4 io Config on which to enter s i Info Config Info re 2 applies E IP info for voip unit MVP2410 Ethernet IP Parameters s P address MVP3010 e Gateway e DNS IP if used 802 1p Prioritization if used Frame Format MVP2410 TI E1 ISDN Parameters Choices ESF D4 F4 SLC96 Frame Format MVP3010 T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Choices Double Frame Multi Frame w CRC4 Multi Frame w CRC4 Modified CAS Protocol MVP2410 T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Choices FXS Loop Start E amp M MVP3010 Wink E amp M Wink w Dial Tone FXO Ground Start FXO Loop Start FXS Ground Start E amp M Immediate MFR2 China Clear Channel ISDN PRI Protocol MVP2410 T1 E1 ISDN Parameters only if ISDN PRI is used MVP3010 Choices Network Terminal Clocking MVP2410 T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Choices Internal External MYVP3010 Line Coding MVP2410 T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Choices AMI B8ZS MVP3010 Pulse Shape Level MVP2410 T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Choices 0 40 m
197. iVOIP web browser GUI All of these control software packages are included on the Product CD 11 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide While the web GUI s appearance differs slightly its content and organization are essentially the same as that of the Windows GUI except for logging Z Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q O l 2 Address http 192 168 41 81 MultiVOIP 2410 Configuration Ethernet IP VoicelFax Call Signaling TIEVMISDN SNMP Ethernet IP Parameters Regional SMTP Ethernet Parameters RADIUS C Packet Prioritization 802 1p Frame Type TYPE w Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information Call Control 3 Excellent Effort Advanced Phone Book VoIP Media 6 Voice Statistics Change Password 0 Best Effort Save amp Reboot Logout Help Gateway Name MultiVoIP Diff Serv Parameters Enable DHCP Call Control PHB E i VolP Media PHB IP Address 192 168 41 81 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 C Enable DNS J Enable DNS SRV DNS Server IP Address 12 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview MultivoIP MultivOIP 2410 4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help AMSSSE BEES OME E Configuration Voice Fax E Call Signaling TIJE1 ISD
198. icians must attach the brackets to the MultiVOIP chassis with the screws provided as shown in Figure 3 3 and then secure unit to rack rails by the brackets as shown in Figure 3 4 Because equipment racks vary screws for rack rail mounting are not provided Follow the instructions of the rack manufacturer and use screws that fit 1 Position the right rack mounting bracket on the MultiVOIP using the two vertical mounting screw holes Secure the bracket to the MultiVOIP using the two screws provided Position the left rack mounting bracket on the MultiVOIP using the two vertical mounting screw holes Secure the bracket to the MultiVOIP using the two screws provided Remove feet 4 from the MultiVOIP unit Mount the MultiVOIP in the rack enclosure per the rack manufacture s mounting procedure beoe Figure 3 4 Attaching MultiVOIP to Rack Rail 35 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide Cabling Cabling Procedure Cabling your MultiVOIP entails making the proper connections for power command port phone system T1 E1 line connected to PBX or telco office and Ethernet network Figure 3 5 shows the back panel connectors and the associated cable connections The following procedure details the steps necessary for cabling your MultiVOIP 1 Connect the power cord to a live AC outlet then connect it to the MultiVOIP s power receptacle shown at top right in Figure 3 5
199. ide E1 Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description T1 E1 ISDN E1 European standard Long Haul Y N In Long Haul Mode the Mode MultiVOIP automatically recovers received signals as low as 36 dB The maximum reachable length with 22 AWG cable is 2000 meters When Long Haul Mode is disabled signals as low as 10 dB can be received Default disabled CRC Check Not applicable to E1 Cyclic Redundancy Check Frame Format Double Frame MultiFrame with CRC4 MultiFrame w CRC4 modified Frame Format of Multi VOIP should match that used by PBX or telco 100 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration E1 Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description CAS Protocol E amp M Immed Strt E amp M Wink Start E amp M Wink with dial tone FXO Ground Strt FXO Loop Start FXS Ground Strt FXS Loop Start MFR2ITU MEFR2 China MFR2 ANI Channel Associated Signaling CAS is a method of incorporating telephony signaling info into an E1 voice data stream In CAS the signaling bits the A B C and D bits are multiplexed into the signal stream of each E1 channel By contrast in Common Channel Signaling CCS one channel handles signaling for all other channels Each CAS protocol defines the states of the signaling bits during the various stages of a call IDLE SEIZED ANSWER RING ON RING OFF The CAS protocol code allows
200. ield ccccceeeeeeeeee 80 FCC Declaration ccceccesseeees 348 FCC Part 68 Telecom rules 349 FCC registration numbet 350 FCC rules Part 15 0 0 eee 348 FDX LED Bl EEA lectins Meanie eins 24 Tlie a eneavsies 16 Filters Console Message Settings 143 Filters button Console Message Settings niiin nins 142 firmware upgrade implementing 304 Firmware Version System Info 166 firmware version identifying 304 firmware downloading 305 firmware obtaining updated 300 forgotten password 4 316 320 Forward Address Number Tianan eni eaaa 187 Forward Condition Call Fwdg Bl E E A 229 A o E E E ET 187 Index Forward Destination Inbound PhBk ees Pettis ott citer he a te ane Tas 230 Forward Error Correction call progress field oo eee 263 Forward Error Correction RADIUS Attributes cceecsseceeseeeseeeee 163 Forward Error Correction SMTP JOS EE seve dove Rash ooptae ee 138 Forward Error Correction field 82 forward on busy TTD iets ec caves styeesds dooce E 187 229 Forward upon No Response BLD os ecdete sapseaneidens paced sents 229 fe Ieee EE AAEE E E eee 187 forwarding dual conditions E1 busy amp no response 04 229 forwarding dual conditions T1 busy amp no response n 187 Frame Format field Bh Peet eros er cre rae Ta 100 de areca ee cee ener eens rea tee 92 frame rela
201. in the Tavistock Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 0182263742 for calls within the office at Tavistock 01822 for calls to the Tavistock local calling area PSTN Call Event Sequence 1 Caller in Inner London dials 901822637424 2 Inner London voip removes 9 3 Inner London voip passes remaining string 018226374240n to the Tavistock voip at IP address 200 2 9 5 4 The dialed string matches an inbound phonebook entry at the Tavistock voip namely 0182263742 5 The Tavistock voip rings one of the three FXS ports connected to the Tavistock key phone system 6 The call will be routed to extension 7424 either by a human receptionist operator or to an auto attendant which allows the caller to specify the extension to which they wish to be connected 248 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Site F calling Site D A voip call from a Tavistock key extension to extension 3117 on the PBX in Inner London A The required entry in the Tavistock Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 3 The string 02073988 is added preceding the 3 The call would be directed to the Inner London voip s IP address 200 2 9 9 B The corresponding entry in the Inner London Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 020739883 1 The caller in Tavistock picks up the phone receiver presses a button on the key phone set This button ha
202. ine Build Out z dB 0 T Long Haul Mode a Cancel I CRC Check Supervision Frame Format MultiFrame with CRC4 modified Help Double Frame Pulse Shape Level fo to 40m z MultiFrame with CAC4 MultiFrame with CRC4 moditied 40 to 81m 81 to 122m ESEE t ERM Wink wih Dial Tone F 122 to 162m totocol J E amp M Wink with Dial Tone fat 162 to 200m r CallerlD FXO Ground Start ee coop miat i Calling Number Prefix FXS Loop Start MFR2 China Calling Number Suffix MFR2 ANI E amp M Immediate Flash Hook CAS Protocol E amp M Wink FXS Options Detection Time in ms 100 No Response Timer 180 ss Generation Time in ms 100 M ISDN Parameters re r Clocking Extemal C Intemal C Terminal Network a S Country USA Z r Line Coding Operator N_ISDN2 g C AMI Coding B amp S Coding Numbering Details m PCM Law C ALaw MU Law r Calling Party Number Type National ie Unknown International National 2 C Bit 2 Qin every Channel Network Specific Subscriber 19111171 0000 0000 in data link Abbreviated As Received from Network _ m Yellow Alarm Format r Called Party Number Type National Number Plan SDN Telephony gt Unknown ISDN Telephony Data Telex National Standard Private As Received from Network 99 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Gu
203. ing ATHO NOTE If there is a Dial String specified in Modem Setup Configuration programs will try to initialize modem and dial this string 299 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Date and Time Setup The dialog box below allows you to set the time and date indicators of the MultiVOIP system Date and Time Settings Date mm dd yy iE 9 01 l i smm ss 17 Timefhh mm ss 11 17 25 AM S E Cancel Obtaining Updated Firmware Generally updated firmware must be downloaded from the MultiTech web FTP site to the user s PC before it can be downloaded from that PC to the MultiVOIP Note that the structure of the MultiTech web FTP site may change without notice However firmware updates can generally be found using standard web techniques For example you can access updated firmware by doing a search or by clicking on Support multistech online E Mult oigl Support Documents Partners E 300 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance If you conduct a search for example on the word MultiVoip you will be directed to a list of firmware that can be downloaded a MuoltiVOIP Firmware Find all the firmware a for the MultiVOIP here 5 13 01 se If you choose Support you can select MultiVoip in the Product Support menu and then click on Firmware to find MultiVOIP resources Product Support MultiVOIP MultiF RAD MultiMode
204. ing The primary advantage of the web GUI is remote access for control and configuration The controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit itself must both be connected to the same IP network and their IP addresses must be known In order to use the web GUI you must also install a Java application program on the controller PC This Java program is included on the MultiVOIP product CD Java is needed to support drop down menus and multiple windows in the web GUI To install the Java program go to the Java directory on the MultiVOIP product CD Double click on the EXE file to begin the installation Follow the instructions on the Install Shield screens InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Java 2 Runtime Environment SE 1 4 0_01 The InstallShield Wizard will install Java 2 Runtime Environment SE 1 4 0_01 on your computer To continue click Next 337 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide During the installation you must specify which browser you ll use in the Select Browsers screen InstallShield Wizard Select Browsers istellStiela When installation is complete the Java program becomes accessible in your Start Programs menu Java resources are readily available via the web However the Java program runs automatically in the background as a plug in supporting the MultiVOIP web GUI No overt user actions are required 338 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Ma
205. ing Configuration 99090900000909000 Reading Configuration 1999999090900 090900 Multi olP found 1999909090 90990909909 62 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 4 Solving Common Connection Problems A Fixing a COM Port Problem If the MultiVOIP main screen appears but is grayed out and seems inaccessible the COM port that was specified for its communication with the PC is unavailable and must be changed An error message will appear Multi OIP COH B Error in Opencomm handle To change the COM port setting use the COM Port Setup dialog box which is accessible via the keyboard shortcut Ctrl G or by going to the Connection pull down menu and choosing Settings In the Select Port field select a COM port that is available on the PC If no COM ports are currently available re allocate COM port resources in the computer s MS Windows operating system to make one available Connection Help sonnect ot Hs Disconnect Ctrl D Settings Ctrl G Ctrl G B Connection m COM Port Setup Connect Select Port COM1 x Disconnect Settings gt Baud Rate 115200 z Modem Setup bison sacs Init String PIRES 5 613200401 Init Response Koo Diisi SS Connect Response JcONNECT assis Hangup Sting aT oo NOTE If there is a Dial String specified in Modem Setup Configuration programs will try to initialize modem and dial this string
206. intenance thew Iire Decne FA dan Setter T LzenUlh e LU currert 2 TAINAS a verns leses Lad hrir Aali 2 Tons Frito ay Lumens H Fisdy darase OIC Eh Setirg 3 Cries T me lor Wiican Lh Staap Gy Hisce acos R Miter Lxzel E EN e zaklat Gereh o Welcome to the Java 2 Platform Fe ecome wo the Java 2 Standard Editior Purim Evomris Thie zo7idee c nplete tuntime s gt sort fe Faraz applications The mrt tarinmi ine des t Dee Y Pisia andat whia rawta nimrir g ta dawal sau JEU Site WEY IUW IF References Res tar Dasr Trizin piarchi ee nimentaNen fre aed ifa irr eo ite gta i prudish Se tas Cave 2 Plates web ex foz r12 sZortnes 92 mthe Jara 3 Fiann Coptic 2203 Pav ITO raras Ex L Som Seon Boe Pak Ake Calas WLU A alagera My amp ier After the Java program has been installed you can access the MultiVOIP using the web browser GUI Close the MultiVOIP Windows GUI Start the web browser Enter the IP address of the MultiVOIP unit Enter a password when prompted A password is needed here only if password has been set for the local Windows GUI or for the MultiVOIP s FTP Server function See Setting a Password Web Browser GUI earlier in this chapter The web browser GUI offers essentially the same control over the voip as can be achieved using the Windows GUI As noted earlier logging functions cannot be handled via the web GUI And because network communications will be sl
207. ion System Info 167 implementing firmware upgrade 304 in band DTMF seee 79 Inbound Phonebook Entries List icon Elere Baan ae 216 Tiiron e E E 173 Inbound Phonebook entries list Bl P ee aaa ai 226 Theran Seino ie dl i 184 inbound vs outbound phonebooks El seessiscc EEE E 214 Tica stescinaieitedven AscteceBaize 171 Industry Canada requirements 349 info sources E1 telephony details 56 IPidet il Sinia 54 SMTP details eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 57 T1 telephony details 0 0 0 55 voip email account 57 Input Gain field eens 78 installation 378 MultiVOIP User Guide ATP OW oeceeisctiesnceerceevcecessbeocneeecees 34 E1 prerequisites cseeseeeee 56 expansion card 4 to 8 channel 361 in a nutshell 0 ee eeeeeeeeeee 27 TT ACK arepa in ri R 33 log reports by email 4 57 software detailed 39 T1 prerequisites ceeeeeeee 55 upgrade card 4 to 8 channel 361 voip email account eeeeeee 57 installation prerequisites 53 installation mechanical El models a eneses 17 FU adel ss erreien sas 9 installing Java vis a vis web GUI 337 integrated phone data networks 210 Intercept Tone Regional Params and Offhook Alert Voice Fax Params Pera ee A cect tien EN 126 Intercept Tone and required Interface amp Voice Fax settings 126 interface types BRI Diced Ae eee election a 357 U 357 inter office dialing Ble e
208. ions especially when firewalls are used and when dynamic IP address assignment is needed However when SPP is used certain features of SIP and H 323 will not be available and SPP will not inter operate with voip systems using H 323 or SIP Data Compression amp Quality of Service The MultiVOIP3010 comes equipped with a variety of data compression capabilities including G 723 G 729 and G 711 and features DiffServ quality of service QoS capabilities VOIP Functions The MultiVOIP MVP3010 gateway performs four basic functions a it converts a dialed number into an IP address b it sends voice over the data network c it establishes a connection with another VOIP gateway at a remote site and d it receives voice over the data network Voice is handled as IP packets with a variety of compression options Each E1 connection to the MultiVOIP provides 30 time slot channels to connect to the telco or to serve phone or fax stations connected to a PBX Ports The MVP3010 also has a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN interface and a Command port for configuration An MVP3010 upgraded with the MVP30 60 kit will have two Ethernet LAN interfaces and two Command ports PSTN Failover Feature The MultiVOIP can be programmed to divert calls to the PSTN temporarily in case the IP network fails RADIUS Support Inter operation with a RADIUS server allows for call accounting especially for billing on a voip system The MultiVOIP 18 MultiVOIP Us
209. is Manual This manual is about Voice over IP products made by Multi Tech Systems Inc It describes three analog MultiVOIP units models MVP810 MVP410 and MVP210 These MultiVOIP units can inter operate with other contemporary analog MultiVOIP units MVP130 amp MVP130FXS with contemporary BRI MultiVOIP units MVP410ST amp MVP810ST with contemporary digital T1 E1 ISDN PRI MultiVOIP units MVP2410 and MVP3010 and with the earlier generation of MultiVOIP products MVP200 MVP400 MVP800 MVP120 etc The table below on next page describes the vital characteristics of the various models described in this manual How to Use This Manual In short use the index and the examples When our readers crack open this large manual they generally need one of two things information on a very specific software setting or technical parameter about telephony or IP or they need help when setting up phonebooks for their voip systems The index gives quick access to voip settings and parameters It s detailed Use it The best way to learn about phonebooks is to wade through examples like those in our chapters on T1 North American standard Phonebooks and E1 Euro standard Phonebooks Finally this manual is meant to be comprehensive If you notice that something important is lacking please let us know Additional Resources The MultiTech web site www multitech com offers both a list of Frequently Asked Questions the MultiVOIP FAQ and
210. its a month expression of one or two digits and a four digit year This is followed by a time of day expression presented as a two digit hour a two digit minute and a two digit seconds value statistics logs field Duration column hh mm ss This describes how long the call event lasted in hours minutes and seconds Type H 323 SIP or SPP Indicates the Call Signaling protocol used for the call H 323 SIP or SPP Status column success or Displays the status of the call i e failure whether the call was completed successfully or not IP Direction incoming Indicates whether the call is outgoing incoming or outgoing with respect to the gateway Mode column From column voice or FAX gateway name Indicates whether the event being described was a voice call or a FAX call Displays the name of the voice gateway that originates the call To column gateway name Displays the name of the voice gateway that completes the call Special Buttons Previous Displays log entry before currently selected one Next Displays log entry after currently selected one First Displays first log entry Last Displays last log entry Delete File Deletes selected log file 266 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description
211. its sent 138 Packets LOST aspessu 137 Packets Received ccc 136 Packets Sent eeeceeeeeesseeeeeee 136 Prefix Matched ceeee 137 Select Aryani 136 Server Details e eee See Start Date Time cccee 136 To Gateway Number 138 To IP Address 0 00 0 ceeeeeeeseeeeees 138 Custom Tone Pair Settings definitions EE R EET 131 132 Custom Tone Pair Settings fields Cadence 1 hrcsrnaiiia irna 132 Cadence 2 irpini 132 Cadence Zsoca uina 132 Cadence 4 i surni enine 132 Frequency lisiri ipiroisris 131 Frequency 2 iniiis 131 Gain lected e an 131 Gain 2 A ES 131 Tone Palson anni 131 customized log email 136 138 customized RADIUS Accounting 161 customized RADIUS accounting PATAMECTETS 20 ee eee eee eee 163 data Capacity ee ceeeeeeeceecseeeeeeeeee 8 Blithe Bit ala eich ai dey 17 Tlivid sided eenphia Sewell 9 data compression Bliscata hse hi teva Aisi 18 Piva sieeve la eiiegaion 10 Date amp Time Setup program menu option command eee 300 Date and Time Setup option description MultiVOIP program MENU ich Neves a e e eevee 297 debugging messages 142 Default Supplementary Services feldene iaid e eo 154 Default Voice FAX field 78 default baud rate MultiVOIP software connection 164 default configuration user 169 default values software 310 dela
212. k s frame type Default is Type II 802 1p A draft standard of the IEEE about data traffic prioritization on Ethernet networks The 802 1p draft is an extension of the 802 1D bridging standard 802 1D determines how prioritization will operate within a MAC layer bridge for any kind of media The 802 1Q draft for virtual local area networks VLANs addresses the issue of prioritization for Ethernet networks in particular 802 1p enacts this Quality of Service feature using 3 bits This 3 bit code allows data switches to reorder packets based on priority level The descriptors for the 8 priority levels are given below 802 1p PRIORITY LEVELS LOWEST PRIORITY 1 Background Bulk transfers and other activities permitted on the network but should not affect the use of network by other users and applications 2 Spare An unused spare value of the user priority 0 Best Effort default Normal priority for ordinary LAN traffic 3 Excellent Effort The best effort type of service that an information services organization would deliver to its most important customers 67 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Ethernet Parameters 802 1p continued 4 Controlled Load Important business applications subject to some form of Admission Control such as preplanning of Network requirement ch
213. l Authentication Port 1812 Select Attributes Retransmission Interval 2000 m Number of Retransmissions f3 Help Shared Secret Radius Attributes IV Select All Attributes IV Channel Number Start Date Time M Duration I Call Mode Cancel IV Packets Sent Packets Received Help IV Bytes Sent IV Bytes Received IV Packets Lost Coder M Outbound Digits I Prefix Matched IV Call Status From Details To Details IV Gateway Name IV Gateway Name IV IP Address IV IP Address M Description M Description IV Options IV Options The fields of the RADIUS screen are described in the table below 159 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide RADIUS Screen Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable Y N When checked the MultiVOIP will Accounting access the accounting functionality of the Server n n nn IP address of the RADIUS server that Address 0 255 handles accounting billing for the current MultiVOIP unit Accounting numeric TDM time slot at which RADIUS Port 1 65535 accounting information will be transmitted and received Retrans mission If the MultiVOIP sends out a packet to Interval the RADIUS server and doesn t Number of 0 255 receive a response in the retransmit Re transmis interval it will retransmit that packet sions again and wait the retransmit interval again for a response How many times it does this is determined by the setting i
214. l known port gatekeeper registration er 110 well known port H 323 params Bd E EE E 222 TA niet a n s 179 well known port Q 931 params H 323a a R eA 109 well known port SIP Bla E E A 223 Tl EEA E 180 well known port SNMP 123 Windows GUI Web GUI compared Bl EEES ee 20 TA AE EEE Bint 12 Yellow Alarm E1 stats field 285 Yellow Alarm T1 stats field 282 Yellow Alarm Format field E1 106 Yellow Alarm Format field T1 98 Multi lech Systems S000384 A 395
215. l phone number sequences destination patterns and other information must be entered exactly otherwise connections will not be made 215 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebook configuration screens can be accessed using icons or the sidebar menu Phonebook Icons Description Phone Book leone Phonebook Configuration D ee ee amp B Phone Book Icons a A a py ke amp B Anne Danian a Phonebook E Bi S oSI Edit selected Inbound a Phonebook Entry CIETFEN Outbound Phonebook Entries List Boe A 2 e amp Ee Phone Book Icons A E m B28 2B Bi E Bute Te oi Edit selected Outbound B p B a i Phonebook Entry 216 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Phonebook Pulldown Menu Phone Book Outbound Phone Book Alt O gt List Entries Ctrl L Inbound Phone Boo Ls Alt gt AddeEntry cCtri 4 Edit Entry Ctrl E Inbound Phonebook Shortcut Outbound Phonebook Shortcut Alt I Alt O Phonebook Sidebar Menu Configuration Advanced Phone Book Outbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Inbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Statistics 217 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebook Configuration Procedure 1 Select Outbound Phone Book List Entries MuliVorP MultiVOLP vb 0U CP Firmware Jul 22 2
216. ld in Phone Book Configuration screen of remote voip Caller ID There are four values Calling Party identifier Alerting Party identifier Busy Party identifier and Connected Party identifier This field shows the identifier and status of a remote voip which has Call Name Identification enabled with which this voip unit is currently engaged in some voip transmission The status of the engagement Connected Alerting Busy or Calling is followed by the identifier of a specific channel of a remote voip unit This identifier comes from the Caller Id field in the Supplementary Services screen of the remote voip unit 262 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Call Progress Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Status fields Call Status hangup active Shows condition of current call Call Control Status Tun FS Tun AE Mux Displays the H 323 version 4 features in use for the selected call These include tunneling Tun Fast Start with tunneling FS Tun Annex E multiplexed UDP call signaling transport AE and Q 931 Multiplexing Mux See Phonebook Configuration Parameters in T1 or E1 chapters for more on H 323v4 features Silence Compression Forward Error Correction SC FEC 263 SC stands for Silence Compression With Silence
217. ling Party Number network specific Information element that is sent subscriber on ISDN line The Called party abbreviated number information element as received from identifies destination of a call network Called Party unknown The call dialing plan under Number Plan ISDN telephony which the called party operates data telex national standard private as received from network 104 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration E1 Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description General E1 E1 ISDN Parameters Line Build Out 0 dB 7 5 dB To reduce the crosstalk on 15 dB 22 5 dB received signals a transmit attenuator can be placed in the data path Transmit attenuation is selectable Default O dB Pulse Shape 0 to 40 Meters Refers to length of cable Level 40 to 81 m between MultiVOIP and 81 to 122 m PBX telco in meters Most 122 to 162m common will be 0 to 40m 162 to 200 m Caller ID Parameters Caller ID Y N Turns Caller ID feature on if Enable checked and off if unchecked Calling 0 9 A DTMF symbol used to mark the Number Prefix beginning of the calling party Caller ID number for use with Caller ID Maximum length 4 characters Calling 0 9 A DTMF symbol used to mark Number Suffix the end of the calling party Caller ID number for use with Caller ID Maximum length 4 characters Detect Flash Y N This setting determines whethe
218. ll requests sent to the gatekeeper and preceded by this prefix will be routed to the VOIP gateway H 323 Port 1720 This parameter pertains to Number Q 931 which is the H 323 call signaling protocol for setup and termination of calls aka ITU T Recommendation 1 451 H 323 employs only one well known port 1720 for Q 931 signaling If Q 931 message oriented signaling protocol is used 1720 must be chosen as the H 323 Port Number 179 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description SIP Fields Use Proxy Y N Select if proxy server is used Transport TCP or Voip administrator must choose Protocol UDP between UDP and TCP transmission protocols UDP is a high speed low overhead connectionless protocol where data is transmitted without acknowledgment guaranteed delivery or guaranteed packet sequence integrity TCP is slower connection oriented protocol with greater overhead but having acknowledgment and guarantees delivery and packet sequence integrity SIP Port 5060 or other The SIP Port Number is a Number UDP logical port number See RFC 3087 The voip will listen for SIP Control of messages at this logical port Servi If SIP is used 5060 is the Context using default standard or well SIP Request known port number to be URI by the used If 5060 is not used
219. llShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on MuBiVOIP model version lt Sack Fei ears Click Finish 322 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Upgrading Software As noted earlier see the section Implementing a Software Upgrade above the Upgrade Software command transfers from the controller PC to the MultiVOIP unit firmware including the H 323 stack and factory default configuration settings As such Upgrade Software implements the functions of both Download Firmware and Download Factory Defaults in a single command NOTE amp Set Program Access and Defaults eS Windows Catalog ty Windows Update S WinZip Launch RealOne Player B Configuration an Accessories a B Configuration Port Setup an Macromedia FreeHand 9 B Date and Time Setup 2 Documents gt IF Jasc Software 2 Download CAS Protocol an Mozilla Firefox 5 Download Factory Defaults IF Microsoft Office gt 25 Download Firmware Search gt A Acrobat Distiller 7 0 2 Download User Defaults SX Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional B Set Password Dannii IE Mutivor 6 08 gt j5 Uninstall Programs Settings To upgrade a MultiV OIP from software version 4 04 or earlier an ftp primer file must first be sent to the VOIP This file is located in the Software ftp_Primer folder on the CD and the file name is FTP_Primer bin Before uploading this file it must be renamed mvptlftp bin Th
220. ller Id Hold Sequence Call Waiting MV Enable OK Default Retrieve Sequence ical ean Channel Of the features implemented under Supplementary Services three are very closely related Call Transfer Call Hold and Call Waiting Call Name Identification is similar but not identical to the premium PSTN feature commonly known as Caller ID Call Transfer Call Transfer allows one party to re connect the party with whom they have been speaking to a third party The first party is disconnected when the third party becomes connected Feature is invoked by a programmable phone keypad sequence for example 7 Call Hold Call Hold allows one party to maintain an idle non talking connection with another party while receiving another call Call Waiting while initiating another call Call Transfer or while performing some other call management function Invoked by keypad sequence Call Waiting Call Waiting notifies an engaged caller of an incoming call and allows them to receive a call from a third party while the party with whom they have been speaking is put on hold Invoked by keypad sequence Call Name Identification When enabled for a given voip unit the home voip this feature gives notice to remote voips involved in calls Notification goes to the remote voip administrator not to individual phone stations When the home voip is the caller a plain English des
221. locking Extemal C Internal rm Line Coding AMI Coding B85 Coding r Numbering Details m PEM Law r Calling Party Unknown International National Network Specific Subscriber Abbreviated Number Type National C ALaw MU Law m Yellow Alarm Format C Bit 2 0in every Channel 1111 1111 0000 0000 in data link Called Party Number Type National X Number Plan ISDN Telephony X Unknown ISDN Telephony Data Telex National Standard Private As Received from Network 90 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration T1 Parameters The parameters applicable to T1 and their values are shown in the figure below These T1 Parameter fields are described in the tables that follow 122 to 162m 162 to 200m 7 91 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide T1 Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description T1 E1 ISDN T1 North American digital telephony standard Long Haul Mode Y N In Long Haul Mode the MultiVOIP automatically recovers received signals as low as 36 dB The maximum reachable length with 22 AWG cable is 2000 meters When Long Haul Mode is disabled signals as low as 10 dB can be received Default disabled CRC Check Cyclic Redundancy Check Frame Format Y N F4 D4 ESF SLC96 When enabled allows genera
222. ls Ctrl H T1 E1 ISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Logs Traces Ctrl aAlt b Shortcut Sidebar El Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt S oice Fax Call Signaling TIJE1sISDN SNMP Regional RADIUS MultiVOIP as Email Sender When SMTP is used the MultiVOIP will actually be given its own email account with Login Name and Password on some mail server connected to the IP network Using this account the MultiVOIP will then send out email messages containing log report information The Recipient of the log report email is ordinarily the VoIP administrator Because the MultiVOIP cannot receive email a Reply To address must also be set up Ordinarily the Reply To address is that of a technician who has access to the mail server or MultiVOIP or both and the VoIP administrator might also be designated as the Reply To party The main function of the Reply To address is to receive error or failure messages regarding the emailed reports 133 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The SMTP Parameters screen is shown below gt MultiVOIP Configuration Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help ABvel SBBtTRBEtS BEML 4 e gt SMTP Parameters FE J Requires Authentication Cancel Login Name VOIP UNIT 3 acmetech com Help Password pr Select Fields Mail S Mail Server
223. lti Tech Systems t Mad MultiVOIP a RS Version Thank you for choosing Multi olP from Multi Tech Systems Click Next to continue installation Press Enter or click Next to continue 41 Technical Configuration T1 E1 MultiVOIP User Guide 5 Follow the on screen instructions to install your MultiVOIP software The first screen asks you to choose the folder location of the files of the MultiVOIP software Multi Tech Systems x i g Multivolp Mode t Installation Versions Setup will install Multi olP in the following folder To install to this folder Click Next To install to another folder Click Browse and select another folder r Destination Folder Browse nstalshied f Cancel C Program Files Mult OIP 3000 CAProgram Files MultiVOIP 2400 EPren Fiesa 2400 Default destination path C Multi Tech Systems MultiVolP 5 90 varies by model Choose a location and click Next 42 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling 6 At the next screen you must select a program folder location for the MultiVOIP software program icon Multi Tech Systems F Model MultiVolP pizi Manager 7 26 FullShot99 Mult OIP 100 v7 01C Multi OIP 100 v 01E Mult OIP 100 v7 50 MultiVOIP 100 v7 50 Multi OIP 100 v7 50C MultiVOIP 100 v7 514 Fistell SrinetG Click Next Transient progress screens will appear while files are being copied 43 Technical Co
224. ltiVOIP The Custom Fields screen lets you pick which aspects will be included in the email log reports m Custom Fields MV Select All m Fields IV Channel Number IV Start Date Time M Duration MV Call Mode IV Packets Sent IV Packets Received M Bytes Sent V Bytes Received Help IV Packets Lost V Coder Cancel I Outbound Digits Received JY Prefix Matched IV Call Status lv Call Type V Call Direction V DTMF Capability V Server Details IV Outbound digits sent JV Disconnect Reason From Details r To Details V Gateway Name V Gateway Name JV IP Address JV IP Address V Description V Description V Options JV Options Custom Fields Definitions Field Description Field Description Select All Log report to include all fields shown Channel Data channel Start Date and time the Number carrying call Date phone call began Time Duration Length of call Call Voice or fax Mode Packets Total packets sent Packets Total packets Sent in call Received received in call 136 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Custom Fields Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description Bytes Total bytes sent in Bytes Total bytes received Sent call Received in call Packets Packets lost in Coder Voice Coder Lost call Compression Rate used for call will be listed in log Outbound The DTMF dialing Prefix When selected
225. ly adjusting the length of the Jitter Buffer between configurable minimum and maximum values An Optimization Factor adjustment controls how quickly the length of the Jitter Buffer is increased when jitter increases on the network The length of the jitter buffer directly effects the voice delay between MultiVOIP gateways Minimum 60 to 400 The minimum dynamic jitter buffer Jitter Value ms of 60 milliseconds is the minimum delay that would be acceptable over a low jitter network Default 150 msec 86 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Dynamic Jitter Maximum 60 to 400 The maximum dynamic jitter buffer Jitter Value ms of 400 milliseconds is the maximum delay tolerable over a high jitter network Default 300 msec Optimizat 0 to 12 The Optimization Factor ion Factor determines how quickly the length of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer is changed based on actual jitter encountered on the network Selecting the minimum value of 0 means low voice delay is desired but increases the possibility of jitter induced voice quality problems Selecting the maximum value of 12 means highest voice quality under jitter conditions is desired at the cost of increased voice delay Default 7 Modem Relay To place modem traffic onto the voip network an application called modem relay
226. mDSVD Related Links A Product Product Tour H 323 Upgrade Where to Buy Solutions App Stories MultiVOIP Support Manuals are available on line Firmware is available Software is available Read the FAQs 301 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Once the updated firmware has been located it can be downloaded from the web ftp site using normal PC Windows procedures While the next 3 screens below pertain to the MVP3010 similar screens will appear for any MultiVOIP model described in this manual File Download x You have chosen to download a file from this location MVP3000x EXE from ftp multitech com What would you like to do with this file C Bun this program from its current location M Always ask before opening this type of file Cancel More Info 781 KB of M P301f EXE Copied e x g Saving MVP3000x EXE from ftp multitech com Estimated time left Not known Opened so far 781 KB Download to C VoipSystem MVP3000 MVP301f EXE R Transfer rate 260 KB sec 302 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Generally the firmware file will be a self extracting compressed file with zip extension which must be expanded decompressed or unzipped on the user s PC in a user specified directory WinZip Self Extractor MYP301f EXE To unzip all files in M P301F EXE to the specified folder pre
227. mber and if the product is out of warranty a check or purchase order for repair charges 344 MultiVOIP User Guide Warranty Service amp Tech Support For out of warranty repair charges go to www multitech com documents warranties Extended two year overnight replacement service agreements are available for selected products Please call MTS at 888 288 5470 extension 5308 or visit our web site at www multitech com programs orc for details on rates and coverages Please direct your questions regarding technical matters product configuration verification that the product is defective etc to our Technical Support department at 800 972 2439 or email tsupport multitech com Please direct your questions regarding repair expediting receiving shipping billing etc to our Repair Accounting department at 800 328 9717 or 763 717 5631 or email mtsrepair multitech com Repairs for damages caused by lightning storms water power surges incorrect installation physical abuse or used caused damages are billed on a time plus materials basis 345 Warranty Service amp Tech Support MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Support Multi Tech Systems has an excellent staff of technical support personnel available to help you get the most out of your Multi Tech product If you have any questions about the operation of this unit or experience difficulty during installation you can contact Tech Support via the follo
228. mber is selected calls received from phone numbers not matching a listed Prefix shown in the Remove Prefix column of the Inbound Phone Book will be admitted into the voip on the channel listed in the Channel Number field Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Prefixes Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination often a local PBX Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination often a local PBX Channel 1 24 or T1 channel number to which Number Hunting the call will be assigned as it enters the local telephony equipment often a local PBX Hunting directs the call to any available channel Description Describes the facility or geographical location at which the call originated Call Forward Parameters Enable Y N Click the check box to enable the call forwarding feature 186 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Forward Parameters Forward Condition Unconditional When selected all calls received will be forwarded Busy When selected calls will be forwarded when station is busy No Response When selected calls will be forwarded if called party does not answer after a specified number of rings as specified in Ri
229. mp Maintenance The frequency with which the System Information screen is updated is determined by a setting in the Logs screen 255 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Statistics Screens Ongoing operation of the MultiVOIP whether it is ina MultiVOIP PBX setting or MultiVOIP telco office setting can be monitored for performance using the Statistics functions of the MultiVOIP software About Call Progress Accessing Call Progress Statistics Channel Icons Main Screen Lower Left Channel icons are green when data traffic is present red when idle In the web GUI call progress details can be viewed by clicking on an icon one for each channel arranged similarly on the web browser screen Pulldown Icon Statistics H elp Call Progress Ctri Alt A Logs Ctrl O IP Statistics Ctrl P T1 E1 Statistics Ctrl 1 Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt W Link Management Ctrl 2 F Alternate Servers Ctri Alt 4 gt Call Progress D etails Shortcut Sidebar El Statistics Call Progress Ctrl Logs Alt A IP Statistics Link Management T1 E1 Statistics 256 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The Call Progress Details Screen 257 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Call Progress Details Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Channel 1 n Number of data channel or time sl
230. mply Reason because the desired conversation was done or some other irregular cause occasioned disconnection e g a technical error or failure Values are Normal and Local disconnection From Details To Details Gateway Originating Gatew N Completing or Number gateway answering gateway IP Addr IP address where IP Addr IP address where call call originated was completed or answered Descript Identifier of site Descript Identifier of site where call where call was originated completed or answered Options When selected log Options When selected log will not Silence will not use Silence Compression and Compression and Forward Error Forward Error Correction by call Correction by party originator answering call 138 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration r Logs I Enable Console Messages Cancel To use the SMTP Para meters screen SMTP I Tum Off Logs Reporting Method a gs screen must first be selected in the Lo SMTP Parameters SMTP 2 oc SNMP Login Name VOIP UNIT 3 acmetech com Password eo Mail Server IPaddress Port Number F Mail Type C Text Subject ReplyTo Address Recipient Address r Mail Criteria Number of Records T Number of Days m Custom Fields Cancel Help Hora Select Fields a Custom Fields lets the user determine ich technical details ofeach phone call to record in the logs
231. n Echo Y N Determines whether echo cancellation is Cancellation enabled checked for this voice channel Echo Cancellation removes echo and improves sound quality Default on Forward Y N Determines whether forward error Error correction is enabled checked for this Correction voice channel Forward Error Correction enables some of the voice packets that were corrupted or lost to be recovered FEC adds an additional 50 overhead to the total network bandwidth consumed by the voice channel Default Off 82 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description AutoCall Offhook Alert Parameters Auto Call AutoCall The AutoCall option enables the local Offhook Offhook MultiVOIP to call a remote MultiVOIP Alert Alert without the user having to dial a Phone Directory Database number As soon as you access the local MultiVOIP voice fax channel the MultiVOIP immediately connects to the remote MultiVOIP identified in the Phone Number box of this option If the Pass Through Enable field is checked in the Interface Parameters screen AutoCall must be used The Offhook Alert option applies only to FXS channels The Offhook Alert option works like this if a phone goes offhook and yet no number is dialed within a specific period of time as set in the Offhook Alert Timer field then that phone will automaticall
232. n Euro type telephony settings will be the same in format as entries for the MVP3010 231 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide France Country Code 33 Lille Toulouse Marseille 232 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The Netherlands Country Code 31 0294 Weesp 026 e 010 Arnhem Rotterdam 0118 Middelburg 040 Eindhoven 233 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide An outline of the equipment setup in these three offices is shown below Wren Clothing Co London Office Country Code 44 Area Code 0208 PBX ee 5174 200 2 10 3 Z gO 5172 OKO 5171 979 5170 Wren Clothing Co Paris Office Country Code 33 Area Code 01 PBX E1 Digital TR VoIP Wren Clothing Co Amsterdam Office Country Code 31 Area City Code 020 7471 29 81 0 Ip 688 4800 234 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP located in the company s London facility 200 002 009 007 Lyon 200 002 008 005 Amsterdam 200 002 008 005 Rotterdam 200 002 009 007 Paris company office empl extensions 200 002 008 005 Amsterdam company office employees The Inbound PhoneBook for the London VOIP is shown below NOTE Commas are allowed in the Inbound Phonebook but not in the Outbound Phonebook Commas denote a brief pause for a dial tone allowing time for the PBX to
233. n order to resume use of the MultiVOIP unit 1 The MultiVoip configuration program must be off when invoking the Set Password command If it is on the command will not work 316 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 2 To invoke the Set Password command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Set Password Set Program Access and Defaults eS Windows Catalog A Windows Update a Winzip Q Launch RealOne Player BS Configuration gt an Accessories gt B Configuration Port Setup M Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt BB Date and Time Setup 2 Documents b Jasc Software 25 Download CAS Protocol Mozilla Firefox gt Download Factory Defaults Microsoft Office gt 25 Download Firmware D com gt AS Acrobat Distiller 7 0 29 Download User Defaults Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional iE pemletser Mutivor 6 08 gt j5 Uninstall fH MultivoIP 2410 4 08 A Z5 Upgrade Software Programs Settings 3 You will be prompted to confirm that you want to establish a password which will entail rebooting the MultiVOIP which is done automatically Multi OIP Password x Multi VOIP is Up Reboot to set password Cancel Click OK to proceed with establishing a password 4 The Password screen will appear If you intend to use the FTP Server function that is built into the MultiVOIP enter a user name A User Name is not needed to access the local Windows GUI the web browser GUI
234. n outside line from the PBX and then a comma which denotes a pause to get a PSTN dial tone and then the 10 digit phone number which includes the area code 612 for the city of Minneapolis which is different than the area code of the suburb where the PBX is actually located 763 A similar sequence of events occurs when the Baltimore employee calls number in the 651 and 952 area codes because number in both of these area codes are local calls in the Minneapolis St Paul area The simplest case is a cal from Baltimore to a phone within the Minneapolis St Paul area code where the company s voip and PBX are located namely 763 In that case that local voip removes 1763 and dials 9 to direct the call to its local 7 digit PSTN Finally consider the longest entry in the Minneapolis Inbound Phonebook 17637175 Note that the main phone number of the Minneapolis PBX is 763 717 5170 The destination pattern 17637175 means that all calls to Minneapolis employees will stay within the suburban Minneapolis PBX and will not reach or be carried on the local PSTN 192 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Similarly the Inbound PhoneBook for the Baltimore VOIP shown first below generally matches the Outbound PhoneBook of the Minneapolis VOIP shown second below Notice the extended prefix to be removed 14103257 This entry allows Minneapolis users to contact Baltimore co workers as though they were in the Minneapolis fa
235. n the Number of Retransmissions field Shared alpha Client encryption key for the current Secret numeric voip unit Select Gives access to RADIUS Attributes Attributes screen On Attributes screen one can button specify the parameters to be tallied by the RADIUS server for accounting usually billing purposes 160 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The RADIUS Parameters dialog box has a secondary dialog box Custom Fields that allows you to customize accounting information sent to the RADIUS server by the MultiVOIP The MultiVOIP software logs data about many aspects of the call traffic going through the MultiVOIP The Custom Fields screen lets you pick which aspects will be included in the accounting reports sent to the RADIUS server Custom Fields Definitions Field Description Field Description Select All Log report to include all fields shown Channel Data channel Start Date and time the Number carrying call Date phone call began Time Duration Length of call Call Voice or fax Mode Packets Total packets sent Packets Total packets Sent in call Received received in call 161 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Custom Fields Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description Bytes Total bytes sent in Bytes Total bytes received Sent call Received in call Packets Packets lost in Coder
236. nbound Phonebook for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 421 1 Call Completion Summaries Site A calling Site C Method 1 1 Dial 101 2 Hear dial tone from Site B 3 Dial 9435632 4 Await completion Talk Site A calling Site C Method 2 5 Dial 101 9435632 6 Await completion Talk Note Some analog VOIP gateways will allow completion by Method 2 Others will not Site C calling Site A 1 Dial 9436161 2 Hear dial tone from Site B VOIP 3 Dial 201 4 Await completion Talk 246 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Site D calling Site C 1 Dial 901189435632 2 9 gets outside line On some PBXs an 8 may be used to direct calls to the VOIP while 9 directs calls to the PSTN However some PBX units can be programmed to identify the destination patterns of all calls to be directed to the VOIP 3 PBX at Site D is programmed to divert all calls made to the 118 area code and exchange 943 into the VOIP network It would also be possible to divert all calls to all phones in area code 118 into the VOIP network but it may not be desirable to do so 4 The MVP3010 removes the prefix 0118 and adds the prefix 101 for compatibility with the analog MultiVOIP s phonebook scheme The is a delimiter separating the analog VOIP s phone number from the digits that the analog VOIP must dial onto i
237. nd and outbound phonebooks The MVP3010 digital MultiVOIP requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks as well These seven phone books are shown below Phone Book for Analog VOIP Host Unit Site B VOIP Dir IP Address Channel Comments OR Destination Pattern 102 200 2 9 8 2 Site B FXS channel Reading UK 101 200 2 9 8 1 Site B FXO channel Reading UK 201 200 2 9 7 1 Site A FXS channel Birmingham 421 200 2 9 6 0 Site E FXS channel Carlisle UK 018226374 200 2 9 5 0 Gives remote voip users access to key phone Note 3 system extensions at Tavistock office Site F The key system might be arranged either so that calls go through a human operator or through an auto attendant which prompts user to dial the desired extension 0182 200 2 9 5 4 Gives remote voip users access to Tavistock PSTN via FXO port 4 at Site F 3xx 200 2 9 9 0 Allows remote voip users Note 1 to call all PBX extensions at Site D Inner London using only three digits 239 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phone Book for Analog VOIP Host Unit Site B continued VOIP Dir IP Address Channel Comments OR Destination Pattern 0207 200 2 9 9 0 Gives remote voip users XXX Note 2 access to phone numbers XXXX in 0207 area code Inner London in which Site D is located 0208 200 2 9 9 0 Gives remote voip users XXX N
238. nector near the LED edge of the main circuit card Check that pins are straight and evenly spaced If not then correct for straightness and spacing Locate the 60 pin female connector on the upgrade circuit card 12 Set the upgrade circuit card on top of the main circuit card Align the upgrade card s 4 pairs of phone jacks with the 4 pairs of holes in the backplane of the main card Slide the phone jacks into the holes 13 Mate the upgrade card s 60 pin female connector with the main card s 60 pin male connector These screws 4 places attach upgrade card to main card 60 pin connectors Figure C 7 Attaching upgrade card to main circuit card secure 4 Phillips screws mate 60 pin connectors 14 There are four copper plated attachment holes two each at the front and rear edges of the upgrade card Attach the upgrade card to the main card using 4 Phillips screws The upgrade card should now be firmly attached to the main card 15 Slide the main circuit card back into the chassis far enough to allow re connection of power cable 16 Re connect power cable 17 Slide the main circuit card fully into the chassis 18 Re attach the backplane of the main circuit card to the chassis with 3 screws 364 MultiVOIP User Guide Index Index 365 Index INDEX Alternate Phone Number field SPP Bl edis ee See Aa Sees 224 Alternate Phone Number SPP TURE ERA r EEE 181 802 1p Priority Levels 67 68
239. nerated locally while the call is being established between gateways The capability to generate dial tone locally would be particularly useful when there is a lengthy network delay 84 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description AutoCall Offhook Alert Parameters Offhook 0 3000 The length of time that must elapse Alert Timer seconds before the offhook alert is triggered and a call is automatically made to the phone number listed in the Phone Number field Phone Number Phone number used for Auto Call function or Offhook Alert Timer function This phone number must correspond to an entry in the Outbound Phonebook of the local MultiVOIP and in the Inbound Phonebook of the remote MultiVOIP unless a gatekeeper unit is used in the voip system 85 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Dynamic Jitter Dynamic Dynamic Jitter defines a minimum Jitter Buffer and a maximum jitter value for voice communications When receiving voice packets from a remote MultiVOIP varying delays between packets may occur due to network traffic problems This is called Jitter To compensate the MultiVOIP uses a Dynamic Jitter Buffer The Jitter Buffer enables the MultiVOIP to wait for delayed voice packets by automatical
240. network but serves client voips ona public network The Proxy NAT device isolates protects the registrar voip Proxy NAT Device from the public network In such cases you must check the Enable SPP Proxy NAT device checkbox Public IP Client Voip Public IP Public IP Client Voip Public IP Public IP in the Phonebook Configuration screen of the Registrar voip The private registrar voip can then function with the client voips using the public IP address of the Proxy NAT device You must enter this address in the Public IP Address field 120 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 11 Set SNMP Parameters Remote Voip Management This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar To make the MultiVOIP controllable by a remote PC running the MultiVoipManager software check the Enable SNMP Agent box on the SNMP Parameters screen Accessing SNMP Parameters Pulldown Icon gt Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I voice Channels Ctrl H TIsE1sISDN Parameters Ctri T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl M Yoice Fax Call Signaling T1JE1 ISDN Regional 121 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In each field enter the value
241. nfiguration Ethernet IP Yoice Fax Call Signaling TI E1 ISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services em Information Advanced 165 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide This screen presents vital system information at a glance Its primary use is in troubleshooting System Information Version Information Boot Version Firmware Version IFM Version Configuration Yersion Phone Book Version 1 03 1 07 06 6 07 00 00 4 04 9 MAC Address Uptime Hardware ID Exit FFFFFFFFFFFF 01 03 42 22 gt MY P130 4 rev A BBB8 System Information Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Boot nn nn Indicates the version of the code that Version is used at the startup booting of the voip The boot code version is independent of the software version Firmware alpha Indicates version of MultiVOIP Version numeric firmware 166 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration System Information Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Configur nn nn nn Indicates version of MultiVOIP ation nn Configuration software which Version alpha includes screens for IP Parameters numeric SNMP Parameters SMTP Parameters Regional Parameters etc Phone Book numeric Indicates the version of the inbound Ver
242. nfiguration T1 E1 MultiVOIP User Guide 7 On the next screen you can select the COM port that the command PC will use when communicating with the MultiVoip unit After software installation the COM port can be re set in the MultiVOIP Software from the sidebar menu select Connection Settings to access the COM Port Setup screen or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl G Multi Tech Systems F i Model gi A Multi VOIP Setup has detected the followin a EMS Versions os 9 Command Ports Enter the Command Port to be used Ali configured COM ports in the command PC will be displayed The COM port setting can be changed after installation in the COM Port Setup dialog box Connection COM Port Setup Connect Select Pot COM1 a Baud Rate 115200 z Modem Setup 419200 Init String Int Response 0 Dial String Connect Response CONNECT Hengup String ATHO NOTE If there is a Dial String specified in Modem Setup Configuration programs will try to initialize modem and dial this string NOTE If the COM port setting made here conflicts with the actual COM Multi OIP___ COM port resources available in the command PC this error message will appear when the MultiVOIP program is launched If this occurs you must reset the COM port Error in Opencomm handle 44 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling 8 A completion screen will appear Multi Tech System
243. ng Count field Uncondit Busy No Resp Forwarding can be conditioned on both Busy and No Response Forward Destination IP address phone number port number etc Phone number or IP address to which calls will be directed For H 323 calls the Forward Destination can be either a Phone Number or an IP Address For SIP calls the Forward Destination can be one of the following a phone number b IP address c IP address port number d phone number IP addr port number e SIP URL or f phone IP address For SPP calls the Forward Destination can be one of the following a phone number b IP address port or c phone number IP address port 187 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values and Description Ring Count 0 1 2 3 etc When No Response is condition for forwarding calls this determines how many unanswered rings are needed to trigger the forwarding Registration In an H 323 voip system gateways can Option register with the system using one of these Parameters identifiers a an E 164 identifier b a Tech Prefix identifier or c an H 323 ID identifier In a SIP voip system gateways can register with the SIP Proxy In an SPP voip system gateways can register with the SPP Registrar voip unit 5 When your Outbound and Inboun
244. ng Count field Forwarding can be conditioned on both Busy and No Response 229 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Forward Phone number or IP address to which calls Destination will be directed IP address For H 323 calls the Forward Destination can phone number be either a Phone Number of an IP Address port number For SIP calls the Forward Destination can be etc one of the following a phone number b IP address c IP address port number d phone number IP addr port number e SIP URL or f phone IP address For SPP calls the Forward Destination can be one of the following a phone number b IP address port or c phone number IP address port Ring Count integer When No Response is condition for forwarding calls this determines how many unanswered rings are needed to trigger the forwarding Registration In an H 323 voip system gateways can Option register with the system using one of these Parameters identifiers a an E 164 identifier b a Tech Prefix identifier or c an H 323 ID identifier In a SIP voip system gateways can register with the SIP Proxy In an SPP voip system gateways can register with the SPP Registrar voip unit 5 When your Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries are completed
245. ng the MultiVOIP web browser GUI Only one password can be assigned and it works for all MultiVOIP software functions Windows GUI web browser GUI FTP server and all Program menu commands e g Upgrade Software only the FTP Server function requires a User Name in addition to the password After a password has been set that password is required to access the MultiVOIP web browser GUI NOTE Record your user name and password in a safe place If the password is lost forgotten or unretrievable the user must contact MultiTech Tech Support in order to resume use of the MultiVOIP web browser GUI a Multi OIP 2410 v4 03 Firmware Sep 06 2002 Microsoft Internet Explorer gt S Fie Edit View Favorite Bak Address http 192 168 2 200 a MultiVOIP 2410 Configuration Phone Book Statistics Change Passi Save amp Reboo Logout Help Old Password Cancel New Password Reconfirm Password 320 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Un Installing the MultiVOIP Software 1 To un install the MultiVOIP configuration software go to Start Programs and locate the MultiVOIP entry Select Uninstall MVP vx xx versions may vary Set Program Access and Defaults E windows Catalog Windows Update WinZip Launch RealOne Player B Configuration Programs 2 Documents Settings Search Help and Support gt fan Accessories gt B Configuration Port Setup
246. nistrator must handle two styles of phonebooks in the same VOIP network The diagram below shows a small scale system of this kind one digital VOIP the MVP3010 operates with two Series II analog VOIPs an MVP210 and an MVP410 and two Series I legacy VOIPs two MVP200 units EXAMPLE Se Digital amp Analog VOIPs Inner London UK in Same System Area Code 0207 va 200 2 9 9 Digital VoIP MVP3010 FR oinerenensions R x8301 x8399 F 020 7398 8300 7 Site E ito A Carlisle UK E He eae UK ae ee ee nass Area Code 0121 Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Server Client Phonebook Unit l 1 l 1 1 200 cm PS YO 1 I 200 2 9 7 201 faa ae eee Client i ct cet eee ote Site F Site B ite B a Tavistock UK Reading Berkshire UK A APAOR I TN Area Code 0178 200 2 9 5 SSS AS WS N penn nnn eens I Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Server Client Phonebook MVP200 Unit 100 as 200 2 9 8 Host Holds phonebook for both Series 1 analog VOIPs R Other extensions 7401 x7429 Re 1 y 1 N s 2974o 3 a 7 118 943 5632 ite C Reading Area Residential 238 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The Series I analog VOIP phone book resides in the Host VOIP unit at Site B It applies to both of the Series I analog VOIP units Each of the Series II analog MultiVOIPs the MVP210 and the MVP410 requires its own inbou
247. nitions cont d Field Name Values Description Country country name MultiVOIP units operating with the Selection for X 06 software release and above include a built in modem The Built In administrator can dial into this modem Modem to configure the MultiVOIP unit not applicable remotely The country name values in to MVP this field set telephony parameters that 130 130EXS allow the modem to work in the listed country This value may be different MVP210 than the Country Region value For MVP410ST or example a user may need to choose MVP810ST Europe as the Country Region value but Denmark as the Country Selection for Built In Modem value User Defined Tones fields Type column alphanumeric Name of supervisory tone pair name specified Cannot be same as name of any by user standard tone pair Frequency 1 freq in Hertz Lower frequency of pair Frequency 2 freq in Hertz Higher frequency of pair Gain 1 gain in dB Amplification factor of lower 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute setting This applies to any supervisory tones that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the FXS FXS or E amp M port Default 16dB Gain 2 gain in dB Amplification factor of higher 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute setting This applies to any supervisory tones that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the FXS FXO or E amp M port Default 16dB Cadence n n n n On off pattern
248. nsions of the Site D PBX using three digits beginning with 3 Note 4 9 gives PBX station users access to outside line Note 5 The comma represents a one second pause the time required for the user to receive a dial tone on the outside line PSTN Commas can be used in the Inbound Phonebook but not in the Outbound Phonebook 242 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Birmingham 01189 0118 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Reading area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Reading 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Carlisle 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to Inner London area PSTN via Site D PBX 0208 200 2 9 9 Calls to Inner London area PSTN via Site D PBX 3 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to Inner 398 London PBX 8 extensions with three digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 243 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix N
249. nsmit For use by MTS personnel Data Overflow Transmit The frequency of the transmit clock is Slip Positive less than the frequency of the transmit system interface working clock A frame is repeated Yellow Tally since last The alarm signal sent by a remote T1 E1 Alarm reset device to indicate that it sees no receive signal or cannot synchronize on the receive signal Status Signaling has been frozen at the most Freeze recent values due to loss of frame Signaling alignment loss of multiframe alignment Active or due to a receive slip Loss of Tally since last In D4 or ESF mode displayed value will MultiFrame reset increment if multiframe alignment has Alignment been lost or if loss of frame alignment has been detected Receive The time slot 16 data stream contains all Timeslot 16 zeros for at least 16 contiguously received Loss of time slots Signal 285 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide E1 Statistics Field Definitions cont d Excessive Zeroes Transmit Slip Field Values Description Name Receive The framing pattern 0000 in 2 Timeslot 16 consecutive CAS multiframes were not Loss of found or in all time slot 16 of the previous MultiFrame multiframe all bits were reset Alignment Transmit At least 32 consecutive zeroes were Line Open transmitted Transmit For use by MTS Technical Support Data Personnel Underrun Transmit The frequency of the tran
250. nt backup unit in case one voip unit fails The user must specify the IP address of the alternate route for each destination pattern entry in the Outbound Phonebook Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Phone Number Details Destination Pattern Total Digits jo Remove Prefix Add Prefix IP Address Description Alternate Routing Alternate IP Address Round Trip Delay 182 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Alternate Routing Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Alternate n n n n Alternate destination for outbound data traffic IP where in case of excessive delay in data transmission Address n 0 255 Round milliseconds The Round Trip Delay is the criterion for Trip judging when a data pathway is considered Delay blocked When the delay exceeds the threshold specified here the data stream will be diverted to the alternate destination specified as the Alternate IP Address The Alternate Routing function facilitates PSTN Failover protection that is it allows you to re route voip calls automatically over the PSTN if the voip system fails The MultiVOIP can be programmed to respond to excessive delays in the transmission of voice packets which the MultiVOIP interprets as a failure of the IP network Upon detecting an excessive delay in transmission of voice packets overly high latency in the network the MultiVOIP diverts the call to anothe
251. ntees 264 About IP Statistics ccccccccccccccsesscccecesscsscececececsessaeceeececsesesnesecececeesennsaeeeeeceenensees 271 About Link Management ccscccescceeseceseceeseceseeeeacecusceeeaceceaceeeaeeceseeeeaeeceaeeesaes 276 About Registered Gateway Details ccccccccessceseceseceecnseesecnsecsecseeeeeseensees 287 About Alternate Server Statistics cccccccccccccccccssesscccccecscsssusceeececsesaeceeeeeesessnneees 290 About Packe tization Time ccccccccccccccsessecccececssssssececececsesesnscecececsesesnsseceeeseseseees 294 MULTIVOIP PROGRAM MENU ITEMS ssccesceecsseceeceeceseceeeeeceaeceeeeecsaeceeeeecaeensees 297 Configuration Opt On sissi seasons iia cas E Ea enai ESE SEE E siana 299 Configuration Port SCtup scccsccescesecsseerseeseeeeeseeeeseesecesecsecseceaecaaecaecaeenaeens 299 Date and Time Setup serni eaaa ie Goatees E a ES aE E S ES 300 Obtaining Updated Firmware seeseessesseseeesesesesreesssrreresrrrsresresereresesereeseseeses 300 Implementing a Software Upgrade sccecccscccseeesseeeceeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeseceseensesnaeenas 304 Identifying Current Firmware Version cccccceesesesseeseeseeseeseeecseseeseeseeseeeeeeaeeaes 304 Downloading Firmware sce cc ccscccscsssvecscovessdesecceasnsscecsnacescancvocecaesaesccbsnceacsvebscsesvesndenes Downloading CAS Protocol 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeereee Downloading Factory Defaults Setting and Downloading User Defaults cccsccesceeseeseeseereeeeeeeeeeee
252. ol used in Multi Tech s earlier generation of voip gateways SPP offers advantages in certain situations especially when firewalls are used and when dynamic IP address assignment is needed However when SPP is used certain features of SIP and H 323 will not be available and SPP will not inter operate with voip systems using H 323 or SIP Data Compression amp Quality of Service The MultiVOIP MVP2410 comes equipped with a variety of data compression capabilities including G 723 G 729 and G 711 and features DiffServ quality of service QoS capabilities VOIP Functions The MultiVOIP MVP2410 gateway performs four basic functions a it converts a dialed number into an IP address b it sends voice over the data network c it establishes a connection with another VOIP gateway at a remote site and d it receives voice over the data network Voice is handled as IP packets with a variety of compression options Each T1 connection to the MultiVOIP provides 24 time slot channels to connect to the telco or to serve phone or fax stations connected to a PBX Ports The MVP2410 has one 10 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN interface and one Command port for configuration An MVP2410 upgraded with the MVP24 48 kit will have two Ethernet LAN interfaces and two Command ports PSTN Failover Feature The MultiVOIP can be programmed to divert calls to the PSTN temporarily in case the IP network fails 10 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview RADIUS Suppor
253. on The IP Datagram with Header Its Type of Service field amp DiffServ bits gt 0 4 8 16 19 24 31 VERS HLEN TYPE OF TOTAL LENGTH IDENTIFICATION FLAGS FRAGMENT OFFSET TIME TO LIVE PROTOCOL HEADER CHECKSUM SOURCE IP ADDRESS DESTINATION IP ADDRESS IP OPTIONS if any PADDING end of header DATA The TOS field consists of eight bits of which only the first six are used These six bits are called the Differentiated Service Codepoint or DSCP bits The Type of Service or TOS field 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PRECEDENCE D T R unused three precedence have eight values 0 7 ranging from normal precedence value of 0 to network control value of 7 When set the D bit requests low delay the T bit requests high throughput and the R bit requests high reliability Routers that support DiffServ can examine the six DSCP bits and prioritize the packet based on the DSCP value The DiffServ Parameters fields in the MultiVOIP IP Parameters screen allow you to configure the DSCP bits to values supported by the router Specifically the Voip Media PHB field relates to the prioritizing of audio packets RTP and RTCP packets and the Call Control PHB field relates to the prioritzing of non audio packets packets concerning call set up and tear down gatekeeper registration etc The MultiVOIP Call Control PHB parameter defaults to 34 decimal 22 hex 100010 binary con
254. on and IP Addresses Both the controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit s must be connected to the same IP network An IP address must be assigned for each IP Address of Control PC IP Address of voip unit 1 IP address of voip unit n 2 Establish User Name and Password You must establish a user name and optionally a password for contacting the voip over the IP network When connection is made via a local serial connection between the PC and the voip unit no user name is needed ZJ MultiVOIP 2410 v4 03 Firmware Sep 06 2002 Microsoft Internet Explorer m File Edit View Favorite Back z Address http 192 168 2 200 a MultiVOIP 2410 gt Configuration Multi ec i Phone Book Systems Statistics Change Pass Save amp Reboo Logout Current Permission Read Write Help Password Change Old Password New Password Reconfirm Password As shown above the username and password can be set in the web GUI as well as in the Windows GUI 325 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 Install FTP Client Program or Use Substitute You should install an FTP client program on the controller PC FTP file transfers can be done using a web browser e g Netscape or Internet Explorer in conjunction with a local Windows browser a e g Windows Explorer but this approach is somewhat clumsy it requires use of two application programs rather than one and it limits downlo
255. on rates coder options and eee 294 Packets Lost call progress field 259 Packets Lost RADIUS Attributes Packets Lost SMTP logs field 137 Packets lost statistics logs field 268 Packets Received call progress field BNE cas ee ete Te ace ast tcnn 259 Packets Received RADIUS Attributes field eee 161 Packets Received SMTP logs field BNE reheated E EEE EA 136 Packets received statistics logs field BNE A AEA E E 268 Packets Sent call progress field 259 Packets Sent RADIUS Attributes Packets Sent SMTP logs field 136 Packets sent statistics logs field 268 packets consecutive lost 88 Parallel H 245 field oo eee 113 parameters tracked by console 143 Password proxy server field 116 Password SMTP field 135 password lost forgotten 316 320 password setting 316 web browser GUI 320 PALMS os ces seee reaa EE 2 PBX characteristics variations in l A EE eaten 249 A a EE E 207 PBX interaction El model Sienen 17 Thmod lSs ceren eas 9 PC command COM port assignment detailed 44 PCM Law field Bi ets soc aveet a EN 106 TDD be acsetes E tes eases 98 Permissions SNMP field 123 personnel requirement for rack installation 0 0000 34 Index to lift during installation 35 to lift unit during installation 31 Phone Book Version System Mfo eresio eree 167 Ph
256. on your system To select the MultiVOIP User Guide from the Multi Tech Systems home page click Documents and then click MultiVOIP Family in the product list drop down window All documents for this MultiVOIP Product Family will be displayed You can then choose User Guide MultiVOIP Product Family to view or download the pdf file Entries organized by model number in the knowledge base and troubleshooting resolutions sections of the MultiTech web site found under Support constitute another source of help for problems encountered in the field 27 Chapter 2 Quick Start Instructions 28 MultiVOIP User Guide Quick Start Instructions The Quick Start Guide is a separate manual with streamlined instructions to get the MultiVOIP up and running quickly These start up instructions include assistance on setting up the MultiVOIP s Inbound and Outbound Phonebooks These sections of the Quick Start Guide may be particularly useful for phonebook configuration Phonebook Starter Configuration Phonebook Tips Phonebook Example One Common Situation The Quick Start Guide also contains a Phonebook Worksheet section You may want to print out several worksheet copies Paper copies can be very helpful in comparing phonebooks at multiple sites at a glance This will assist you in making the phonebooks clear and consistent and will reduce surfing between screens on the configuration program A printed Quick Star
257. one Number Voice FAX AutoCall Offhook Alert field 85 Phone Signaling Tones amp Cadences dations E EEEE ET 124 phone switch types ISDN implementations in 107 phone IP details importance of writing down 53 phonebook FTP remote file transfers 324 phonebook configuration 50 phonebook configuration remote 324 Phonebook Configuration icon Bd ERRE E A EEAS 216 Tid R E E ARE 173 Phonebook Configuration Procedure Bd ERR EEA EE 215 TA sess tee E EAS 172 Phonebook Configuration screen Ti RE EN EREA 172 phonebook entries coordinating Bl E E E ESE 215 Tie a 172 phonebook icons Bl ean E EE ee 216 Te ie Ame Al 173 phonebook keyboard shortcuts Bl ist c E E E ek 217 Tl seaicaetaaiiainaltee 174 phonebook objectives amp considerations BL einen E EE 214 phonebook pulldown menu Li ccna ee aa ay 217 Dil EEA EET 174 phonebook sidebar menu A E E E EEE 217 A aa EE E 174 phonebooks inbound vs outbound Bl E E ET 214 TLhssaisitentucghindven ach aces 171 phonebooks objectives amp considerations Thaitin ae 171 384 MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebooks objectives amp considerations j m AEA E E EE OO 209 Ping Size in Bytes Link Management field 278 Pings per Test Link Management Held ai a r eerie 278 pinout BRI connector cceeeeeeeeeeeeee 356 command cable c ceeee 353 ethernet cable cceeeeeeee 353 TI E1 conn
258. onjunction with a proxy server 114 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SIP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description SIP Proxy Parameters Allow Y N When selected incoming calls Incoming Calls are accepted only if those calls Through SIP come through the gatekeeper Proxy Only Primary Proxy This is the preferred SIP proxy server for controlling the traffic of the current voip Alternate ae A first and a second alternate SIP Proxy 1 and 2 proxy server can be specified for use by the current voip for situations where the Primary proxy server is busy or otherwise unavailable Proxy Domain n n n n Network address of the proxy Name IP where server that the voip is using Address n 0 255 Append SIP Y N When checked the domain Proxy Domain Name in User ID name of the SIP Proxy serving the MultiVOIP gateway will be included as part of the User ID for that gateway If unchecked the SIP Proxy s IP address will be included as part of the User ID instead of the SIP Proxy s domain name Port Number Logical port number for proxy communications User Name Values alphanumeric Description Identifier used when proxy server is used in network If a proxy server is used in a SIP voip network all clients must enter both a User Name and a Password before being allowed to make a call 115 Technic
259. only when the Answer Delay Timer expires The connection notice is sent regardless of whether or not the called extension has gone offhook Answer Delay numeric When Answer Delay is enabled this value determines when the FXS interface sends the connection notice 102 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration E1 Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Para FXS Ground Start Supervision meters Tone Detection Enable Y N After a specified tone chosen from the Available Tones list coming from the PBX is stopped the FXS interface will send the connect signal to the calling party Available Tones List Busy Tone Dial Tone Reorder Tone Survivability Dial Tone Unobtainable Tone List from which tones can be chosen to signal call answer Answer Tones Busy Tone Dial Currently chosen call answer List Tone Reorder Tone supervision tone Survivability Dial Tone Unobtainable Tone ISDN Parameters Field Name Values Description Enable Y N If digital connection is ISDN ISDN PRI PRI type this box should be checked When ISDN is enabled the CAS Protocols field is grayed out ISDN has its own signaling method Terminal either When Terminal is selected it Network Terminal or indicates that the MultiVOIP Network should emulate the subscriber terminal side of the digital
260. ore a SysLog client program is used the SysLog functionality must be enabled within the MultiVOIP in the Logs menu under Configuration The IP Address used will be that of the MultiVOIP itself In the Port field entered by default is the standard well known logical port 514 341 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Configuring the SysLog Client Program Configure the SysLog client program for your own needs In various SysLog client programs you can define where log messages will be saved archived opt for interaction with an SNMP system like MultiVoipManager set the content and format of log messages determine disk space allocation limits for log messages and establish a hierarchy for the seriousness of messages normal alert critical emergency etc A sample presentation of SysLog info in the Kiwi daemon is shown below SysLog programs will vary in features and presentation Kiwi Syslog Daemon Registered version 7 0 2 Display 00 Default Time Priority Hostname Message 17 02 08 Syslog Warning 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0020 17 02 07 Local0 Debug 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0019 17 02 06 Local5 Alert 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0018 17 02 06 System4 Debug 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0017 17 02 04 Local3 Info 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test message number 0016 17 02 03 Lpr Critical 127 0 0 1 This is Syslog test messag
261. ork address that allows for sharing of IP addresses within a LAN Gateway 4 places 0 255 The IP address of the device that connects your MultiVOIP to the Internet 69 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description DiffServ Parameter fields DiffServ PHB Per Hop Behavior values pertain to a differential prioritizing system for IP packets as handled by DiffServ compatible routers There are 64 values each with an elaborate technical description These descriptions are found in TCP IP standards RFC2474 RFC2597 and for present purposes in RFC3246 which describes the value 34 34 decimal 22 hex for Assured Forwarding behavior default for Call Control PHB and the value 46 46 decimal 2E hexadecimal for Expedited Forwarding behavior default for Voip Media PHB Before using values other than these default values of 34 and 46 consult these standards documents and or a qualified IP telecommunications engineer To disable DiffServ configure both fields to 0 decimal The next page explains DiffServ in the context of the IP datagram Call Control PHB Value is used to prioritize call setup IP packets 0 63 default 34 Voip Media PHB 0 63 default 46 n Value is used to prioritize the RTP RTCP audio IP packets 70 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configurati
262. ot on which the call is carried This is the channel for which call progress details are being viewed Call Details Duration Hours The length of the call in hours Minutes minutes and seconds hh mm ss Seconds Mode Voice or FAX Indicates whether the call being described was a voice call or a FAX call Voice Coder G 723 G 729 The voice coder being used on G 711 etc this call IP Call Type H 323 SIP or Indicates the Call Signaling SPP protocol used for the call H 323 SIP or SPP IP Call incoming Indicates whether the call in Direction outgoing question is an incoming call or an outgoing call 258 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Call Progress Details Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Packet Details Packets Sent integer value The number of data packets sent over the IP network in the course of this call Packets Revd integer value The number of data packets received over the IP network in the course of this call Bytes Sent integer value The number of bytes of data sent over the IP network in the course of this call Bytes Revd integer value The number of bytes of data received over the IP network in the course of this call Packets Lost integer value The number of voice packets from this call that were lost after being received from the IP network 259 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Call P
263. ote 2 access to phone numbers XXXX in 0208 area code Outer London for which calls are local from Site D Inner London Note 1 The x is a wildcard character Note 2 By specifying Channel 0 we instruct the MVP3010 to choose any available data channel to carry the call Note 3 Note that Site F key system has only 30 extensions x7400 7429 This destination pattern 018226374 actually directs calls to 402 263 7430 through 402 263 7499 into the key system as well This means that such calls which belong on the PSTN cannot be completed In some cases this might be inconsequential because an entire exchange fully used or not might have been reserved for the company or it might be unnecessary to reach those numbers However to specify only the 30 lines actually used by the key system the destination pattern 018226374 would have to be replaced by three other destination patterns namely 0182263740 0182263741 and 0182263742 In this way calls to 0182 263 7430 through 0182 263 7499 would be properly directed to the PSTN In the Site D outbound phonebook the 30 lines are defined exactly that is without making any adjacent phone numbers unreachable through the voip system 240 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The Outbound PhoneBook of the MVP3010 is shown below Outbound Phone Book for MVP3010 Digital VOIP Site D Destin
264. outputs as audio to the FXS FXS or E amp M port Default 16dB Gain 2 gain in dB Amplification factor of higher 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute This applies to the dial ring busy setting and unobtainable fast busy tones that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the FXS FXO or E amp M port Default 16dB Cadence n n n n On off pattern of tone durations msec On Off four integer time used to denote phone ringing values in phone busy connection milli seconds unobtainable fast busy dial tone zero value for 0 indicates continuous tone dial tone survivability and re order Default indicates values differ for different continuous tone countries regions Although most cadences have only two parts an on duration and an off duration some telephony cadences have four parts Most cadences then are expressed as two iterations of a two part sequence Although this is redundant it is necessary to allow for expression of 4 part cadences Custom Click on the Custom button to button bring up the Custom Tone Pair Settings screen The Custom button is active only when Custom is selected in the Country Region field This screen allows the user to specify tone pair attributes that are not found in any of the standard national regional telephony toning schemes 128 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Regional Parameter Defi
265. ower than direct communications over a serial PC cable command execution will be somewhat slower over the web browser GUI than with the Windows GUI 339 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide SysLog Server Functions MultiTech has built SysLog server functionality into the software of the MultiVOIP units SysLog is a de facto standard for logging events in network communication systems The SysLog Server resides in the MultiVOIP unit itself To implement this functionality you will need a SysLog client program sometimes referred to as a daemon SysLog client programs both paid and freeware can be obtained from Kiwi Enterprises among other firms Read the End User License Agreement carefully and observe license requirements See www kiwisyslog com SysLog client programs essentially give you a means of structuring console messages for convenience and ease of use MultiTech Systems does not endorse any particular SysLog client program SysLog client programs by qualified providers should suffice for use with MultiVOIP units Kiwi s brief description of their SysLog program is as follows Kiwi Syslog Daemon is a freeware Syslog Daemon for the Windows platform It receives logs displays and forwards Syslog messages from hosts such as routers switches Unix hosts and any other syslog enabled device There are many customizable options available 340 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Bef
266. pleted terminated this call IP Address X X X X IP address of the VOIP gateway where x has a at which the call was completed range of 0 to 255 terminated Options Displays VOIP transmission options used by the VOIP gateway terminating the call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression 269 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Supplementary Services Info Call Transferred phone number Number of party called in To string transfer Call Forwarded phone number Number of party called in To string forwarding 270 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance About IP Statistics Accessing IP Statistics Pulldown Icon SEES Connection Help Call Progress Ctrl Alt 4 Logs Ctrl 0 lag T1 E1 Statistics Ctrlt 1 Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt W k F ean aoe IP Statistics Details Alternate Servers Ctrlt alt 4 gt Shortcut Sidebar Statistics Call Progress Ctrl P Logs IP Statistics Link Management T1JE1 Statistics Registered Gatew Servers 271 Operation and Maintenance IP Statistics Screen IP Statistics IP Address MultiVOIP User Guide r Total Packets Transmitted Received UDP Packets Transmitted Received Received with Errors m TCP Packets Transmitted Retransmitted Received
267. querncy 2 Custom Tene Pas Semings Iepa Distoe Tore Par Vaes Coderce 1 Frequency 30 Hz Cadence 0 These tone Hie entrees f pairs serve the same PEE RC Gain is B Cadences standard tones but use different frequencies Cadence Remote Configuration Command Modem Each MVP2410 and MVP3010 MultiVOIP unit contains a built in modem This modem allows the MultiVOIP to be configured remotely when a standard POTS line is connected to the Command Modem connector on the back panel of the MultiVOIP In the Country Selection for Built In Modem field drop down list select the country that best fits your situation This may not be the same as your selection for the Country Region field The selections in the Country Selection for Built In Modem field entail more detailed groupings of telephony parameters than do the Country Region values In each field enter the values that fit your particular system 125 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Regional Parameters fields are described in the table below Regional Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Country USA Japan UK Name of a country or region that Region Custom uses a certain set of tone pairs for dial tone ring tone busy tone unobtainable tone fast busy tone survivability tone tone heard briefly 2 seconds after going offhook denoting surviva
268. r 8l Max Baud Rate field 08 79 Max Retransmission SPP General Options field oo eee 118 maximum cable span Es ee era eet an re PER 100 A DA eee ener eee 92 Maximum Jitter Value field 87 Minimum Jitter Value field 86 Mode call progress field 258 Mode Fax field cccecceeeseeeeeee 80 Mode SPP field cecceeseeeeee 118 Mode statistics logs field 266 model descriptions El enmir oa gees 17 modem relay eee eee ese eeeeeees 87 modem traffic on voip network 87 modem command and Regional Parameters Country Selection cece 59 125 modem remote configuration command Setup FOF eee eeeeeeeeeeenes 59 125 Monitor Link fields Link Management Statistics SCTCOD 2055 itusdscdestonscereectees 278 mounting El models ccsccseenseesesseeeness 17 Fl Mmodelss 3 uscesa sche etea 9 mounting in rack sses 33 procedure fOF eceeceeereeeees 35 Sabety are aes eek sate 31 34 mounting OPTIONS eee eee sete eeeeee 8 Multiplexed UDP field 0 000 113 MultiVOIP configuration software Index El models 0 cecccceeeseceeeeees 19 T1 models cc ccceceeeeeeeeees 11 MultiVOIP FAQ on MTS web site 7 MultiVOIP Program Menu items 297 MultiVOIP Program Menu options Configuration 297 Configuration Port Setup 297 Date amp Time Setup eee 297 Downlo
269. r s responsibility to dispose of their waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or where you purchased the product 351 Appendix A Cable Pinouts 352 MultiVOIP User Guide Cable Pinouts Appendix A Cable Pinouts Command Cable RJ 45 Connector End to End Pin Info RJ 45 DB9F PIN NO PIN NO CLEARTOSEND To DTE TRANSMIT DATA Device Receive pata 9 PC To Command Port Connector SIGNAL GROUND RJ 45 connector plugs into Command Port of Multi VOIP DB 9 connector plugs into serial port of command PC which runs MultiVOIP configuration software Ethernet Connector The functions of the individual conductors of the MultiVOIP s Ethernet port are shown on a pin by pin basis below RJ 45 Ethernet Connector Pin Circuit Signal Name 1 TD Data Transmit Positive C2230 TS 2 TD Data Transmit Negative 3 RD Data Receive Positive 6 RD Data Receive Negative 353 Cable Pinouts MultiVOIP User Guide T
270. r Hook or not the MultiVOIP responds to hook flash signals Detection Time 100 1500 Minimum hook flash time that milliseconds will be interpreted as a valid flash by the MultiVOIP Generation 100 1500 In some systems a MultiVOIP Time milliseconds might receive a hook flash signal from an upstream device a PBX voip or other device and must replicate it to a downstream device This parameter determines the duration of the hook flash signal that is passed to a downstream device Clocking External Internal Set opposite to telco PBX setting Example if telco clocking internal set VOIP clocking as external 105 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide E1 Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Line Coding AMI B8ZS Match to PBX or telco PCM Law A Law Mu Law Match to PBX or telco Mu law is analog to digital compression expansion standard used in North America A law is European standard Yellow Alarm Bit 2 1111 Depending on the Frame Format Format used there are choices of Yellow Alarm format as follows D4 Bit2 0 in every speech channel FS bit of frame 12 is forced to one ESF Bit2 0 in every speech channel 1111111100000000 pattern in data link channel Check with your PBX telco administrator for the correct setting or use the default value 1111 106 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configur
271. r GUI for configuration and control of MultiVOIP units be aware that the web browser GUI does not support logs directly However when the web browser GUI is used log files can still be sent to the voip administrator via email which requires activating the SMTP logging option in this screen Logs m Console Message Settings lV Enable Console Messages Filters Cancel Logs I Tum Off Logs GUI C SMTP C SNMP SysLog Server V Enable IP Address Port 514 Online Statistics Updation Interval 5 Sec 141 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable Y N Allows MultiVOIP debugging messages to be Console read via a basic terminal program like Messages HyperTerminal or equivalent Normally this should be disabled because it uses MultiVOIP processing resources Console messages are meant for tech support personnel Filters button Click to access secondary screen on where console messages can be included excluded by category and on a per channel basis See the Console Messages Filter Settings screen on subsequent page Turn Off Logs Y N Check to disable log reporting function Logs Buttons Only one of these three log reporting methods GUI SMTP or SNMP may be chosen GUI Y N User must view logs at the MultiVOIP configuration program SNMP Y N Log messag
272. r IP address which itself is connected to the PSTN for example via an FXO port on the self same MultiVOIP could be connected to the PSTN Call completed Call diverts to Alt IP address in voip PSTN Line via PSTN accessing ine FXO KR vor Reon VOIP PBX ne IP network fails Call originates PSTN Failover Feature The MultiVOIP can be programmed to divert calls to the PSTN temporarily in case the IP network fails 183 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 3 Select Inbound PhoneBook List Entries Multi oIP Multi OIP v6 07 C7 Firmware Sep 16 2004 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help ABBSEPRABES VMSD E Configuration Ethernet IP Voice Fax Interface Call Signaling SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information Advanced Phone Book Outbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry E Inbound Phone Book List En Add Entry Edit Entry Statistics Save Setup Connection Help Forward Address Number of Entries 11 r Details Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Nab bane ChannelNo 1 Description r Registration Options r H323 l SIP Register as Register With SIP Proxy E164 Tech Prefix SPP H323 ID Register With SPP Registrar m
273. r modify it at any time by launching the MultiVOIP program from the Windows Start menu 1 Check Power and Cabling Be sure the MultiVOIP is turned on and connected to the computer via the MultiVOIP s Command Port DB9 connector at computer s COM port RJ45 connector at MultiVOIP 2 Start MultiVOIP Configuration Program Launch the MultiVOIP program from the Windows Start menu from the folder location determined during installation Configuration Port Setup Programs B Date and Time Setup 2 Download Factory Defaults Z5 Download Firmware Settings 2 Download IFM Firmware 2 Download User Defaults Documents Search B Set Password Help and Support B Uninstall 2 Upgrade Software 60 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 3 Confirm Connection If the MultiVOIP is set for an available COM port and is correctly cabled to the PC the MultiVOIP main screen will appear If the main screen appears grayed out and seems inaccessible go to step 4 ulti OIP 61 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In the lower left corner of the screen the connection status of the MultiVOIP will be displayed The messages in the lower left corner will change as detection occurs The message MultiVOIP Found confirms that the MultiVOIP is in contact with the MultiVOIP configuration program Skip to step 5 Looking for Response from MultiVolP Please Wait C E E E E e E E E E E E Read
274. ral office switch FXS Options No Response Timer 1 65535 in seconds Length of time before call connection attempt is abandoned Applicable only when FXS CAS protocol is selected 93 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide r TIZE1 ISDN Parameters T71 CEH J Long Haul Mode M CRC Check Frame Format ESF Ms CAS Protocol FXS Ground Start E FXS Ground Start E amp M Immediate MFR2 China Line Build Out fo dB Pulse Shape Level 0 to 40m X Supervision Help r CallerlD I Enable Calling Number Prefiy OK Cancel M FXS Ground Start Supervision IV Answer Delay Available Tones BusyT one DialT one ReorderT one Survivability DialT one UnobtainableT one Answer Delay Timer 12 secs 2 al OK Cancel RingTone When the FXS Ground Start CAS Protocol is used a secondary screen can be accessed via the Supervision button to set these FXS parameter values Answer Tones Field Name T1 Parameter Definitions Values Description Parameters Answer Delay Y N Enable FXS Ground Start Supervision When this option is selected the FXS interface sends the connection notice to the calling party only when the Answer Delay Timer expires The connection notice is sent regardless of whether or not the called extension has gone offhook Answer Delay Timer numeric in seconds When Answer Delay is enabl
275. rally recommend leaving TDM Routing enabled 73 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 7 Set up the Web Browser GUI Optional After an IP address for the MultiVOIP unit has been established you can choose to do any further configuration of the unit a by using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI or b by continuing to use the MultiVOIP Windows GUI If you want to do configuration work using the web browser GUI you must first set it up To do so follow the steps below A Set IP address of MultiVOIP unit using the MultiVOIP Configuration program the Windows GUI B Save Setup in Windows GUI C Close Windows GUI D Install Java program from MultiVOIP product CD on first use only E Open web browser F Browse to IP address of MultiVOIP unit G If username and password have been established enter them when when prompted H Set browser to allow pop ups The MultiVOIP Web GUI makes extensive use of pop up windows to access screens and commands I Use web browser GUI to configure or operate MultiVOIP unit The configuration screens in the web browser GUI will have the same content as their counterparts in the Windows GUI only the graphic presentation will be different For more details on enabling the MultiVOIP web GUL see the Web Browser Interface section of the Operation amp Maintenance chapter of this manual 74 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 8 Set Voice FAX Pa
276. rameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu toolbar icon keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Voice FAX Parameters Pulldown Icon Multi oIP Multi OIP v6 08 CE 06 08 Multi oIP Multi OIP 6 0i Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctri Alt I Configuration voice Channels Ctrl H InterFace X Ctrl alt N SNMP Parameters Ctrl Regional Parameters Cctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl aAlt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl alt Call Signaling Ctrl Alt C gt Radius NAT Traversal Interface Shortcut Sidebar amp Multi oIP Multi Configuration Ctrl H Configuration Etherne 75 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In each field enter the values that fit your particular network m Voice Fax Parameters Select Channel A Voice Gain Fax Modem parameters IV Fax Relay Enable S Cancel Input jO ZhdB OutputjO Zh dB J Modem Relay Enable p Dtmf Max Baud Rate 14400 7 Copy Channel Gain Hah 4 Low 7 Fax Volume 35 dB itter Val faco ms Duration 100 a Jitter Value GA Help DTMF Out Of Band Fixed Duration Mode Ma Out Of Band Mode Rfc2833 gi Info m Coder Advanced Features Manual Automatic IV Silence Compression Selected Coder G 723 1 6 3 kbps 7 IV Echo Cancellation Max bandwidth fio kbps J Forward Error Corre
277. reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation 348 MultiVOIP User Guide Regulatory Information Warning Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Industry Canada This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement Canadien sur le mat riel brouilleur FCC Part 68 Telecom 1 This equipment complies with part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission Rules On the outside surface of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number This information must be provided
278. red Gateway Details cece 289 No of Pings Received Link Management field 279 No of Pings Sent Link Management field sss eeto esearo 279 no response amp busy E1 forwarding dual conditions 229 no response amp busy T1 forwarding dual conditions 187 Number of Days email log criteria ee ra Ee AEE aa E EEE ES 135 Number of Records email log Criteria nnn n pi 135 Number of Retransmissions RADIUS screen field ceesceeseeereees 160 Number Plan Called Party Blass dia campaign 104 DP E E ees Ai Ree aetna 96 Number Type Called Party Bl isin prierai e 104 Pl ES E tial bee ae aiken 96 Number Type Calling Party Bl E inde aa 104 Piss biiedvaidia aia ainds 96 numbering plan resources 250 obtaining updated firmware 300 Offhook alert cece eeeeeseeeeeeeees 83 Offhook Alert Voice Fax Params and Intercept Tone Regional Params ech s cstere e or 83 Offhook Alert Timer Voice FAX AutoCall Offhook Alert field 85 Online Statistics Updation Interval field Ogs jatine 142 operating temperature 34 operating voltage TA mode Bienne scenes 26 Operator ISDN field EBIASDN ananena enosis 104 MultiVOIP User Guide TISDN iriri 96 Optimization Factor field 87 Options callee statistics logs field ds aus eo rre ae EN OE ER SaN 269 Options caller statistics logs field dost es cider dh E EE EEN 269 Options From
279. register within this time the endpoint is unregistered Status The current status of the gateway either registered or unregistered No of The number of gateways currently Entries registered to the Registrar This includes all SPP clients registered and the Registrar itself Details Count of If a registered gateway is selected by Registered clicking on it in the screen The Count of Numbers Registered Numbers will indicate the number of registered phone numbers for the selected gateway When a client registers all of its inbound phonebook s phone numbers become registered List of Lists all of the registered phone numbers for Registered the selected gateway Numbers 289 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide About Alternate Server Statistics Accessing Alternate Server Statistics Pulldown Statistics Call Progress Ctrl alt 4 Logs Ctrl O IP Statistics Ctrl P T1JE1 Statistics Ctrl 1 Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt W Link Management Ctrl 2 ger ime H323 Gatekeepers Ctrl 8 SIP Proxies Ctrl 9 SPP Registrars Ctrl 7 Shortcut Sidebar E Statistics Call Progress Logs Ctrl Alt 4 IP Statistics Link Management T1JE1 Statistics Registered Gateway Details H 323 Gatekeepers SIP Proxies SPP Registrars 290 H 323 GateKeepers LIP Address _ Po GKName_ Type Priority Status 65 126 90 143 1719 MYP_LSGK Primary 0 65 126 90 92 1719 MY
280. rogress Details Field Definitions cont d From To Details Description Gateway alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway Name from string that handled the origination of this call IP Address X X X X IP address from which the call from where xhasa was received range of 0 to 255 Options SC FEC Displays VOIP transmission options in use on the current call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression Gateway alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway Name to string that handled the completion of this call IP Address X X X X IP address to which the call was to where x has a sent range of 0 to 255 Options SC FEC Displays VOIP transmission 260 options in use on the current call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Call Progress Details Field Definitions cont d DTMF Other Details Field Name Values Description Prefix specified Displays the dialed digits that Matched dialing digits were matched to a phonebook entry Outbound 0 9 The digits transmitted by the Digits Sent MultiVOIP to the PBX telco for this call Outbound 0 9 Of the digits transmitted by the Digits MultiVOIP to the PBX telco for Received this call these are the digits that were confirmed as being received Server Details n n n n The IP address etc of
281. rol the MultiVOIP unit with a graphic user interface GUI based on the common web browser platform Qualifying browsers are InternetExplorer6 Netscape6 and Mozilla FireFox 1 0 Pop Ups Note that the MultiVOIP Web GUI uses pop up windows extensively You must configure the browser to allow pop ups when using the MultiVOIP Web GUI MultiVOIP Web Browser GUI Overview Function Remote configuration and control of MultiVOIP units Configuration Local Windows GUI must be used Prerequisite to assign IP address to MultiVOIP Browser Version Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher or Requirement Netscape 6 0 or higher or Mozilla Firefox 1 0 or higher Java Requirement Java Runtime Environment version 1 4 0_01 or higher this application program is included with MultiVOIP Video Usability large video monitor recommended 334 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The initial configuration step of assigning the voip unit an IP address must still be done locally using the Windows GUI However all additional configuration can be done via the web GUI The content and organization of the web GUI is directly parallel to the Windows GUI For each screen in the Windows GUI there is a corresponding screen in the web GUI The fields on each screen are the same as well E Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 v4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q O
282. rom the digits that the analog VOIP must dial onto its local PSTN to complete the call The digits 101 7175662 are forwarded to the Site B analog VOIP The call passes through the IP network in this case the Internet The call arrives at the Site B VOIP This analog VOIP receives this dialing string from the MVP2410 101 7175662 The analog VOIP seeing the 101 prefix uses its own channel 1 an FXO port to connect the call to the PSTN Then the analog VOIP dials its local phone number 7175662 to complete the call 205 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Site D calling Site F A voip call from Pierre PBX to extension 7424 on the key telephone system in Lincoln Nebraska A The required entry in the Pierre Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 1402263742 The call would be directed to the Lincoln voip s IP address 200 2 9 5 Generally on such a call the caller would have to dial an initial 9 But typically the PBX would not pass the initial 9 to the voip If the PBX did pass along that 9 however its removal would have to be specified in the local Outbound Phonebook B The corresponding entry in the Lincoln Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 1402263742 for calls within the office at Lincoln 1402 for calls to the Lincoln local calling area PSTN Call Event Sequence 1 Caller at Pierre dials 914022637424 2 Pierre PB
283. ron epas 266 Call Forwarded to cesses 270 Call Transferred to e ee 270 Disconnect Reason 0 267 DTMF Capability 267 Duration eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 266 From gateway 266 Gateway Name callee 269 Gateway Name caller 269 H 450 functionality 270 IP Address callee 269 IP Address caller 0 0 269 IP Direction column 266 LOB Haos n a 266 Mode sepmana etera et 266 Options callee cece 269 Options caller scenes 269 Outbound digits eee 269 Outbound Digits Recvd 267 Outbound Digits Sent 267 Packets lOSt eceescceeeeeesseeeees 267 Packets recvd ee eeceeeeesseeeeeee 267 Packets Sent eesceeeeesseeeeeee 267 Packets Sent cesceeeeeeeseeeeeee 266 Server Details eee 267 MultiVOIP User Guide Start Date Time 0 266 StAtUs ein inher eee tebe soos 266 Supplementary Services info 270 To gateway 266 Type call column 266 Voice coder 267 Logs Statistics function 264 Logs Statistics screen Delete File button eee 266 field definitions 266 267 269 270 First Duttonina 266 Last DUttON nia 266 Next button eee eee 266 Previous button 00 0 cece 266 logs and web browser GUI 141 logs by email illustration 139 Logs screen definitions
284. rrection by party Correction by call answering call originator 163 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 19 Set Baud Rate The Connection option in the sidebar menu has a Settings item that includes the baud rate setting for the COM port of the computer running the MultiVOIP software First it is important to note that the default COM port established by the MultiVOIP program is COM1 Do not accept the default value until you have checked the COM port allocation on your PC To do this check for COM port assignments in the system resource dialog box es of your Windows operating system If COM1 is not available you must change the COM port setting to COM2 or some other COM port that you have confirmed as being available on your PC The default baud rate is 115 200 bps 164 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 20 View System Information screen and set updating interval optional This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing System Information Screen Pulldown Icon Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctri Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H TIfE1 ISDN Parameters Ctrl T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctri Alt H System Information Ctrl Alt Call Signaling Ke Alt C Shortcut Sidebar Ctrl Alt Y Co
285. rs Ctrl Alt 5 Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl alt H 323 Ctrl Alt 3 SIP Ctrl Alt SFt P SPP Ctrl Alt Sft 5 RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt SFt Shortcut Sidebar E Configuration Ethernet IP Alt C Voice Fax Interface fig Call Signaling H 323 SIP SPP SNMP Regional Accessing the Signaling Protocols Protocol H 323 Ctrl Alt 3 SIP Ctrl Alt Shft P SPP Ctrl Alt Shft P 108 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration H 323 JV Use Fast Start Signaling Port fi 720 I Allow Incoming Calls Through Gatekeeper Only r GateKeeper RAS Parameters IP Address RAS Port GateKeeper Name Primary GK 192 GS Sie Cancel Alternate GK 1 Oo 0 0 0 Help Alternate GK 2 Det Ole 0 RAS TTL Value GateKeeper Discovery Polling Interval I Use Online Alternate GateKeeper List r H323 Version 4 Options J H 323 Multiplexing Mux J H 245 Tunneling Tun J Parallel H 245 FS Tun I Annex E AE The tables below describes all fields in the general H 323 Call Signaling screen H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Use Fast Start Y N Enables the H 323 Fast Start procedure May need to be enabled disabled for compatibility with third party VOIP gateways Signaling Port port Default 1720
286. s InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing the Multi OIP on your computer Click Finish 9 When setup of the MultiVOIP software is complete you will be prompted to run the MultiVOIP software to configure the VOIP Q Do you want to run Multi olP Configuration Software installation is complete at this point You may proceed with Technical Configuration now or not at your convenience Technical Configuration instructions are in the next chapter of this manual 45 Technical Configuration T1 E1 MultiVOIP User Guide Un Installing the MultiVOIP Configuration Software 1 To un install the MultiVOIP configuration software go to Start Programs and locate the entry for the MultiVOIP program Select Uninstall Set Program Access and Defaults hae Windows Catalog Windows Update WinZip G Launch RealOne Player T Programs Ee Documents 2 Settings 27 Search Help and Support Fm Run Windows XP Professional o Shut Down start G Snagit an Accessories fan Macromedia FreeHand 9 Jasc Software fan Mozilla Firefox MultiVOIP 6 06 IE SigmaTel MSCN Audio Player Snaglt 7 IE Microsoft Office As Acrobat Distiller 7 0 J Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional FaxFinder CallFinder Manager ff MultivOrP 6 08 C FaxFinder Client Software E ERIR TAn B Configuration gt B Configuration Port Setup B Date and Time Setup Download Factor
287. s dialing sequences for calls exchanges that will be connected to line another VOIP in the system numbers Numbers beginning with extensions these sequences are diverted from the PTSN and carried on Internet or other IP network Total Digits as needed This field currently disabled number of digits the phone user must dial to reach specified destination Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination IP Address n n n n the IP address to which the for call will be directed if it n 0 255 begins with the destination pattern given Description alpha Describes the facility or numeric geographical location at which the call will be completed Protocol Type SIP or H 323 Indicates protocol to be used in or SPP outbound transmission Single Port Protocol SPP is a non standard protocol designed by Multi Tech 178 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 fields Use Gatekeepr Y N Indicates whether or not gatekeeper is used Gateway alpha The H 323 ID assigned to the H 323 ID Huneric destination MultiVOIP Only valid if Use Gatekeeper is enabled for this entry Gateway numeric This number becomes Prefix registered with the GateKeeper Ca
288. s been assigned to a particular voip channel 2 The caller in Tavistock hears dial tone from the Tavistock voip 3 The caller in Tavistock dials 02073983117 4 The Tavistock voip sends the entire dialed string to the Inner London voip at IP address 200 2 9 9 5 The Inner London voip matches the called digits 02073983117to its Inbound Phonebook entry 020739883 which it removes Then it adds back the 3 as a prefix 6 The Inner London PBX dials extension 3117 in the office in Inner London Variations in PBX Characteristics The exact dialing strings needed in the Outbound and Inbound Phonebooks of the MVP3010 will depend on the capabilities of the PBX Some PBXs require trunk access codes like an 8 or 9 to access an outside line or to access the VOIP network Other PBXs can automatically distinguish between intra PBX calls PSTN calls and VOIP calls Some PBX units can also insert digits automatically when they receive certain dialing strings from a phone station For example a PBX may be programmable to insert automatically the three digit VOIP identifier strings into calls to be directed to analog VOIPs The MVP3010 offers complete flexibility for inter operation with PBX units so that a coherent dialing scheme can be established to connect a company s multiple sites together in a way that is convenient and intuitive for phone users When working together with modern PBX units the presence of the M
289. s that fit your particular system ReadOny pubie Read Write aa Read Onl Read Write I 122 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The SNMP Parameter fields are described in the table below SNMP Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable SNMP Y N Enables the SNMP code in the Agent firmware of the MultiVOIP This must be enabled for the MultiVOIP to communicate with and be controllable by the MultiVoipManager software Default disabled Trap Manager Parameters Address 4 places n n n n IP address of MultiVoipManager n 0 255 PC Community A community is a group of VOIP Name endpoints that can communicate with each other Often public is used to designate a grouping where all end users have access to entire VOIP network However calling permissions can be configured to restrict access as needed Port Number 162 The default port number of the SNMP manager receiving the traps is the standard port 162 Community Length 19 First community grouping Name 1 characters max Case sensitive Permissions Read Only If this community needs to change MultiVOIP settings select Read Wri ead Write Read Write Otherwise select Read Only to view settings Community Length 19 Second community grouping Name 2 characters max Case sensitive Permissions Read Only If this community needs to change MultiVOIP settings select Read Write
290. seesteeeeee 221 Advanced button 223 DeSCTription cecceeceeseeeteeeee 221 destination pattern 60 221 Gateway H 323 ID 222 Gateway Prefix eseese 222 H 323 Port Numbet 4 222 TP Adress onneen 221 Protocol Type eeceeeeeseeeeee 221 Remote Device is legacy Multi VOIP ou cececeeeeeeeee 224 Remove Prefix cccccessecees 221 SIP Port Numbet 005 223 SPURL rereana ie 223 Total Digits 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeee 221 Transport Protocol SIP 223 Use Gatekeeper 222 224 Use Proxy SIP ooeec 223 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook fields T1 Accept Any Numbet 177 Add Prefix erena 178 Advanced button cceee 180 Description sesser 178 Destination Pattern 00 178 Gateway H 323 ID 179 Gateway Prefix oee 179 IP Address eee nate ccna 178 Protocol Type 178 Q 931 Port Numbet 179 Remove Prefix cccccesseeees 178 SIP Port Numbet 0005 180 SIP UR n0eeca nck eavere shen 180 Total Digits ceisia 178 Transport Protocol SIP 180 367 Index Use Gatekeeper 0 0 179 181 Use Proxy SIP eceeseeeseeeeees 180 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook screen FED E E PEA 219 Dos er a ie 176 Fields 1 SEE E OAA 224 TD E O 181 add on module 4 to 8 channel Installation ccessceseesseeeeees 361 Address SNMP field 0
291. sider vis a vis TOS field above for Assured Forwarding behavior The MultiVOIP Voip Media PHB parameter defaults to the value 46 decimal 2E hex 101110 binary consider vis a vis TOS field above To disable DiffServ configure both fields to 0 decimal 71 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description FTP Parameter fields FTP Server Enable Y N Default disabled See FTP Server File Transfers in Operation amp Maintenance chapter MultiVOIP unit has an FTP Server function so that firmware and other important operating software files can be transferred to the voip via the network DNS Para meter fields Enable DNS Y N Default disabled Enables Domain Name Space System function where computer names are resolved using a worldwide distributed database Enable SRV Y N Enables service record function Service record is a category of data in the Internet Domain Name System specifying information on available servers for a specific protocol and domain as defined in RFC 2782 Newer internet protocols like SIP STUN H 323 POP3 and XMPP may require SRV support from clients Client implementations of older protocols like LDAP and SMTP may have been enhanced in some settings to support SRV DNS Server IP Address 4 places 0 255 IP address of specific
292. sion and outbound phonebook portion of the MultiVOIP software IFM Version numeric Indicates the version of the firmware running on the MultiVOIP s Interface Module which is its analog telephony hardware Mac alpha Denotes the number assigned as the Address numeric voip unit s unique Ethernet address Up Time days Indicates how long the voip has been hours running since its last booting mm ss Hardware alpha Indicates the version of the ID numeric MultiVOIP unit s circuit board and components 167 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The frequency with which the System Information screen is updated is determined by a setting in the Logs screen 21 Saving the MultiVOIP Configuration When values have been set for all of the MultiVOIP s various operating parameters click on Save Setup in the sidebar Configuration Phone Book Statistics Connection Help H e H H 168 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 22 Creating a User Default Configuration When a Setup complete grouping of parameters is being saved you will be prompted about designating that setup as a User Default setup A User Default setup may be useful as a baseline of site specific values to which you can easily revert Establishing a User Default Setup is optional Mult OIP __ will be brought down OK Cancel Help 169 Chapter 6 T1 Phonebook Con
293. smit clock is Slip greater than the frequency of the transmit Negative system interface working clock A frame is skipped Bipolar Integer tally of Bipolar Violation or BPV refers to two Violation violation count successive pulses of the same polarity on since last reset string of 8 zeroes Tally since last reset Tally since last reset the E1 line On an AMI encoded line this represents a line error On a B8ZS line this may represent the substitution for a Displayed value will increment if consecutive zeroes beyond a set threshold are detected I e tally increments if more than 7 consecutive zeroes in the received data stream are detected under B8ZS line coding or if 15 consecutive zeroes are detected under AMI line coding Slip in transmitted data stream Slips indicate a clocking mismatch or lack of synchronization between T1 E1 devices When slips occur data may be lost or repeated Receive Slip Tally since last reset Slip in received data stream Slips indicate a clocking mismatch or lack of synchronization between T1 E1 devices When slips occur data may be lost or repeated 286 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance About Registered Gateway Details The Registered Gateway Details screen presents a real time display of the special operating parameters of the Single Port Protocol SPP These are configured in the Call Signaling screen and in the Add Edit
294. ss the Unzip button N Run WinZip Unzip to folder C Acme Inc MVP3000 firm Browse Close M Overwrite files without prompting Unzip x pea Jeers Be Ea About Help 303 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Implementing a Software Upgrade MultiVOIP software can be upgraded locally using a single command at the MultiVOIP Windows GUI namely Upgrade Software This command downloads firmware including the H 323 stack and factory default settings from the controller PC to the MultiVOIP unit When using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI firmware and factory default settings can also be transferred from controller PC to MultiVOIP piecemeal using separate commands When using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI to control configure the voip remotely upgrading of software must be done on a piecemeal basis using the FTP Server function of the MultiVOIP unit When performing a piecemeal software upgrade whether from the Windows GUI or web browser GUI follow these steps in order 1 Identify Current Firmware Version 2 Download Firmware 3 Download Factory Defaults When upgrading firmware the software commands Download Firmware and Download Factory Defaults must be implemented in order else the upgrade is incomplete Identifying Current Firmware Version Before implementing a MultiVOIP firmware upgrade be sure to verify the firmware version currently loaded on it The firmware version appears
295. t Inter operation with a RADIUS server allows for call accounting especially for billing on a voip system The MultiVOIP supports inter operation with RADIUS servers for the RADIUS accounting function but not the RADIUS authentication function STUN Support The STUN protocol Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs Network Address Translation assists with the packet routing functions of devices behind NAT firewalls or routers The MultiVOIP supports inter operation with STUN servers and NATs SIP based environment only Gatekeeper T1 voip systems can have gatekeeper functionality by adding as an endpoint a Multi Tech standalone gatekeeper special software residing in separate hardware Gatekeepers are optional but useful within voip systems The gatekeeper acts as the clearinghouse for all calls within its zone MultiTech s stand alone gatekeeper software performs all of the standard gatekeepers functions address translation admission control and bandwidth control and also supports many valuable optional functions call control signaling call authorization bandwidth management and call management Management Configuration and system management can be done locally with the MultiVOIP configuration software After an IP address has been assigned locally other configuration can be done remotely using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI Remote system management can be done with the MultiVoipManager SNMP software or via the Mult
296. t User can choose whether to load Factory Default Settings or Current Configuration settings 298 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Downloading here refers to transferring program files from the PC to the nonvolatile flash memory of the MultiVOIP Such transfers are made via the PC s serial port This can be understood as a download from the perspective of the MultiVOIP unit When new versions of the MultiVoip software become available they will be posted on MultiTech s web or FTP sites Although transferring updated program files from the MultiTech web FTP site to the user s PC can generally be considered a download from the perspective of the PC this type of download cannot be initiated from the MultiVoip software s Program menu command set Generally updated firmware must be downloaded from the MultiTech web FIP site to the PC before it can be loaded from the PC to the MultiVOIP Configuration Option The Configuration option in the MultiVOIP Program menu launches the MultiVOIP Configuration software program Configuration Port Setup The Configuration Port Setup option in the MultiVOIP Program menu brings up the COM Port Setup screen of the MultiVOIP configuration software COM Port Setup Select Port com M Baud Rate 115200 m Modem Setup Init String 4TSO 18E5 SB1152008D1 Init Response O D Dial String Connect Response CONNECT Hangup Str
297. t increment if multiframe alignment has Alignment been lost or if loss of frame alignment has been detected Transmit Tally since last Slip in transmitted data stream Slips Slip reset indicate a clocking mismatch or lack of synchronization between T1 E1 devices When slips occur data may be lost or repeated Pulse The pulse density of the received data Density stream is below the requirement defined Violation by ANSI T1 403 or more than 15 consecutive zeros are detected Line The line loopback activation signal Loopback has been detected in the received bit Activation stream Signal Transmit At least 32 consecutive zeros were Line Open transmitted Transmit For use by MTS Technical Support Data Personnel Underrun Transmit The frequency of the transmit clock is Slip greater than the frequency of the Negative transmit system interface working clock A frame is skipped 282 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance T1 Statistics Field Definitions cont d Field Values Description Name Bipolar Integer tally of Two successive pulses of the same Violation violation count polarity have been received and these since last reset Pulses are not part of zero substitution On an AMI encoded line this represents a line error On a B8ZS line this may represent the substitution for a string of 8 zeroes Receive Slip Tally since last A receive slip positive or neg
298. t Guide is shipped with the MultiVOIP and an electronic copy is included on the Product CD 29 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation and Cabling 30 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling Introduction When the MVP2410 or MVP3010 unit is to be installed into a rack two able bodied persons should participate Please read the safety notices before beginning installation Safety Warnings Lithium Battery Caution A lithium battery on the voice fax channel board provides backup power for the timekeeping capability The battery has an estimated life expectancy of ten years When the battery starts to weaken the date and time may be incorrect If the battery fails the board must be sent back to Multi Tech Systems for battery replacement Warning There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Safety Warnings Telecom 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 Never install a telephone jack in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 3 This product is to be used with UL and UL listed computers 4 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 5 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines 6 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm T
299. t or html Mail type in which log reports will be sent Subject text User specified Subject line that will appear for all emailed log reports for this MultiVOIP unit Reply To email address User specified This email address Address functions as a source email identifier for the MultiVOIP which of course cannot usefully receive email messages The Reply To address provides a destination for returned messages indicating the status of messages sent by the MultiVOIP esp to indicate when log report email was undeliverable or when an error has occurred User specified Email address at which VOIP administrator will receive log reports Mail Criteria Criteria for sending log summary by email The log summary email will be sent out either when the user specified number of log messages has accumulated or once every day or multiple days which ever comes first Number of Records integer This is the number of log records that must accumulate to trigger the sending of a log summary email Number of Days integer This is the number of days that must pass before triggering the sending of a log summary email 135 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The SMTP Parameters dialog box has a secondary dialog box Custom Fields that allows you to customize email log messages for the MultiVOIP The MultiVOIP software logs data about many aspects of the call traffic going through the Mu
300. t status of the MultiVOIP not registered gateway with respect to the SIP proxy either registered or unregistered 292 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance r SPP Registrars IP Address Pot Type 65 126 90 24 10000 Primary Registered 65 126 90 81 10000 Predef 1 Not Registered gt SPP Registrars Statistics Servers Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings IP Address n n n n The IP address of the gatekeeper for n 0 255 Port TDMA time slot used for communication between MultiVOIP unit and the gatekeeper that serves it Type Primary This field describes the type of gateway as Predefined which the Multi VOIP is defined with respect to the gatekeeper Status registered not The current status of the gateway either registered registered or unregistered 293 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide About Packetization Time You can use the Packetization Time screen to specify definite packetization rates for coders selected in the Voice FAX Parameters screen in the Coder Options group of fields The Packetization Time screen is accessible under the Advanced options entry in the sidebar list of the main voip software screen In dealing with RTP parameters the Packetization Time screen is closely related to both Voice FAX Parameters and to IP Statistics It is located in the Advance
301. tatistics fields Clearcoat oes 273 Received RTCP Packets 275 Received RTP Packets 275 Received TCP Packets 274 Received Total Packets 273 Received UDP Packets 274 Received with errors RTCP Packets i c6isvaniaricses 275 Received with errors RTP Packets EE E EE leech sve eevee 275 Received with errors TCP Packets E E EET E 274 Received with errors Total Packets sesh senienas 274 Received with errors UDP Packets i250 creeancss Sssok ae 274 Transmitted RTCP Packets 275 Transmitted RTP Packets 275 Transmitted TCP Packets 274 Transmitted Total Packets 273 Transmitted UDP Packets 274 IP Statistics function 271 ISDN Parameters Bel era sicletevens Sia eke 103 104 379 Index ED EEE AE O EE 95 96 ISDN parameters setting 107 ISDN PRI types supported 0 ee 107 ISDN PRI implementations 107 Java installing ei fo erne 337 web GUI and eeeeeeeeeee 337 jitter buffer eee eeeeeeeeee 86 Jitter Value Fax field 008 80 Jitter Value field cece 88 jitter dynamic sesser 86 Keep Alive Timers NAT STUN 157 Keep Alive field oo cece 119 Knowledge Base online for Multi VOIPS oo eeeeesseceeeeeseeeeee 7 Last button Logs Statistics screen 266 Last Error Link Management field REET ome oer 279 LED definitions a eeepc EE peer A 24 MVP2400
302. te to the setting used in the PBX For example if the PBX is set to Terminal then the MultiVOIP must be set to Network 95 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide T1 Parameter Definitions contd Field Name Values Description ISDN Parameters Country see table later Country in which MultiVOIP is this chapter operating with ISDN Operator see table later Indicates phone switch this chapter manufacturer model or refers to telco so as to specify the switching system in question ISDN is implemented somewhat differently in different switches Note on ISDN implementation options Country amp are shown arranged by Operator country in a table below soon options after E1 Parameter Definitions Numbering Details Parameters Calling Party unknown Calling party type is part of Number Type national calling party Number international Information element that is sent network specific on ISDN line The Calling party subscriber number information element abbreviated identifies the origin of a call as received from network Called Party unknown Called Party Number Type and Number Type national Called Party Number Plan are international part of Calling Party Number network specific Information element that is sent subscriber on ISDN line The Called party abbreviated number information element as received from identifies destination of
303. tem allows Wren Clothing employees in London and Amsterdam to call anywhere in Paris at local rates it allows Wren Clothing employees in Paris and London to call anywhere in Amsterdam at local rates United Kingdom Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Amsterdam y Wren Clothing Co 7 VOIP PBX Site London eee gt asg iarann a DA aa The Netherlands Wren Clothin Co VOIP PBX Site Paris ra SS A Calls at Amsterdam local rates Calls at Paris local rates France Local Calling Areas 212 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration National Rate Calls Within Nation of Remote VOIP Site In the third use of the VOIP system the national calling area of each VOIP location becomes accessible to all of the VOIP system s users As a result international calls can be made at national calling rates Again significant savings are possible For example suppose that the Wren Clothing Company buys its buttons from the Chickadee Button Company in the Dutch city of Rotterdam In that case Wren Clothing personnel in both London and Paris could call the Chickadee Button Company without paying international long distance rates only Dutch national calling rates would be charged This applies to calls completed anywhere in The Netherlands United Kingdom The Wren Clothing Co Netherlands VOIP PBX Site F Wren Clothing Co ae A V
304. tered in the Caller Id field of the Supplementary Services screen When channel 2 of the Omaha voip is busy but still receives a call attempt from any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Busy Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will be sent back and will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip This confirms to the Denver voip that the channel or phone station is busy in Omaha 152 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Connected If the home voip unit is receiving a Party call and Connected Party is selected Allowed then the identifier from the Caller Id Name Type field will tell the originating remote CNI voip unit that the attempted call has been completed and the connection is made This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is receiving the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip unit in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Connected Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field of the Supplementary Services screen When channel 2 of the Omaha voip completes an attempted call from any other
305. tes eee 278 Pings per Test neser 278 Response Timeout 278 Round Trip Delay eee 279 Start Now command button 278 Timer Interval between Pings 278 Link Management Statistics screen field definitions 278 279 Link Status fields Link Management Statistics SCTEOM cise chsh E E 279 List of Registered Numbers field Registered Gateway Details 289 lithium battery caution 31 LNK LED El EEE E aes 24 a e E A E 16 loading of weight in rack 34 local configuration ccceeee 53 380 MultiVOIP User Guide local configuration procedure detailed analog 0 00 eeeeeerees 60 SUIMIMALY esenea oeh egnidan aesir 59 local voip configuration 50 local Windows GUI vs web GUI COMPAFISON eee seeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeee 335 local rate access E1 to remote PSTN 17 local rate calls to remote voip sites Bl Basset Sentoredts herria pede eatene 211 Log statistics logs field 266 log report email customizing 136 138 log report email triggering 135 log reporting method setting 140 LOS TEPOMMS nnne aa 57 log reports amp SMTP 133 log reports by email eee 133 logging OptiONs ceeeeseeeteeeee 141 logging update interval 141 logging web GUI and 336 Login Name SMTP field 134 Logs Statistics fields Bytes TOCVGS sssaaa 267 Bytes Sentsinru
306. the New York City local number just as they would through the public phone system that call will still be completed through the VOIP system This PhoneBook Configuration procedure is brief but it is followed by an example case For many people the example case may be easier to grasp than the procedure steps Configuration is not difficult but all phone number sequences and other information must be entered exactly otherwise connections will not be made 172 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Phonebook configuration screens can be accessed using icons or the sidebar menu Phonebook Icons Description Phone Book leone Phonebook Configuration D ee ee amp B Phone Book Icons a A a py ke amp B Anne Danian a Phonebook E Bi S oSI Edit selected Inbound a Phonebook Entry CIETFEN Outbound Phonebook Entries List Boe A 2 e amp Ee Phone Book Icons A E m B28 2B Bi E Bute Te oi Edit selected Outbound B p B a i Phonebook Entry 173 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebook Pulldown Menu Phone Book Outbound Phone Book Alt O gt List Entries Ctrl L Inbound Phone Boo Ls Alt gt AddeEntry cCtri 4 Edit Entry Ctrl E Inbound Phonebook Shortcut Outbound Phonebook Shortcut Alt I Alt O Phonebook Sidebar Menu Configuration Advanced Phone Book Outbound Phone Book List Entries
307. the same as Caller ID and Call Forwarding The first four features are found in the Supplementary Services window the fifth Call Forwarding appears in the Add Edit Inbound phonebook screen Note that the first three features are closely related All of these H 450 features are supported for H 323 operation only they are not supported for SIP or SPP T1 Front Panel LEDs The MVP2410 and MVP24 48 both use a common main circuit board or motherboard Consequently the LED indicators are the same for both Active LEDs The MVP2410 front panel has two sets of identical LEDs In the MVP2410 as shipped that is without an expansion card the left hand set of LEDs is functional whereas the right hand set is not When the MVP2410 has been upgraded with an MVP24 48 kit the right hand set of LEDs will also become active Figure 1 2 MVP2410 LEDs T1 LED Descriptions The descriptions below apply to the digital T1 MultiVOIP units The MVP2410 has four sets of LEDs plus a lone LED at its far right end As viewed from the front of the MVP2410 it is the two left groups that are active and present feedback about the operation of the unit If an MVP24 48 expansion card is added to the MVP2410 the two LED groups on the right become operational with respect to the second T1 connection 15 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide MVP2410 Front Panel LED Definitions LED NAME DESCRIPTION Power Indicat
308. the setup of the VoIP generally should allow users to make calls on a non toll basis to any numbers accessible without toll by users at all other locations on the VoIP system Consider for example a company with VOIP equipped offices in New York Miami and Los Angeles each served by its own PBX When the VOIP phone books are set correctly personnel in the Miami office should be able to make calls without toll not only to the company s offices in New York and Los Angeles but also to any number that s local in those two cities To achieve transparency of the VoIP telephony system and to give full access to all types of non toll calls made possible by the VOIP system the VoIP administrator must properly configure the Outbound and Inbound phone books of each VoIP in the system The Outbound phonebook for a particular VoIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate locally typically in a PBX in a particular facility and reach any of its possible destinations at 171 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide remote VoIP sites including non toll calls completed in the PSTN at the remote site The Inbound phonebook for a particular VoIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate remotely from any other VOIP sites in the system and to terminate on that particular VOIP Briefly stated the MultiVOIP s Outbound phonebook lists the phone stations it
309. the traffic DTMF Capability for n 0 255 and or other server IP related descriptions inband out of band Expressions differ slightly for different Call Signaling protocols H 323 SIP or SPP control server if any being used whether an H 323 gatekeeper a SIP proxy or an SPP registrar gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server Indicates whether the DTMF dialing digits are carried Inband or Out of Band The corresponding field values differ for the 3 different voip protocols For H 323 this field can display Out of Band or Inband For SIP it can display either Out of Band RFC2833 or Out of Band SIP INFO to indicate the out of band condition or Inband to indicate the in band condition For SPP it can display Out of Band RFC2833 or Inband 261 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Call Progress Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Supplementary Services Status Call on Hold alphanumeric Describes held call by its IP address source location gateway identifier and hold duration Location gateway identifiers comes from Gateway Name field in Phone Book Configuration screen of remote voip Call Waiting alphanumeric Describes waiting call by its IP address source location gateway identifier and hold duration Location gateway identifiers comes from Gateway Name fie
310. thod The Logs screen lets you choose how the VoIP administrator will receive log reports about the MultiVOIP s performance and the phone call traffic that is passing through it Log reports can be received in one of three ways A in the MultiVOIP program GUD B via email SMTP or C at the MultiVoipManager remote voip system management program SNMP Accessing Logs Traces Screen Pulldown Icon gt Multi oIP Multi OIP 2410 Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt I Voice Channels Ctrl H TIf E1 ISDN Parameters Ctri T SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctri Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ctrl Alt L Ethernet IP Yoice Fax Call Signaling TIsE1sISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal 140 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration If you enable console messages you can customize the types of messages to be included excluded in log reports by clicking on the Filters button and using the Console Messages Filter Settings screen see subsequent page If you use the logging function select the logging option that applies to your VoIP system design If you intend to use a SysLog Server program for logging click in that Enable check box The common SysLog logical port number is 514 If you intend to use the MultiVOIP web browse
311. tion and checking of CRC bits If not enabled all check bits in the transmit direction are set Only applies to ESF frame format Default enabled Frame Format of MultiVOIP should match that used by PBX or telco ESF and D4 are commonly used 92 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration T1 Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description CAS Protocol E amp M Immed Strt E amp M Wink Start E amp M Wink with dial tone FXO Ground Strt FXO Loop Start FXS Ground Strt FXS Loop Start Channel Associated Signaling CAS is a method of incorporating telephony signaling info into a T1 voice data stream In CAS the signaling bits the A B C and D bits are multiplexed into the signal stream of each T1 channel By contrast in Common Channel Signaling CCS one channel handles signaling for all other channels Each CAS protocol defines the states of the signaling bits during the various stages of a call IDLE SEIZED ANSWER RING ON RING OFF The CAS protocol code allows the VOIP to interact properly with the PBX or central office switch that it serves If a user has an old MultiVOIP unit with a firmware version lower than 4 08 and wants to upgrade to 4 08 the latest CAS file 4 08 should also be downloaded into that MultiVOIP unit The new CAS file ensures proper operation between the MultiVOIP and a PBX Match this parameter to the setting of PBX or cent
312. tion has been made It is off when the link is down i e when no Ethernet connection exists While link is up this LED will flash off to indicate data activity T1 T1 Not supported E1 E1 When lit indicates presence of E1 connection PRI PRI On if E1 line is of ISDN Primary Rate type ONL Online This LED is on when frame synchronization has been established on the T1 E1 link IC IC LED is on when Internal Clocking is selected in T1 E1 configuration LC Indicates Loss of Carrier LS Indicates Loss of Signal Test For testing purposes only 24 MultiVOIP User Guide Specifications Specs for Digital T1 MultiVOIP Units Digital T1 MultiVOIP Specifications Parameter MVP 2410 ere Model MVP 2410 w MVP24 48 Expansion Card Operating 100 240 VAC 100 240 VAC Voltage Current 1 2 0 6A 1 2 0 6A Mains 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Frequencies Power 17 watts 27 watts Consumption Mechanical 1 75 H x 1 75 H x Dimensions 17 4 W x 17 4 W x 8 75 D 8 75 D 4 5cm H x 4 5cm H x 44 2 cm W x 44 2 cm W x 22 2 cm D 22 2 cm D Weight 7 1 lbs 7 5 lbs 3 2 kg 3 4 kg 25 Overview Overview Specs for Digital E1 MultiVOIP Units MultiVOIP User Guide Digital E1 MultiVOIP Specifications Parameter MVP 3010 MVP 3010 eE Model w MVP30 60 Expansion Card Operating 100 240 VAC 100 240 VAC Voltage Current
313. tion in Enable voip unit Call Hold allows one party to maintain an idle non talking connection with another party while receiving another call Call Waiting while initiating another call Call Transfer or while performing some other call management function Hold phone The numbers and or symbols that the Sequence keypad caller must press on the phone characters keypad to initiate a call hold The call hold sequence can be 1 to 4 characters in length using any combination of digits or characters or Call Waiting Y N Select to enable Call Waiting function Enable in voip unit Retrieve phone The numbers and or symbols that the Sequence keypad caller must press on the phone characters keypad to initiate retrieval of a two waiting call characters The call waiting retrieval sequence inlength can be 1 to 4 characters in length using any combination of digits or characters or This is the phone keypad sequence that a user must press to retrieve a waiting call Customize able Sequence should be distinct from sequence that might be used to retrieve a waiting call via the PBX or PSTN 148 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Name Enables CNI function Call Name Identification Identification is not the same as Caller Enable ID When enabled on a given voip unit c
314. tores default values 278 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Link Management screen Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Link Status Parameters These fields summarize the results of pinging IP Address a b c d Target of ping column 0 255 No of Pings as listed Number of pings sent to target Sent endpoint No of Pings as listed Number of pings received by Received target endpoint Round Trip as listed Displays how long it took from Delay in milliseconds time ping was sent to time ping Min Max response was received Avg Last Error as listed Indicates when last data error occurred 279 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide T1 Statistics Screen FER AC A Oe ZE pma E first Le se E p 280 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance T1 Statistics Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Red Alarm Integer tally of The alarm condition declared when a alarms device receives no signal or cannot counted since synchronize to the signal being received A last reset Red Alarm is generated if the incoming data stream has no transitions for 176 consecutive pulse positions Blue Alarm Tally since last Alarm signal consisting of all 1 s including reset framing bit positions which indicates disconnection or failure of attached equipment Loss of Tally sinc
315. ts local PSTN to complete the call The digits 101 9435632 are forwarded to the Site B analog VOIP 5 The call passes through the IP network in this case the Internet 6 The call arrives at the Site B VOIP This analog VOIP receives this dialing string from the MVP3010 101 9435632 The analog VOIP seeing the 101 prefix uses its own channel 1 an FXO port to connect the call to the PSTN Then the analog VOIP dials its local phone number 9435632 to complete the call NOTE In the case of Reading Berkshire England both 1189 and 1183 are considered local area codes This is ina sense however a matter of terminology It simply means that numbers of the form 9xx xxxx and 3xx xxxx are both local calls for users at other sites in the VOIP network 247 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Site D calling Site F A voip call from Inner London PBX to extension 7424 on the key telephone system in Tavistock UK A The required entry in the London Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 90182263742 The call would be directed to the Tavistock voip s IP address 200 2 9 5 Generally on such a call the caller would have to dial an initial 9 But typically the PBX would not pass the initial 9 dialed to the voip If the PBX did pass along that 9 however its removal would have to be specified in the local Outbound Phonebook B The corresponding entry
316. uide Operation amp Maintenance MultiVoip Program Menu Items After the MultiVoip program is installed on the PC it can be launched from the Programs group of the Windows Start menu Start Programs MultiVOIP__ In this section we describe the software functions available on this menu B Configuration gt an Accessories gt B Configuration Port Setup an Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt B Date and Time Setup 2 Documents gt FA Jasc Software gt 25 Download CAS Protocol an Mozilla Firefox 2 Download Factory Defaults F Microsoft Office 25 Download Firmware Search b aS Acrobat Distiller 7 0 2 Download User Defaults Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional B Set Password Helgard Support Mutivorr 6 08 gt jB uninstall Run MultivOIP 2410 4 08 I 25 Upgrade Software Programs Settings lt 2 a n 2e a a x lt o z 3 Shut Down start Several basic software functions are accessible from the MultiVoip software menu as shown below MultiVOIP Program Menu Menu Selection Description Configuration Select this to enter the Configuration program where values for IP telephony and other parameters are set Configuration Port Setup Select this to access the COM Port Setup screen of the MultiVOIP Configuration program Date and Time Setup Select this for access to set calendar clock used for data logging 297 Op
317. ulations and standards National and international number plans are listed on this site 250 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration URL Description http kropla com phones htm Guide to international use of modems http www numberplan org National and international numbering plans based on direct input from regulators worldwide Includes lists of telecom carriers per country http www eto dk European Telecommunications Office Primarily concerned with mobile wireless radiotelephony GSM etc http www eto dk ETNS htm European Telephony Numbering Space Resources for pan European telephony services standards etc Part of ETO site http www regtp de en reg_tele start List of European fs_05 html telecom regulatory agencies by country from German telecom authority 251 Chapter 8 Operation and Maintenance 252 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Operation and Maintenance Although most Operation and Maintenance functions of the software are in the Statistics group of screens an important summary appears in the System Information of the Configuration screen group System Information screen This screen presents vital system information at a glance Its primary use is in troubleshooting This screen is accessible via the Configuration pulldown menu the Configuration sidebar menu or by the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Alt
318. ultiplexed UDP call signaling transport Annex E is helpful for high volume voip system endpoints Gateways with lesser volume can afford to use TCP to establish calls However for larger volume endpoints the call setup times and system resource usage under TCP can become problematic Annex E allows endpoints to perform call signaling functions under the UDP protocol which involves substantially streamlined overhead This feature should not be used on the public Internet because of potential problems with security and bandwidth usage 113 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SIP Parameters Signaling Port 5060 IV Use SIP Proxy IV Allow Incoming Calls Through SIP Proxy Only r SIP Proxy Parameters Proxy Domain Name IPAddress Port Number Primary Proxy 5060 Alternate Proxy 1 5060 Alternate Proxy 2 5060 I Append SIP Proxy Domain Namein User ID UserName sda Password baa Re ReaistrationT ime 2600 secs Proxy Polling Interval jeo Ssi TTL Value feo secs OK Cancel Help The tables below describes all fields in the general SIP Call Signaling screen SIP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description SIP Proxy Parameters Signaling Port Port number on which the MultiVOIP UserAgent software module will be waiting for any incoming SIP requests Use SIP Proxy Y N Allows the MultiVOIP to work in c
319. umber 01822 2 4 Calls to Tavistock local PSTN through FXO port Port 4 at Site F 0182 740 0 Gives remote voip users access 263 to extensions of key phone 740 system atTavistock office 0182 741 0 Because call is completed at key 263 system abbreviated dialing 3 741 digits is not workable 0182 742 0 Human operator or auto 263 attendant is needed to 742 complete these calls 244 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Birmingham 01189 0118 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Reading area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Reading 01822 01822 200 2 9 5 Calls to Tavistock area PSTN via FXO channel of the Site F VOIP 0182 200 2 9 5 Calls to Tavistock 26374 key system operator or auto attendant 0207 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to London area PSTN via Site D PBX 8 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to London 398 PBX extensions with four digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 245 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide I
320. uration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Valuee Description FAX Parameters cont d Fax Volume 18 5 dB Controls output level of fax tones To Default to 3 5 dB be changed only under the direction of 9 5 dB Multi Tech s Technical Support Jitter Value Default Defines the inter arrival packet Fax 400 ms deviation in milliseconds for the fax transmission A higher value will increase the delay allowing a higher percentage of packets to be reassembled A lower value will decrease the delay allowing fewer packets to be reassembled Mode Fax FRF 11 FRF11 is frame relay FAX standard using T 38 these coders G 711 G 728 G 729 G 723 1 T 38 not T 38 is an ITU T standard for storing currently and forwarding FAXes via email using sup X 25 packets It uses T 30 fax standards ported and includes special provisions to preclude FAX timeouts during IP transmissions 80 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Coder Parameters Coder Manual or Determines whether selection of Auto coder is manual or automatic matic When Automatic is selected the local and remote voice channels will negotiate the voice coder to be used by selecting the highest bandwidth coder supported by both sides without exceeding the Max Bandwidth setting G 723 G 729 or G 711 are negotiated Selected G 711 a u_
321. urn off at the end of the transfer 7 The Download Firmware procedure is complete 307 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Downloading CAS Protocol 1 The MultiVoip Configuration program may be on or off when invoking the Download CAS Protocol command 2 To invoke the Download CAS Protocol command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Download CAS Protocol Set Program Access and Defaults eS Windows Catalog ty Windows Update a WinZip Launch RealOne Player B Configuration gt an Accessories b B Configuration Port Setup IM Macromedia FreeHand 9 gt BB Date and Time Setup LA Documents r an Jasc Software Ll Download CAS Protoco Mozilla Firefox 25 Download Factory Defaults Microsoft Office 25 Download Firmware Search Acrobat Distiller 7 0 2 Download User Defaults Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional By Set Password HE aeniei I MutivorP 6 08 gt j Uninstall fii MultivOIP 2410 4 08 gt 2 Upgrade Software Programs Settings b Windows XP Professional 3 A message screen will appear warning that the download will entail a rebooting of the MultiVOIP Multi OIP 2410 x Downloading CAS Protocol will Reboot the MultiVOIP 2410 Do you want to continue cne Click OK 308 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 4 The directory containing the CAS protocol files extension is cas will appear SS Look in Er MultiVOIP 2410 4 08 ef E
322. urrently being controlled by the MultiVOIP GUI the home voip Call Name Identification sends an identifier and status information to the administrator of the remote voip involved in the call The feature operates on a channel by channel basis each channel can have a separate identifier If the home voip is originating the call only the Calling Party field is applicable If the home voip is receiving the call then the Alerting Party Busy Party and Connected Party fields are the only applicable fields and any or all of these could be enabled for a given voip channel The status information confirms back to the originator that the callee the home voip is either busy or ringing or that the intended call has been completed and is currently connected The identifier and status information are made available to the remote voip unit and appear in the Caller ID field of its Statistics Call Progress screen This is how MultiVOIP units handle CNI messages in other voip brands H 450 may be implemented differently and then the message presentation may vary 149 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Calling If the home voip unit is originating Party the call and Calling Party is selected Allowed then the identifier from the Caller Id Name Type field will be sent to the remote voip CNI unit being called
323. use Coder G 711 mu law at 64kbps 87 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions contd Field Name Values Description Auto Disconnect Automatic Disconnect ion The Automatic Disconnection group provides four options which can be used singly or in any combination Jitter Value 1 65535 milli seconds The Jitter Value defines the average inter arrival packet deviation in milliseconds before the call is automatically disconnected The default is 300 milliseconds A higher value means voice transmission will be more accepting of jitter A lower value is less tolerant of jitter Inactive by default When active default 300 ms However value must equal or exceed Dynamic Minimum Jitter Value Call Duration 1 65535 seconds Call Duration defines the maximum length of time in seconds that a call remains connected before the call is automatically disconnected Inactive by default When active default 180 sec This may be too short for most configurations requiring upward adjustment Consecutive Packets Lost Network Discon nection 1 65535 1 to 65535 seconds Default 30 sec Consecutive Packets Lost defines the number of consecutive packets that are lost after which the call is automatically disconnected Inactive by default When active default 30 Specifies how long to wait before disconnecting the
324. user must dial to reach specified destination Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination IP Address nn n n the IP address to which the for 0 255 call will be directed if it begins with the destination pattern given Description alpha Describes the facility or numeric geographical location at which the call will be completed Protocol Type SIP H 323 Indicates protocol to be used in or SPP outbound transmission 221 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 fields Use Gatekeepr Y N Indicates whether or not gatekeeper is used Gateway H 323 alpha The H 323 ID assigned to the ID hum e destination MultiVOIP Only valid if Use Gatekeeper is enabled for this entry Gateway numeric This number becomes Prefix registered with the GateKeeper Call requests sent to the gatekeeper and preceded by this prefix will be routed to the VOIP gateway H 323 Port 1720 This parameter pertains to Number Q 931 which is the H 323 call signaling protocol for setup and termination of calls aka ITU T Recommendation 1 451 H 323 employs only one well known port 1720 for Q 931 signaling If Q 931 message oriented signaling protocol is
325. verview While the web GUI s appearance differs slightly its content and organization are essentially the same as that of the Windows GUI except for logging MultiVOIP User Guide E Multi oIP Multi OIP 3010 4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q O A Dawe ras O 4 BS Address http 192 168 41 81 MultiVOIP 3010 Configuration Ethernet IP VoicelFax Call Signaling THEMISDN SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services System Information Advanced Phone Book Statistics Change Password Save amp Reboot Logout Help Current Priority Call Control VoIP Media Others IP Parameters C Enable DHCP IP Address IP Mask C Enable DNS Gateway Name MultivolP 192 168 41 81 255 255 255 0 C Enable DNS SRV rEthernet IP Parameters Ethernet Parameters C Packet Prioritization 802 1p 802 1p Parameters Frame Type TYPE 3 Excellent Effort 6 Voice 0 Best Effort DNS Server IP Address Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB VolP Media PHB 20 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview MultivoIP MultivOIP 3010 4 08 C Firmware Aug 04 2005 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help AMSDSEE BEES OMS E Configuration Voice Fax E Call Signaling
326. voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Connect Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will be sent back and will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip This confirms to the Denver voip that the call has been completed to Omaha 153 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Caller ID This is the identifier of a specific channel of the home voip unit The Caller Id field typically describes a person office or location for example Harry Smith or Bursar s Office or Barnesville Factory Default When this button is clicked all Supplementary Service parameters are set to their default values Copy Copies the Supplementary Service Channel attributes of one channel to another channel Attributes can be copied to multiple channels or all channels at once 154 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 17 Set NAT Traversal parameters NAT Network Address Translation parameters are applicable only when the MultiVOIP is operating in SIP mode The use of STUN Simple Traversal of UDP NATs servers to aid networks with NAT devices is described in RFC 3489 m NAT Traversal m STUN Server Name IP Port Timers Keep alive Cancel Help
327. way Number From Details RADIUS Attributes field 163 Gateway Number From Details SMTP logs field 0 0 eee 138 Gateway Number To Details RADIUS Attributes field 163 Gateway Number To Details SMTP logs field 2 ccieerctecedteeee 138 Gateway Prefix outbound phonebook field El E E E 222 Teac lee 179 General Options fields 118 Generate Local Dial Tone Voice FAX AutoCall Offhook Alert field woo cceceeccesecsseeeeeee 84 Generation Time field Bl estate ieelee ni ateeeits 105 Ty Sa een Bact ih 97 GK Name H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field 291 grounding in rack installations 34 GUI log reporting type button 142 H 245 Tunneling field 0 00 0 0 112 H 323 377 compatibility E1 models 18 compatibility T1 models 10 H 323 Annex E field eee 113 H 323 Call Signaling Parameter definitions 109 111 112 113 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Allow Incoming Calls Through Gatekeeper Only 109 Alternate GK 1 and 2 0 0 110 Annex E H 323 UDP multiplexing eee 113 Gatekeeper Discovery Polling Interval sereias 110 H 245 Tunneling 00 eee 112 H 323 Multiplexing 0 0 112 Parallel H 245 Tunneling with Fast Start scsi etn resepe aei 113 Primary GRs iett e 110 RAS TTL Value eee 111 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Register with GateKeeper
328. wing Contacting Technical Support Country By E mail By telephone France support multitech fr 33 1 64 61 09 81 India support 91 124 340778 multitechindia com U K support 44 118 959 7774 multitech co uk US amp tsupport 800 972 2439 Canada multitech com Rest of support 763 785 3500 World multitech com Internet http www multitech com _forms email_tech_support htm Please have your product information available including model and serial number 346 Chapter 10 Regulatory Information 347 Regulatory Information MultiVOIP User Guide EMC Safety and R amp TTE Directive Compliance The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following European Community Directives Council Directive 89 336 EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and Council Directive 73 23 EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and Council Directive 1999 5 EC of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity FCC Declaration NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide
329. y and fax eee 80 Frame Search Restart Flag T1 stats Pieldete Au Beet Maes eek 282 Frame Type field cece 67 free calls I EE EAT 210 V1 sts A E 171 Frequency custom tone field 131 Frequency 1 tone pair scheme 127 129 Frequency 2 custom tone field 131 Frequency 2 tone pair scheme 127 129 frequency power El models 00 ean 26 PREV iiaeie niade eesi 80 From gateway statistics logs field E EET 266 front panel Bl EE anon 24 MV P2400 oeie nhs aes 15 MV P2410 8 ci hini isei ade 15 MV P3010 sect riie 24 Dliastickevee anda ade 15 FTP client program eee 324 FTP client program obtaining 326 FTP client programs 376 MultiVOIP User Guide graphic vs textual orientation 333 FTP file transfers using FTP client program 326 using web browser n 326 FTP Server Enable Ethernet IP Parameters field 0 ccce 72 FTP Server function as added feature 324 enabling snr cs adiee series 326 FTP Server contacting 328 FTP Server invoking download transfer using FTP client program 332 using web browsert s s s 330 FTP Server logging in 329 FTP Server logging out 333 FTP transfers filetypes sirere tisrinta 324 327 phonebooks 0 0 eee eee 324 Server location e ceseeereeeees 324 function tracing on off logging 143 FXS E1 disconnection triggering of EE IR EE
330. y packets eee eeeeeeees 86 MultiVOIP User Guide delay versus voice quality 87 Delete File button Logs Statistics screen 266 Description callee location BY E AES 229 TED E E EEA 186 Description callee outbound phonebook j o AEE E E 221 TD EEO E ESA 178 Description field Registered Gateway Details Joserra 289 Description From Details RADIUS Attributes field cece 163 Description From Details SMTP logs field eninin tierie 138 Description To Details RADIUS Attributes field cece 163 Description To Details SMTP logs Pel din Seas ee 138 Destination Pattern outbound field Bhi Poe eee ere a ares 221 A A en eee tree tes reece rae 178 destination patterns discussion 1 Dy E o re ere rae rs 214 A A e E EEE A 171 Detection Flash Hook field BY eck E E EE 105 Tr R 97 Detection Time field BA seek EEE 105 TT E bres is eee 97 dial tone CUStOM ccceeeeeeee 131 Aial tONe eii ii 130 DiffServ and IP datagram 71 DiffServ PHB Per Hop Behavior ValUGhc cathe Bits Sas seins 70 dimensions ElmodEl Sanse aei 26 Disconnect Reason SMTP logs field E E E T E 138 Disconnect Reason statistics logs Pel dy ec tater a NR 267 DNS Server IP Address Ethernet IP Parameters field 00cc0 72 Download CAS Protocol program menu option command 308 373 Index Download CAS Protocol option description MultiVOIP pro
331. y Defaults Z5 Download Firmware Download IFM Firmware 25 Download User Defaults B Set Password 5 Upgrade Software zaa Ln 26 Col 1 REC TRK EXT OVR Ox Inbox Microso kA Jasc Paint shop New Brochure Telephony Em 2 Two confirmation screens will appear Click Yes and OK when you are certain you want to continue with the uninstallation process Confirm File Deletion i Are you sure you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components No 46 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling Confirm File Deletion 3 A special warning message similar to that shown below may appear concerning the MultiVOIP software s bin file Click Yes ReadOnly File Detected 47 Technical Configuration T1 E1 MultiVOIP User Guide 4 A completion screen will appear InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on the Multi VOIP Barcel Click Finish 48 Chapter 5 Technical Configuration Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Configuring the MultiVOIP There are two ways in which the MultiVOIP must be configured before operation technical configuration and phonebook configuration Technical Configuration First the MultiVOIP must be configured to operate with technical parameter settings that will match the equipment
332. y dial the Alert phone number for the voip channel The Alert phone number must be set in the Voice Fax Parameters Phone Number field if the voip system is working without a gatekeeper unit there must also be a matching phone number entry in the Outbound Phonebook One use of this feature would be for emergency use where a user goes off hook but does not dial possibly indicating a crisis situation The Offhook Alert feature uses the Intercept Tone as listed in the Regional Parameters screen This tone will be outputted on the phone that was taken off hook but that did not dial The other end of the connection will hear audio from the crisis end as is it would during a normal phone call 83 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description AutoCall Offhook Alert Parameters Auto Call AutoCall Offhook Offhook Alert Alert continued from previous page Both functions apply on a channel by channel basis It would not be appropriate for either of these functions to be applied to a channel that serves in a pool of available channels for general phone traffic Either function requires an entry in the Outgoing phonebook of the local MultiVOIP and a matched setting in the Inbound Phonebook of the remote voip Generate Local Dial Tone Y N Used for AutoCall only If selected dial tone will be ge
333. yyy where x and y represent MultiVOIP model numbers and software version numbers 8A2 Drag and drop files from the local Windows browser e g Windows Explorer to the web browser Exploring Multi VOIP 2410 4 03 Aa Danah iniiai i PA ftp 77voip1 192 168 2 2007 Microsoft Intemet Explorer Fie Edit View Go Favorites Tools Help eae Fonverd Up Cut Copy dress C Program Files Multi Tech Systems MultiVOl x Name casfile cas factdef cnf H323 pdl myptl ftp bin a fxs_loopFtp cas icrosoft Office a h323 pdl Address ry tp M MultiTech System is InPhBk tmr into browser window Multi Tech Systen a Lhsstrs Mutivoir T a LogsMaster log A New file from PC E MultivOIP 24i D MultiVOIP 24 E MultivoIP 30i E MultivOIP 30 E MultvolP 5 91 MulVoIP 6 0 E MultiVoip3000 will overwrite old file Drag this a porate on Voip unit 330 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance You may be asked to confirm the overwriting of files on the MultiVOIP Do so Confirm File Replace File transfer between PC and voip will look like transfer within voip directories 331 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 8B Download with FTP Client Program 8B1 In the local directory browser of the FTP client program locate the directory holding the MultiVOIP program files The default location will be C Program Files Multi Tech Systems Multi VOIP xxxx yyyy wh

Multi-Tech Systems E1 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents